Yamaha RX-V1GL Manual de usuario

Marca: Yamaha

Modelo: RX-V1GL

Categoría: Receptor

Tipo: Manual de usuario

Este manual también es adecuado para

RX-V1

TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR

MACRO

MACROLEARN

OFF ON

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

V-AUX TAPE PHONO

D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD

VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

ENTER-

TAINMENT

CONCERT

VIDEO 2

CONCERT

VIDEO 1

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

EX/ES

THEATER

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

/DTS

SUR.

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

++ +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E

PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

+–

CHP/INDEX

–– –

PHONES BASS TREBLE

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

RX-V1

INPUT MODE

INPUT SELECTOR

VOLUME

S VIDEO VIDEO L RAUDIO

VIDEO AUX

CINEMA DSP

DOLBY

DIGITAL

SURROUND

ON OFF

–

VCR 2 CD

VCR 1

TUNER

CBL/SAT TAPE

D-TV

DVD

BALANCE

PHONOVCR 3

VIDEO AUX

REC OUT/ZONE 2

SOURCE/REMOTE

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

STANDBY/ON

6CH IMPUT

PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING

EFFECT

A/B/C/D/E

SPEAKERS

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

FM/AM MEMORY

MANL/AUTO FM

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MANL MONO

RX-V1

Natural Sound AV Receiver

Ampli-Tuner Audio-Video

UCA

OWNER’S MANUAL

MODE D’EMPLOI

• Explanation of Graphical Symbols

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an

equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the

presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within

the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient

magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to

persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle

is intended to alert you to the presence of important

operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in

the literature accompanying the appliance.

1 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating

instructions should be read before the unit is operated.

2 Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions

should be retained for future reference.

3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the unit and in the

operating instructions should be adhered to.

4 Follow Instructions – All operating and other instructions

should be followed.

5 Water and Moisture – The unit should not be used near

water – for example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen

sink, laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming

pool, etc.

6 Carts and Stands – The unit should be used only with a

cart or stand that is recommended by the

manufacturer.

6A A unit and cart combination should be moved

with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and

uneven surfaces may cause the unit and cart

combination to overturn.

7 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted to

a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the

manufacturer.

8 Ventilation – The unit should be situated so that its

location or position does not interfere with its proper

ventilation. For example, the unit should not be situated

on a bed, sofa, rug, or similar surface, that may block the

ventilation openings; or placed in a built-in installation,

such as a bookcase or cabinet that may impede the flow of

air through the ventilation openings.

9 Heat – The unit should be situated away from heat sources

such as radiators, stoves, or other appliances that produce

heat.

10 Power Sources – The unit should be connected to a power

supply only of the type described in the operating

instructions or as marked on the unit.

11 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be

routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or

pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying

particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience

receptacles, and the point where they exit from the unit.

12 Cleaning – The unit should be cleaned only as

recommended by the manufacturer.

13 Nonuse Periods – The power cord of the unit should be

unplugged from the outlet when left unused for a long

period of time.

14 Object and Liquid Entry – Care should be taken so that

objects do not fall into and liquids are not spilled into the

inside of the unit.

15 Damage Requiring Service – The unit should be serviced

by qualified service personnel when:

A. The power-supply cord or the plug has been

damaged; or

B. Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the

unit; or

C. The unit has been exposed to rain; or

D. The unit does not appear to operate normally or

exhibits a marked change in performance; or

E. The unit has been dropped, or the cabinet damaged.

16 Servicing – The user should not attempt to service the unit

beyond those means described in the operating

instructions. All other servicing should be referred to

qualified service personnel.

17 Power Lines – An outdoor antenna should be located away

from power lines.

18 Grounding or Polarization – Precautions should be taken

so that the grounding or polarization is not defeated.

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS

UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

19 For US customers only:

Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna is

connected to this unit, be sure the antenna system is

grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage

surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the

National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides

information with regard to proper grounding of the mast

and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to

an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors,

location of antenna discharge unit, connection to

grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding

electrode.

FCC INFORMATION (for US customers only)

We Want You Listening For A Lifetime

YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer

Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by

playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud

and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most

importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing.

Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often

undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the

Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics

Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from

excessive volume levels.

Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that

interference will not occur in all installations. If this product

is found to be the source of interference, which can be

determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to

eliminate the problem by using one of the following

measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected

by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit

breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the

antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead,

change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory

results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute

this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate

retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A.

6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620.

The above statements apply ONLY to those products

distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its

subsidiaries.

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE : DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions

contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements.

Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void

your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product.

2. IMPORTANT : When connecting this product to accessories

and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables.

Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all

installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could

void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE : This product has been tested and found to comply

with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for

Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these

requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that

your use of this product in a residential environment will not

result in harmful interference with other electronic devices.

This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not

installed and used according to the instructions found in the

users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation

of other electronic devices.

Note to CATV system installer:

This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s

attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides

guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies

that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding

system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as

practical.

EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING

MAST

GROUND

CLAMP

ANTENNA

LEAD IN

WIRE

ANTENNA

DISCHARGE UNIT

(NEC SECTION 810–20)

GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

(NEC SECTION 810–21)

GROUND CLAMPS

POWER SERVICE GROUNDING

ELECTRODE SYSTEM

(NEC ART 250. PART H)

ELECTRIC

SERVICE

EQUIPMENT

NEC

– NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

1. To assure the finest performance, please read this manual

carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.

2. Install this unit in a cool, dry, clean place – away from

windows, heat sources, sources of excessive vibration,

dust, moisture and cold. Avoid sources of humming

(transformers, motors). To prevent fire or electrical shock,

do not expose the unit to rain or water.

3. Never open the cabinet. If something drops into the set,

contact your dealer.

4. Do not use force on switches, controls or connection

wires. When moving the unit, first disconnect the power

plug and the wires connected to other equipment. Never

pull the wires themselves.

5. The openings on the cover assure proper ventilation of the

unit. If these openings are obstructed, the temperature

inside the unit will rise rapidly. Therefore, avoid placing

objects against these openings, and install the unit in a

well-ventilated area to prevent fire and damage.

6. The voltage used must be the same as that specified on this

unit. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is

dangerous and may result in fire or other accidents.

YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage

resulting from the use of this unit with a voltage other than

that specified.

7. Digital signals generated by this unit may interfere with

other equipment such as tuners, receivers and TVs. Move

this unit farther away from such equipment if interference

is observed.

8. Do not attempt to clean the unit with chemical solvents;

this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.

9. Be sure to read the “Troubleshooting” section regarding

common operating errors before concluding that the unit is

faulty.

10. When not planning to use this unit for a long period of

time (e.g., a vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from

the wall outlet.

11. To prevent lightning damage, disconnect the AC power

plug and disconnect the antenna cable when there is an

electrical storm.

12. Grounding or polarization – Precautions should be taken

so that the grounding or polarization of the unit is not

defeated.

13. AC outlet

Do not connect audio equipment to the AC outlet on the

rear panel if that equipment requires more power than the

outlet is rated to provide.

This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as

it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned

off. This state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit is

designed to consume a very small quantity of power.

IMPORTANT

Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below.

MODEL:

Serial No.:

The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.

Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference.

FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS

To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot

and fully insert.

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “AC-

3”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX” and the double-D symbol are

trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Confidential Unpublished Works.  1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories,

Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US

Pat. No. 5,451,942 and other world-wide patents issued and pending.

“DTS”, “DTS Digital Surround” and “DTS ES” are trademarks of

III

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.

English

Contents

Introduction 2

Features ............................................................................................................... 3

Getting Started .................................................................................................... 5

Controls and Functions ....................................................................................... 6

Preparations 12

Speaker System Configurations ........................................................................ 13

Speaker Placement ............................................................................................ 14

Hookups ............................................................................................................ 15

On-Screen Displays (OSD) ............................................................................... 26

Speaker Settings ................................................................................................ 27

Speaker Output Levels ...................................................................................... 27

Basic Operation 30

Basic Playback .................................................................................................. 31

AM/FM Tuner................................................................................................... 35

Basic Recording ................................................................................................ 39

Advanced Operation 40

SET MENU Items ............................................................................................. 41

Remote Control Features .................................................................................. 54

Adjusting the Levels of the Effect Speakers ..................................................... 67

Setting the Sleep Timer..................................................................................... 67

ZONE 2 ............................................................................................................. 68

Addtional Information 70

Digital Sound Field Processing (DSP).............................................................. 71

Hi-Fi DSP-Sound Field Program ...................................................................... 72

CINEMA-DSP .................................................................................................. 73

CINEMA-DSP Sound Field Program ............................................................... 75

Sound Field Program Parameter Editing .......................................................... 77

Digital Sound Field Parameter Descriptions..................................................... 78

Appendix 82

Troubleshooting ................................................................................................ 83

Reference Chart for the INPUT and OUTPUT Jacks ....................................... 87

CINEMA - EQ Frequency Characteristics ....................................................... 87

Specifications .................................................................................................... 88

Introduction

Features 3

Introduction ......................................................................................................... 3

Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital Surround EX .................................................. 3

DTS and DTS ES ................................................................................................ 3

Comparing Surround Technologies .................................................................... 3

Digital Sound Fields (DSP) ................................................................................ 4

Multi-function remote control............................................................................. 4

Various Input and Output Jacks .......................................................................... 4

Built-in 8-channel power amplifier..................................................................... 4

Custom installation facility ................................................................................. 4

Getting Started 5

Checking the Package Contents .......................................................................... 5

Installing Batteries in the Remote Control.......................................................... 5

Using the Remote Control .................................................................................. 5

Controls and Functions 6

Front Panel .......................................................................................................... 6

Opening and Closing the Front Panel Door ........................................................ 7

Remote Control ................................................................................................... 8

Front Panel Display........................................................................................... 10

Rear Panel ......................................................................................................... 11

English

Introduction

Welcome to the exciting world of digital home entertainment. The RX-V1 is the most complete and advanced AV receiver available.

Though some of the more advanced features of this unit may not be familiar to you, they are easy to use. Incorporated state-of-the-art

technology such as Dolby Digital and DTS can bring the same audio experience to your home as they have brought to feature films in

quality theaters around the world. To make the listening experience even more enjoyable, the RX-V1 includes a number of exclusive,

digitally created listening environments known as digital sound fields. Choosing a sound field program is like transporting yourself to

such venues as an outdoor arena, an European church, or a cozy jazz club. Take some time now to read more about these features and

enjoy the new experiences the RX-V1 brings to your home theater.

Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital Surround EX

The RX-V1 is equipped with a Dolby Digital decoder which reproduces industry standard Dolby Digital surround sound for a cinematic

audio experience in your home. Dolby Digital is a 5.1 channel format because it uses five discrete channels (left and right Main

channels, Center channel, and left and right Rear channels) and a special low frequency channel (that is used only enough to merit the

“0.1” channel rating) to create incredibly realistic 360˚ surround effects. Recently, Dolby Digital Surround EX was introduced in movie

theaters as an advanced surround technology. The addition of a Rear Center channel makes front-to-back transitions more realistic. You

can enjoy the newest Dolby Digital Surround EX software with the CINEMA DSP programs in the RX-V1 such as Dolby Digital/

Matrix 6.1.

DTS and DTS ES

The RX-V1 is also equipped with a DTS decoder, which uses a 5.1 channel system to create a full surround sound environment. It was

developed as a way to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with six channels of digital sound. In comparison with Dolby Digital,

DTS uses less compression to store the sound information. The newly presented DTS ES system reproduces digital sound similar to

Dolby Digital Surround EX. The use of the Rear Center speaker along with the existing 5.1 channel speakers provides a fully immersive

cinematic audio experience.

Comparing Surround Technologies

To enjoy dynamic feature film sound at home, you should have the appropriate sound reproduction system for your home theater. The

traditional standard for home surround systems was called Dolby Surround and consisted of four channels (left and right Main channels,

a Center channel, and a Surround channel for effects). The new home theater standard is Dolby Digital and consists of 5.1 channels (left

and right Main channels, a Center channel, left and right Rear channels, and an LFE (low frequency effect) channel). The newer DTS

surround technology also makes use of a 5.1 channel system. The 6.1 channel system which adds a Rear Center channel to the 5.1

channel configuration is the latest advancement in surround sound technology, and is employed by Dolby Digital Surround EX and DTS

ES.

Features

Reproduction Channel System

Dolby Surround

(Pro Logic)

Dolby Digital

and DTS

Dolby Digital Surround EX

and DTS ES

4 channels

Left (L) and right (R) Main,

Center (C), and Surround (S)

channels

5.1 channels

Left (L) and right (R) Main,

Center (C), left and right Rear

(RL and RR), and Subwoofer

(SW) channels

6.1 channels

Left (L) and right (R) Main,

Center (C), left and right Rear

(RL and RR), Rear Center (RC),

and Subwoofer (SW) channels

Introduction

Features

Digital Sound Fields (DSP)

Technological advances in sound reproduction over the last 30 years have enhanced the listening experience with improved clarity,

precision, and power. However, something has been missing: the atmosphere and acoustic ambience of the public venue. Our Yamaha

engineers have extensively researched the nature of sound acoustics and the way sound reflects inside a room. We sent these engineers

to famous theaters and concert halls around the world to measure the acoustics of those venues with sophisticated microphones. The

data they collected is used to recreate these environments in digital sound fields. Some of these digital sound fields have been created

using data measured at the original venue; others have been created from combinations of data to form unique environments for specific

purposes. Some have been designed especially for music, and others especially for movies. Of course, this only solves half of the

problem. Because these engineers have no way of knowing the acoustics of your entertainment room, we have made it possible for you

to adjust the various parameters of this data to tailor each virtual venue to your taste. You can use these sound fields to enhance any

source and in combination with any of the following surround sound technologies.

CINEMA-DSP: Dolby Digital + DSP and DTS + DSP

The Dolby Digital system and DTS system show their full capability in large movie theaters, because feature film soundtracks are

designed to be reproduced in such environments. It is difficult to recreate a sound environment similar to a movie theater in your

entertainment room because of the room size, wall materials, and the number of speakers in your entertainment system. Yamaha

DSP technology makes it possible for you to enjoy nearly the same sound experience as that of a large movie theater in your

entertainment room by compensating for lack of presence and dynamics in your entertainment room with Yamaha’s original

digital sound fields combined with Dolby Digital or DTS soundtracks.

Virtual CINEMA DSP and HP CINEMA DSP

Yamaha developed the Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm which allows you to experience the virtual sound fields without

surround speakers. This makes it possible for the RX-V1 to produce a full surround sound catering to the number of speakers you

have. The RX-V1 also has an HP (Headphones) CINEMA DSP algorithm which is achieved by the crosstalk processing applying

the precise Head Related Transfer Function. You can therefore enjoy listening to the CINEMA DSP soundfields on headphones.

Multi-function remote control

The remote control can operate other audio-video components once you program the remote control using the manufacturer code and

Learn feature.

Various Input and Output Jacks

The RX-V1 has various output jacks for audio and video signals as well as a digital recording output jack. Many input jacks are also

available for connection to multiple audio-video sources. All the video inputs and outputs have S-video jacks in addition to standard

composite video jacks for improved video picture quality. Component video input and output jacks are also available to deliver the

excellent video signals from DVD players and other high quality video sources. The coaxial and optical digital signal jacks (provided

for direct transmission of digital signals) automatically detect Dolby Digital, DTS, and PCM signals. A demodulator circuit is built into

the Dolby Digital RF input so you can connect it directly to the Dolby Digital RF signal output on your LD player. Additionally, there

are six audio inputs for disscrete multichannel reproduction from an external decoder.

The RX-V1 also comes with a monaural subwoofer jack and split subwoofer jacks which can reproduce delicate but powerful low

frequency effects.

Built-in 8-channel power amplifier

Main: 110 W + 110 W (8Ω) RMS Output Power, 0.015% THD, 20-20,000 Hz

Center: 110 W (8Ω) RMS Output Power, 0.015% THD, 20-20,000 Hz

Rear: 110 W + 110 W (8Ω) RMS Output Power, 0.015% THD, 20-20,000 Hz

Front: 35 W + 35 W (8Ω) RMS Output Power, 0.05% THD, 1 kHz

Rear Center: 110 W (8Ω) RMS Output Power, 0.015% THD, 20-20,000 Hz

Custom installation facility

You can make up a multi-room audio-video system with this unit. With this feature, you can set this unit to reproduce separate input

sources in the main room and in a second (ZONE 2) room using the supplied remote control in the second room.

English

PHONES BASS TREBLE

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

RX-V1

INPUT MODE

INPUT SELECTOR

VOLUME

S VIDEO VIDEO L RAUDIO

VIDEO AUX

CINEMA DSP

DOLBY

DIGITAL

SURROUND

ON OFF

–

VCR 2 CD

VCR 1

TUNER

CBL/SAT TAPE

D-TV

DVD

BALANCE

PHONOVCR 3

VIDEO AUX

REC OUT/ZONE 2

SOURCE/REMOTE

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

STANDBY/ON

6CH IMPUT

PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING

EFFECT

A/B/C/D/E

SPEAKERS

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

FM/AM MEMORY

MANL/AUTO FM

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MANL MONO

30° 30°

Approximately 6m (20 feet)

Reset button

Checking the Package Contents

Check your package to make sure it has the following items.

Remote Control

Alkaline Batteries (3) (LR6)

Installing Batteries in the Remote Control

Insert the batteries in the correct direction by aligning the + and – marks on the batteries with the polarity illustrations (+ and –) inside the

battery compartment.

Change the batteries periodically. Do not use old batteries together with new ones.

Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different

types of batteries may have the same shape and color.

■ About Changing Batteries

As the batteries wear out, the operating range of the remote control decreases and

the TRANSMIT indicator does not flash or its light becomes dim. When you

notice any of these conditions, change all of the batteries.

Notes:

• If the remote control is without batteries for more than 20 minutes, or if worn out

batteries remain in the unit, the contents of the memory may be cleared.

If the memory is cleared, insert new batteries and reprogram any functions that may

have been cleared.

• After you insert new batteries, be sure to push RESET in the battery compartment

using a ball point pen or similar object before using the remote control. (This does not

clear the contents of the memory.)

Getting Started

TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR

MACRO

MACROLEARN

OFF ON

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

V-AUX TAPE PHONO

D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD

VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

* #

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

ENTER-

TAINMENT

CONCERT

VIDEO 2

CONCERT

VIDEO 1

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

EX/ES

THEATER

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

/DTS

SUR.

0 +10 +100

1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12

+ + +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E

PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

+–

CHP/INDEX

– – –

Using the Remote Control

The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on the main

unit during operation. When the sensor is covered or there is a large object between the remote control and the main unit, the sensor cannot

receive signals. The sensor may not be able to receive signals properly when it is exposed to direct sunlight or a strong artificial light (such as

a fluorescent or strobe light). In this case, change the direction of the light or reposition the main unit to avoid direct lighting.

■ About handling the remote control

Handle the remote control with care.

Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.

Do not drop the remote control.

Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of conditions:

• high humidity or temperature such as near a heater, stove or bath; or

• dusty places; or

• in places subject to extremely low temperatures.

AM Loop Antenna

FM Antenna

Antenna Adapter

(U.S.A. and Canada Models only)

FAST FORWARD

REC / PAUSE

REWIND

DECK A / DECK B

DIRECTION A/B

PLAY

STOP

Setup Section

Power Buttons

Display Window

Program/10Key Section

Others

Source Select

Operation Section

Volume Section

Programming Section

Input Section

POWER

(Preset Group) A

(Preset Group) B

(Preset Group) D

(Preset Group) E

PRESET

NUMBER 1~8

(Preset Group)

A/B/C/D/E

(Preset Group) C

PRESET + / –

POWER

STOP

INDEX

DISPLAY

SKIP SEARCH

+10

PLAY

PAUSE (YAMAHA

PAUSE / STOP)

CLEAR

1~9

DISC SKIP

POWER

REC PAUSE

DISPLAY

SKIP SEARCH

+10

PLAY

PAUSE

STOP

1~9

Quick Reference Card

Quick Reference Guide

Introduction

Controls and Functions

Front Panel

~ STANDBY/ON

Turns this unit on (On mode) and off (Standby mode). When

you turn on this unit, you will hear a click and there will be a

four to five to second delay before this unit can reproduce

sound.

In Standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power

so it can respond to the remote control.

Ÿ Remote Control Sensor

Receives signals from the remote control.

! Front Panel Display

Shows information about the operational status of this unit (see

page 10).

⁄ INPUT MODE

Selects the mode of input for sources that output two or more

types of signals to this unit (see page 33).

You cannot control the input mode when you select 6CH

INPUT as the input source.

@ INPUT SELECTOR

Selects the input source (DVD, LD, D-TV, CBL/SAT,

VCR 1, VCR 2, VCR 3, V-AUX, PHONO, CD, TUNER,

TAPE, MD) you want to listen to or watch.

¤ VOLUME

Controls the output level of all audio channels.

This does not affect the REC OUT level.

# PHONES

Outputs audio signals for private listening using headphones.

When you connect headphones, no signals are output to the

PREOUT jacks or the speakers.

‹ SPEAKERS A/B

When pushed in (ON), these buttons turn on the set of Main

speakers connected to the A and/or B terminals on the rear

panel.

$ BASS

Adjusts the low frequency response for the left and right Main

speaker channels.

Turn the control to the right to increase the low frequency

response and turn the control to the left to decrease the low

frequency response.

If you increase or decrease the low frequency sound to an

extreme level, the tonal quality from the Center, Front Effect,

Rear Center, and Rear speakers may not match that of the left

and right Main speakers.

› PROGRAM /

Selects the sound field program (see page 34).

Selecting a sound field program turns on the effect.

% TREBLE

Adjusts the high frequency response for the left and right

main channels.

Turn the control to the right to increase the high frequency

response and turn the control to the left to decrease the high

frequency response.

If you increase or decrease the high frequency sound to an

extreme level, the tonal quality from the Center, Front Effect,

Rear Center, and Rear speakers may not match that of the left

and right Main speakers.

PHONES BASS TREBLE

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

RX-V1

INPUT MODE

INPUT SELECTOR

VOLUME

S VIDEO VIDEO L RAUDIO

VIDEO AUX

CINEMA DSP

DOLBY

DIGITAL

SURROUND

ON OFF

–

VCR 2 CD

VCR 1

TUNER

CBL/SAT TAPE

D-TV

DVD

BALANCE

PHONOVCR 3

VIDEO AUX

REC OUT/ZONE 2

SOURCE/REMOTE

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

STANDBY/ON

6CH IMPUT

PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING

EFFECT

A/B/C/D/E

SPEAKERS

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

FM/AM MEMORY

MANL/AUTO FM

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MANL MONO

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

FM/AM MEMORY

MANL/AUTO FM

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MANL MONO

English

( REC OUT/ZONE2

Selects the source you want to direct to the audio/video

recorder and ZONE 2 outputs independent of the source you

are listening to in the main room. When set to the SOURCE/

REMOTE position, the input source is directed to all outputs.

· VIDEO AUX

Inputs audio and video signals from a portable external source

such as a video camera. To reproduce source signals from these

jacks, select V-AUX as the input source. To direct this source

to the VCR 1 output jacks, select VIDEO AUX using REC

OUT/ZONE 2.

) PRESET/TUNING (EDIT)

Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING / (the colon

“:” turns on or off).

This button is also used to exchange the places of two preset

stations with each other.

‚ FM/AM

Switches the reception band between FM and AM.

_ MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)

Enters a station into memory. See “Manually presetting

stations” on page 36 for details. Hold down this button for more

than three seconds to start automatic preset tuning. See

“Automatically presetting stations” on page 37 for details.

— TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

Switches the tuning mode between automatic and manual. To

select the automatic tuning mode, press this button so that the

AUTO TUNING indicator appears in the front panel display

(the STEREO indicator also appears if receiving a stereo

broadcast). To select the manual tuning mode, press this button

so that the AUTO TUNING indicator does not appear.

Controls and Functions

ﬁ EFFECT

Switches the effect speakers (Center, Front Effect, Rear and

Rear Center) on and off. If you turn off the output of these

speakers using EFFECT, all DTS and Dolby Digital audio

signals are directed to the Main left and right channels except

for the LFE channel.

When DTS or Dolby Digital signals are mixed, the left and

right Main channel signal levels may not match.

^ 6CH INPUT

Switches between 6CH INPUT mode and normal input

modes. 6CH INPUT mode takes priority over the source

selected with INPUT SELECTOR.

You cannot use DSP sound field programs while using an

external decoder.

ﬂ BALANCE

Controls the balance of the sound levels coming from the

right and left Main speaker(s). Setting this control to the

center position “0” is appropriate for most situations.

& A/B/C/D/E

Selects one of the five preset station groups.

‡ BASS EXTENSION ON/OFF

When pushed in (ON), this feature boosts the bass frequency

of the left and right main channels by +6 dB (60 Hz) while

maintaining overall tonal balance. This boost is useful if you

do not use a subwoofer.

However, this boost may not be noticeable if the main

speakers are set to “SMALL” and the bass output mode is set

to “SW.”

* PROCESSOR DIRECT ON/OFF

When pushed in (ON), BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE, and

BASS EXTENSION are bypassed, eliminating any

alteration of the original signal.

° PRESET/TUNING /

Selects preset stations when the colon “:” appears next to the

band indication in the display, and selects the tuning

frequency when the colon “:” does not appear.

Opening and Closing the Front Panel Door

When you are not operating the controls behind the front panel door, close the door.

Introduction

ON SCREEN

LEVEL

SLEEP TEST

PARAMETER

SET MENU

TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR

MACRO

MACROLEARN

OFF ON

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

V-AUX TAPE PHONO

D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD

VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

ENTER-

TAINMENT

CONCERT

VIDEO 2

CONCERT

VIDEO 1

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

6.1/ES

THEATER

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

/DTS

SUR.

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

++ +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

+–

CHP/INDEX

–– –

Controls and Functions

Remote Control

Power Buttons

Turn the power on and off.

Press SYSTEM POWER to turn on the

power and STANDBY to turn off

(Standby mode) the power to the main

unit.

Display Window

Shows the source component

that you select to control.

Program/10-Key

Section

Functions as the numeric buttons or DSP

program group buttons.

Source Select

Selects the source component

without switching the input.

Setup Section

Sets speaker output levels, SET

MENU, DSP parameters, etc.

Others

Functions vary depending on your

components that are set up with the

manufacturer code.

Programming Section

Provides a selection of programming

types you can utilize to conveniently

operate your other components.

Input Section

Selects the input source.

Press an input button repeatedly to select

the input mode.

Operation Section

Provides functions such as play, stop, skip, etc.

for operating your other components.

Volume Section

Controls the volume.

English

~ Infrared window

Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the

component you want to operate.

Ÿ CLEAR

Used for clearing functions acquired using the Learn and

Rename features, programmed macros, and preset

manufacturer codes (see pages 65, 66).

! RE-NAME

Used for changing the source name in the display window (see

page 65).

⁄ LEARN

Used for setting up the manufacturer code or programming the

functions of other remote controls (see pages 61, 62).

@ MACRO

Used to program a series of operations onto a single button

(see page 63).

¤ MACRO ON/OFF

Turns the macro function on and off.

# TRANSMIT

Flashes while the remote control is sending signals.

‹ 6CH INPUT

Switches to the 6CH INPUT mode when using an external

decoder.

$ LIGHT

Turns the light on or off.

When you press this button once, the light turns on for about

ten seconds. Press again to turn off the light.

› 10KEY/DSP

Selects the numeric button (10KEY) mode or DSP mode. You

can use the 13 buttons to select numbers or DSP programs

directly according to the position of this switch.

% DSP program group/Numeric buttons

Select DSP programs or numbers according to the position of

10KEY/DSP. (Press a button repeatedly to select a DSP

program within that group.)

ﬁ A/B/C/D/E

Selects one of the five preset station groups.

TV operation buttons

TV INPUT switches between TV and VCR mode.

TV MUTE mutes the TV sound.

^ TV VOL +/–

Increases or decreases the TV volume level.

Controls and Functions

ﬂ +/–

PRESET +/– selects a preset station.

CH +/– selects the next or previous channel.

DISC +/– skips to the next or previous disc.

& MUTE

Mutes the sound. Press again to restore audio output at the

previous volume level.

‡ VOLUME +/–

Increases or decreases the volume level.

* EFFECT

Switches the effect speakers (center, front, rear, and rear

center) on and off. If the output of these speakers is switched

off, all DTS and Dolby Digital audio signals are directed to the

main left and right channels except for the LFE channel.

° Cover

Slides down to show the setup buttons.

( LEVEL

Selects the effect speaker channels (center, front, rear and

subwoofer) so you can adjust their level independently. Press

this button repeatedly to select the effect speaker channel you

want to adjust, then use + or – to adjust the level.

· ON SCREEN

Selects the On-Screen Display mode for your video monitor.

) SLEEP Timer

Sets the Sleep Timer. Press repeatedly to set the amount of

time before the main unit is automatically turned off.

‚ TEST

Selects the test mode (see page 27).

_ PARAMETER/SET MENU

Selects the PARAMETER mode or SET MENU mode.

You can use the cursor

/ + / – buttons to adjust DSP

program parameter values or SET MENU items according to

the position of this switch.

— Cursor buttons

/ + / –

Selects and adjusts DSP program parameters and SET MENU

items according to the position of PARAMETER/SET

MENU.

+ RESET

Press this button after you exchange batteries or when the

remote control stops working properly. (Pressing RESET does

not clear acquired functions.)

Introduction

Controls and Functions

Front Panel Display

DIGITAL

DSP

PCM

PRO LOGIC

SPEAKERS

D-TV

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

VCR 2

VCR 3

V-AUX

DVD

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

VIRTUAL

SLEEP

STEREO

AUTO

TUNING

MEMORY

~ DTS indicator

Lights up when the built-in DTS decoder is on.

Ÿ VIRTUAL indicator

Lights up when using Virtual Cinema DSP (See page 34.)

! Multi-information display

Shows the current DSP program and other information when

adjusting or changing settings.

⁄ STEREO indicator

Lights up when the AUTO TUNING indicator is on and the

unit is receiving a strong signal for an FM stereo broadcast.

@ Input source indicator

Shows the current input source with the arrow-shaped cursor.

¤ DIGITAL and PRO LOGIC

indicators

Light up according to the type of Dolby signals this unit is

reproducing.

“

DIGITAL” lights up when the built-in Dolby Digital

decoder is on.

“

PRO LOGIC” lights up when the built-in Dolby Pro

Logic Decoder is on.

# DSP indicator

Lights up when you select a digital sound field program.

‹ Headphones indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected.

$ SPEAKERS A/B indicator

Lights up according to which set of main speakers are selected.

Both indicators light up when both sets of speakers are selected.

› PCM indicator

Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (Pulse Code

Modulation) digital audio signals.

% AUTO TUNING indicator

Shows that the Tuner is in automatic tuning mode.

ﬁ MEMORY indicator

Flashes to show a station can be saved.

^ SLEEP indicator

Lights up while the Sleep Timer is on.

English

Controls and Functions

~ RF (AC-3) input jack

Connect to the RF output terminal of your LD player.

Ÿ Audio equipment jacks

Refer to page 16 for hookup information.

! Video equipment jacks

Refer to page 18 for hookup information.

⁄ Antenna input terminals

Refer to page 25 for hookup information.

@ Speaker terminals

Refer to page 20 for hookup information.

¤ AC OUTLETS

Use these outlets to supply power to your other audio/video

equipment.

# AC power cord

Connect to a power outlet.

‹ IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

Use this switch to match the amplifier output to your speaker

impedance. Turn off the power before you change the setting

of this switch (see page 22).

$ DIGITAL OPTICAL/COAXIAL jacks

Refer to page 15 for detailed information.

› 6CH INPUT jacks

Refer to page 24 for hookup information.

% ZONE 2 OUT/VIDEO OUT jacks

Refer to page 68 for hookup information.

ﬁ REMOTE 1 IN/OUT/REMOTE 2 IN

jacks

Refer to page 68 for hookup information.

^ RS232C/CTRL OUT +5V terminals

These are control expansion terminals for commercial use.

Consult your dealer for details.

ﬂ PRE OUT/MAIN IN jacks

Refer to page 23 for hookup information.

Rear Panel

Preparations

Speaker System Configurations 13

Eight or Seven Speaker Configuration –Full Cinema DSP– ............................ 13

Six Speaker Configuration –Hi Fi DSP– .......................................................... 13

Five Speaker Configuration –Standard 5.1 Channel–....................................... 13

Four Speaker Configuration –Minimum Requirement– ................................... 13

Speaker Placement 14

Placing the Main Speakers ................................................................................ 14

Placing the Center Speaker ............................................................................... 14

Placing the Front Effect, Rear and Rear Center Speakers ................................ 14

When You Use a Projection Screen .................................................................. 14

Placing the Subwoofers..................................................................................... 14

Hookups 15

Connecting to Digital Jacks .............................................................................. 15

About the Video Jacks ...................................................................................... 15

About the RF (AC-3) Signal Input Jack ...................................................... 15

Connecting Audio Components ........................................................................ 16

Connecting Video Components ........................................................................ 18

Connecting Speakers......................................................................................... 20

Connecting External Amplifiers ....................................................................... 23

Connecting an External Decoder ...................................................................... 24

Connecting Power Supply Cords ...................................................................... 24

Connecting the Antennas .................................................................................. 25

On-Screen Displays (OSD) 26

OSD Modes....................................................................................................... 26

Selecting the OSD Mode .................................................................................. 26

Speaker Settings 27

Before You Begin ............................................................................................. 27

Speaker Output Levels 27

Dolby Surround Test......................................................................................... 28

DSP Test ........................................................................................................... 29

English

Front Effect Speakers Rear Speakers

Front Subwoofer

Rear Center Speaker

Rear Subwoofer

( )

Speaker System Configurations

The most complete speaker configuration consists of eight speakers: the left and right Main speakers, a Center speaker, the left and right Rear

speakers, the left and right Front Effect speakers, and a Rear Center speaker. If you do not use eight speakers, you can direct the signals for

speakers that are not in your system to other speakers in your configuration. A Subwoofer can be used with any of these configurations to

produce a fuller sound.

Front Effect Speakers

Front Subwoofer

Center Speaker

Main Speakers

Rear Speakers

Rear Center Speaker

Rear Subwoofer

■ Eight or Seven Speaker Configuration –Full Cinema

DSP–

When you reproduce feature film software, this configuration fullly expresses the

powerful and realistic sound qualities of 70 mm multitrack audio. The dialogue is

positioned as if it were coming from directly on the screen, the sound effect is

positioned slightlly behind the screen, and the soundtrack music is positioned

even further behind the screen to express the width and depth of the overall

presentation. This configuration makes the most of this unit’s capability.

The Rear Center speaker is useful for playback of Dolby Digital Surround EX or

DTS ES.

■ Six Speaker Configuration –Hi Fi DSP–

This configuration is used the most for audio playback with HiFi DSP. It does not

position the dialogue sound as well as a seven or eight speaker configuration.

However, it creates a dynamic DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor) sound field

which adds depth to the sound.

For this speaker configuration, change SET MENU item 1A. CENTER SP to

“NONE” and 1D. REAR CT SP to “NONE” (see page 41).

■ Five Speaker Configuration –Standard 5.1 Channel–

This configuration does not express the height of the sound field as well as the

seven or eight speaker configuration. However, it positions the dialogue sound as

coming directly from the screen.

For this speaker configuration, change SET MENU item 1F. FRNT EFCT SP to

“NONE” and 1D. REAR CT SP to “NONE” (see page 41).

■ Four Speaker Configuration –Minimum

Requirement–

In this configuration, the Center speaker signals and Front Effect speaker signals

are directed to the left and right Main speakers.

For this speaker configuration, change SET MENU item 1A. CENTER SP to

“NONE,” item 1F. FRNT EFCT SP to “NONE,” and item 1D. REAR CT SP to

“NONE” (see page 41).

Preparations

Front Effect Speakers

Rear Speakers

Front Subwoofer

Rear Center Speaker

Rear Subwoofer

approx.

0.5~1m 0.5~1m1.5~3m

Speaker Placement

Where you place your speakers has a tremendous effect on how well your system sounds.

■ Placing the Main Speakers

Place the left and right Main speakers an equal distance from the main listening

position.

If you have a TV or video monitor in your system, the distance of each speaker

from each side of the TV or video monitor should be the same.

■ Placing the Center Speaker

If you have a TV or video monitor in your system, align the front face of the

Center speaker with the front face of the monitor. Place the speaker as close to the

monitor as possible, such as directly over or under the monitor. If you place the

speaker under the monitor, the Front Effect speakers can adjust the height of the

sound to correspond with the action on the screen (depending on the listener’s

position). If you have a projection screen in your system, place the Center speaker

under the screen. Be sure to align the speaker with the center of the screen.

■ Placing the Front Effect, Rear and Rear Center

Speakers

These speakers should be placed about 0.5~1m (1~3 feet) outside the Main

speakers and in the front of the room. They should be turned toward the main

listening position. Place the Rear speakers in the back of the room so they face the

main listening position. The Rear speakers can be placed farther apart than the

Front Effect speakers. The Front Effect and Rear speakers should be placed about

1.8m (6 feet) above the floor.

Once you begin listening to programs, continue to adjust the speaker placement

until you obtain a balanced sound from the Main speakers and the Front Effect

and Rear speakers.

■ When You Use a Projection Screen

Place the speakers as shown in the illustration.

The Main speakers should be placed about one-quarter of the way up from the

bottom of the screen.

Place the Center speaker in the center and directly under the screen. The Center

speaker provides precise dialogue localization.

When you use a projection screen with your system, the Front Effect speakers

provide better effect quality. The CINEMA-DSP sound field programs (see page

34) raise the sound from the Center speaker upward and provide natural sound

corresponding with the video images.

■ Placing the Subwoofers

Place the Front Subwoofer near the Main speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections.

If you use a Rear Subwoofer, place it behind the main listening position. The placement of the Rear Subwoofer is not critical because of

the ultralow frequencies of the sound being reproduced.

By adding a high quality Subwoofer to the speaker configurations shown on pages 21 and 22, you can enjoy more powerful and realistic

movie effects, even if your Main speakers are large.

Note:

• If you use different brands of speakers (with different tonal qualities) in your

configuration, the tone of a moving human voice and other types of sound may not

shift smoothly. We recommend that you use speakers from the same manufacturer or

speakers with the same tonal quality.

You can also adjust the output levels and equalization of your effect speakers using the

SET MENU (see page 41).

If you are using small speakers, the addition of a Subwoofer will reinforce the sound

effects of movies (see page 21).

1/4

Main

speaker

Main

speaker

TV or Video

monitor

TV or Video

monitor

Center speaker

Front Effect speakers

Front Subwoofer

Rear

Subwoofer

Rear

Center

speaker

Rear speakers

Center

speaker

(3ft) (1~3ft) (5~15ft) (1~3ft) (3ft)

Main speakers

English

Hookups

RF(AC-3)

PR/CRPB/CBY

Composite VIDEO terminal

S VIDEO terminal

COMPONENT VIDEO terminals

Connecting to Digital Jacks

The RX-V1 has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You can use the digital

jacks to input PCM, DTS and Dolby Digital bitstreams. When you connect components to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks (for CD,

DVD, and CBL/SAT) priority is given to the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are acceptable for 96 kHz/24 bit

digital signals.

■ About the Dust Protection Cap

Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect the fiber optic cable. Do

not discard the cap. When you are not using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap

back in place. This cap protects the jack from dust.

About the Video Jacks

There are three types of video jacks. Video signals input through the VIDEO jacks are the conventional composite video signals. Video

signals input through the S VIDEO jacks are separated into luminance (Y) and color (C) video signals. The S-video signals achieve high

quality color reproduction.

Video signals input through the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks are separated into luminance (Y) and color difference (PB/CB, PR/CR) video

signals. The jacks are also separated into three for each signal. The description of the component video jacks may be different depending on

the component (e.g. Y, CB, CR / Y, PB, PR / Y, B-Y, R-Y/ etc.). Component video signals provide the best quality in picture reproduction.

Note:

• Each type of video jack works independently. Signals input through the composite

video, S-video, and component jacks are output through the corresponding composite

video, S-video, and component jacks respectively.

Caution:

• Use a commercially available S-video cable when connecting to the S VIDEO jacks,

and commercially available video cables when connecting to the COMPONENT

VIDEO jacks.

• When you are using the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks, check the details in the owner’s

manual that came with the component being connected.

About the RF (AC-3) Signal Input Jack

If your LD player has an RF (AC-3) signal output jack, connect it to the RF (AC-3) input jack on this unit. If RF (AC-3) and analog

signals are input at the same time, priority is given to the RF signals. When you want to reproduce RF (AC-3) signals, set the input mode

to “D.D. RF” using INPUT MODE.

Note:

• RF (AC-3) signals cannot be output using the REC OUT selector. When you record

sound or images from an LD player, be sure to connect the player to either the

DIGITAL OPTICAL or analog AUDIO jacks.

Caution:

• Even if you connect an LD player with an RF (AC-3) output jack to this unit, you

cannot reproduce Dolby Digital sound from all LD discs. You must playback an LD

disc encoded with Dolby Digital signals in order to take advantage of the Dolby Digital

sound.

Preparations

Hookups

Connecting Audio Components

Before you connect any components, disconnect the power supply to all the components you plan to connect including the RX-V1 and

determine which jacks are for the left and right channels and for input and output.

When you connect other YAMAHA audio equipment (such as a CD player or changer, MD deck, or tape deck, connect to terminals with the

same number labels. Yamaha applies this labelling system to all its products.

In the hookup illustrations on the following pages:

indicates signal direction,

indicates coaxial cables,

indicates left side analog cables,

indicates right side analog cables,

indicates optical cables; and,

indicates S-video cables.

After you finish all hookups, check them again to make sure they are correct.

■ Connecting a Turntable

Connect the left and right signal output cords to the PHONO L and

R jacks.

Note:

• These jacks are for connecting a turntable with an MM or high output MC

cartridge. If you have a turntable with a low output MC cartridge, use an inline

boosting transformer or MC-head amplifier when connecting to these jacks.

Caution:

• The GND terminal does not electrically ground the turntable. It simply reduces

noise in the signal. In some cases, you may hear less noise if you do not connect to

the GND terminal.

■ Connecting a CD Player

Connect the left and right analog signal output jacks on your CD

player to the CD 1 L and R jacks.

Notes:

• The COAXIAL CD and OPTICAL CD jacks are available for a CD player which

has coaxial or optical digital outputs.

• When you connect a CD player to both the COAXIAL CD and OPTICAL CD

jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the COAXIAL CD jack.

• The OPTICAL jacks on this unit conform to the EIA standard. If you use a fiber

optic cable that does not conform to this standard, the RX-V1 may not function

properly.

GND

DVD

VIDEO

D-TV

CBL

DVD

CBL

AUDIO

PHONO

AUDIO VIDEO

S VIDEO

RF(AC-3)

MAIN

(PLAY)

GND

TAPE

OUT

(REC)

OUT

(REC)

VCR 1

VCR 2

DVD

VIDEO

D-TV

CBL

/SAT

OUT

DVD

OUT

(REC)

(

PLAY)

CBL

/SAT

AUDIO

PHONO

AUDIO VIDEO

S VIDEO

COMPONE

REMOTE 1

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

RF(AC-3)

Turnable

Output

Ground

Optical Output

Coaxial Output

Analog Output

CD player

English

■ Connecting a Tape Deck

Connect the left and right signal output jacks on your tape deck to

the TAPE 3 (PLAY) L and R jacks.

Connect the left and right signal input jacks on your tape deck to the

TAPE 4 (REC) L and R jacks.

Notes:

• You can monitor audio recordings if you connect a three-head tape deck to the

TAPE 3 (PLAY) jacks.

• When you connect a tape deck to the RX-V1, keep the deck’s power on while using

the RX-V1. If the power is off, the RX-V1 may distort the sound from other

equipment.

• When you record from source equipment connected to the RX-V1 while the

RX-V1’s power is off, the recorded sound may be distorted. To avoid this problem,

turn on the RX-V1.

■ Connecting an MD or DAT Deck

Connect the left and right analog signal output jacks on your MD or

DAT deck to the MD 3 (PLAY) L and R jacks.

Connect the left and right analog signal input jacks on your MD or

DAT deck to the MD 4 (REC) L and R jacks.

Connect the optical digital signal output jack on your MD or DAT

deck to the OPTICAL MD (PLAY) jack.

Connect the optical digital signal input jack on your MD or DAT

deck to the OPTICAL MD (REC) jack.

Note:

• When you connect your MD or DAT deck to both the analog and digital input and

output jacks, priority is given to the digital signals.

MAIN

(PLAY)

GND

TAPE

OUT

(REC)

OUT

(REC)

VCR 1

VCR 2

DVD

VIDEO

D-TV

CBL

/SAT

OUT

DVD

OUT

(REC)

(

PLAY)

CBL

/SAT

AUDIO

PHONO

AUDIO VIDEO

S VIDEO

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

RF(AC-3)

Hookups

MAIN

(PLAY)

GND

TAPE

OUT

(REC)

OUT

(REC)

VCR 1

VCR 2

DVD

VIDEO

D-TV

CBL

/SAT

OUT

DVD

OUT

(REC)

(

PLAY)

CBL

/SAT

AUDIO

PHONO

AUDIO VIDEO

S VIDEO

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

RF(AC-3)

Tape Deck

Analog

Input

Analog

Output

MD or DAT Deck

Analog

Input

Analog

Output

Optical

Input

Optical

Output

Preparations

MAIN

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

6CH INPUT

SURROUND

(PLAY)

GND

TAPE

OUT

(REC)

OUT

(REC)

VCR 1

VCR 2

VCR 3

DVD

VIDEO

D-TV

CBL

/SAT

DVD

D-TV

CBL

/SAT

MONITOR

OUT

DVD

VCR 1

D-TV

OUT

(REC)

(

PLAY)

CBL

/SAT

CBL

/SAT

AUDIO

PHONO

AUDIO VIDEO

S VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

PREOUT/MAIN IN

FRONT

REAR

(SURROUND)

SUB

WOOFER

SPLIT

CENTER

OUT

MAIN

OUT

MONO

REAR CTR

RS-

232C

OUT

REMOTE 1

REMOTE 2

CTRL

OUT

+5V

20mA

100Ω

ZONE 2 OUT VIDEO

OUT

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

DIGITAL

RF(AC-3)

MONITOR

OUT 1

MONITOR

OUT 2

Hookups

Connecting Video Components

Before you connect any components, disconnect the power supply to all the components you plan to connect including the RX-V1 and

determine which jacks are for the left and right channels and for input and output. After you finish all hookups, check them again to make

sure they are correct.

Note:

• If you make S-video connections to this unit, it is not necessary to make composite video connections. If both types of connections are made, this unit gives

priority to the S-video signal.

■ Connecting an LD Player

Connect the left and right audio signal output jacks on your LD

player to the LD L and R jacks.

If your LD player has an RF signal or optical digital signal outputs, you can

connect them to this unit.

Connect the RF signal output jack on your LD player to the

RF (AC-3)

LD jack.

Connect the optical digital signal output jack on your LD player to the

OPTICAL LD jack.

Connect the composite video signal output jack on your LD player to

the LD VIDEO jack.

If your LD player has an S-video output, you can connect it to this unit.

Connect the S-video signal output jack on your LD player to the LD

S VIDEO jack.

■ Connecting a TV or Digital TV

Connect the left and right analog signal output jacks on your TV to

the D-TV L and R jacks.

If your TV has an optical digital signal output, you can connect it to this

unit.

Connect the optical digital signal output jack on your TV to the OPTICAL

D-TV jack.

Connect the composite video signal output jack on your TV to the

D-TV VIDEO jack.

If your TV has an S-video output or component video output, you can

connect it to this unit.

Connect the S-video signal output jack on your TV to the D-TV S VIDEO

jack or connect the component signal output jacks on your TV to the D-TV

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks.

■ Connecting a Satellite Tuner or Cable TV Tuner (Set

Top Box)

Connect the left and right audio signal output jacks on your tuner to

the CBL/SAT L and R jacks.

If your tuner has coaxial or optical digital signal outputs, you can connect

them to this unit.

Connect the coaxial digital signal output jack on your tuner to the

COAXIAL CBL/SAT jack.

Connect the optical digital signal output jack on your tuner to the OPTICAL

CBL/SAT jack.

Connect the composite video signal output jack on your tuner to the

CBL/SAT VIDEO jack.

If your tuner has an S-video or component video output, you can connect it

to this unit. Connect the S-video signal output jack on your tuner to the

CBL/SAT S VIDEO jack or connect the component signal output jacks on

your tuner to the CBL/SAT COMPONENT VIDEO jacks.

MAIN

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

6CH INPUT

SURROUND

(PLAY)

GND

TAPE

OUT

(REC)

OUT

(REC)

VCR 1

VCR 2

VCR 3

DVD

VIDEO

D-TV

CBL

/SAT

DVD

D-TV

CBL

/SAT

MONITOR

OUT

DVD

VCR 1

D-TV

OUT

(REC)

(

PLAY)

CBL

/SAT

CBL

/SAT

AUDIO

PHONO

AUDIO VIDEO

S VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

PREOUT/MAIN IN

PR/CRPB/CBY

FRONT

REAR

(SURROUND)

SUB

WOOFER

SPLIT

CENTER

OUT

MAIN

OUT

MONO

REAR CTR

RS-

232C

OUT

REMOTE 1

REMOTE 2

CTRL

OUT

+5V

20mA

100Ω

75Ω

UNBAL.

–

ZONE 2 OUT VIDEO

OUT

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

DIGITAL

RF(AC-3)

MONITOR

OUT 1

MONITOR

OUT 2

MAIN

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

6CH INPUT

SURROUND

(PLAY)

GND

TAPE

OUT

(REC)

OUT

(REC)

VCR 1

VCR 2

VCR 3

DVD

VIDEO

D-TV

CBL

/SAT

DVD

D-TV

CBL

/SAT

MONITOR

OUT

DVD

VCR 1

D-TV

OUT

(REC)

(

PLAY)

CBL

/SAT

CBL

/SAT

AUDIO

PHONO

AUDIO VIDEO

S VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

PREOUT/MAIN IN

PR/CRPB/CBY

FRONT

REAR

(SURROUND)

SUB

WOOFER

SPLIT

CENTER

OUT

MAIN

OUT

MONO

REAR CTR

RS-

232C

OUT

REMOTE 1

REMOTE 2

CTRL

OUT

+5V

20mA

100Ω

75Ω

UNBAL.

–

ZONE 2 OUT VIDEO

OUT

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

DIGITAL

RF(AC-3)

MONITOR

OUT 1

MONITOR

OUT 2

LD Player

Optical Output

RF-Signal

Output

Analog Audio Output

S-video Output

Video Output

Optical

Output

Digital TV/

Analog Audio Output

S-video Output

Video

Output

Optical Output

Coaxial

Output

Analog Audio Output

S-video Output

Component

Output

Satellite/Cable TV

Tuner

Video

Output

Component

Output

English

Hookups

■ Connecting a VCR

Connect the left and right audio signal output jacks on your VCR to

the VCR 1 IN L and R jacks.

Connect the left and right audio signal input jacks on your VCR to

the VCR 1 OUT L and R jacks.

Connect the composite video signal output jack on your VCR to the

VCR 1 VIDEO IN jack.

If your VCR has an S-video input, you can connect it to this unit.

Connect the S-video signal output jack on your VCR to the VCR 1 IN S

VIDEO jack.

Connect the composite video signal input jack on your VCR to the

VCR 1 VIDEO OUT jack.

If your VCR has an S-video input, you can connect it to this unit.

Connect the S-video signal input jack on your VCR to the VCR 1 OUT S

VIDEO jack.

Notes:

• You can connect other VCRs to the RX-V1 using the VCR 2 and VCR 3 jacks.

• If your VCR has an optical digital signal output jack, connect it to the OPTICAL

VCR 1 jack of this unit.

■ Connecting a DVD Player

Connect the left and right analog signal output jacks on your DVD

player to the DVD L and R jacks.

If your DVD player has coaxial or optical digital outputs, you can connect

one or both of them to this unit.

Connect the coaxial digital signal output jack on your DVD player to the

COAXIAL DVD jack.

Connect the optical digital signal output jack on your DVD player to the

OPTICAL DVD jack.

Connect the composite video signal output jack on your DVD player

to the DVD VIDEO jack.

If your DVD player has an S-video output or component video output, you

can connect it to this unit. Connect the S-video signal output jack on your

DVD player to the DVD S-VIDEO jack or connect the component signal

output jacks on your DVD player to the DVD COMPONENT VIDEO

jacks.

■ Connecting a Video Monitor

Connect the composite video signal input jack on your monitor to

MONITOR OUT 1 VIDEO jack.

If your video monitor has an S-video input, you can connect it to this unit.

Connect the S-video signal input jack on your video monitor to the

MONITOR OUT 1 S-VIDEO jack.

If your video monitor has component video signal inputs, you can connect

them to the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks.

Note:

• You can connect another monitor to this unit using the MONITOR OUT 2 jacks.

MAIN

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

6CH INPUT

SURROUND

(PLAY)

GND

TAPE

OUT

(REC)

OUT

(REC)

VCR 1

VCR 2

VCR 3

DVD

VIDEO

D-TV

CBL

/SAT

DVD

D-TV

CBL

/SAT

MONITOR

OUT

DVD

VCR 1

D-TV

OUT

(REC)

(

PLAY)

CBL

/SAT

CBL

/SAT

AUDIO

PHONO

AUDIO VIDEO

S VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

PREOUT/MAIN IN

PR/CRPB/CBY

FRONT

REAR

(SURROUND)

SUB

WOOFER

SPLIT

CENTER

OUT

MAIN

OUT

MONO

REAR CTR

RS-

232C

OUT

REMOTE 1

REMOTE 2

CTRL

OUT

+5V

20mA

100Ω

75Ω

UNBAL.

–

ZONE 2 OUT VIDEO

OUT

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

DIGITAL

RF(AC-3)

MONITOR

OUT 1

MONITOR

OUT 2

GND

ANT

C C

O S

MAIN

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

6CH INPUT

SURROUND

(PLAY)

TAPE

OUT

(REC)

OUT

(REC)

VCR 1

VCR 2

VCR 3

D-TV

CBL

/SAT

CBL

/SAT

MONITOR

OUT

DVD

VCR 1

D-TV

OUT

(REC)

(

PLAY)

CBL

/SAT

CBL

/SAT

PREOUT/MAIN IN

FRONT

REAR

(SURROUND)

SUB

WOOFER

SPLIT

CENTER

OUT

MAIN

OUT

MONO

REAR CTR

RS-

232C

OUT

REMOTE 1

REMOTE 2

CTRL

OUT

+5V

20mA

100Ω

ZONE 2 OUT VIDEO

OUT

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

DIGITAL

MONITOR

OUT 1

MONITOR

OUT 2

(PLAY)

GND

TAPE

OUT

(REC)

OUT

(REC)

VCR 1

VCR 2

DVD

VIDEO

D-TV

CBL

/SAT

DVD

D-TV

CBL

/SAT

MONITOR

OUT

DVD

OUT

(REC)

(

PLAY)

CBL

/SAT

AUDIO

PHONO

AUDIO VIDEO

S VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

PREOUT/MAIN IN

PR/CRPB/CBY

FRONT

REAR

(SURROUND)

OUT

REMOTE 1

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

RF(AC-3)

VCR

Audio Input

Audio Output

Video Input

S-video Input

S-video Output

Video Output

Analog Audio Output

Optical Output

Coaxial Output

DVD player

S-video Output

Component Output

Video Output

Video

Monitor

Video Input

S-video Input

Component Input

Preparations

Connecting Speakers

This section explains how to connect speakers to the RX-V1. After you finish connecting your speakers, use the SET MENU to change the

signal output settings according to the number and size of the speakers in your configuration.

■ Using Speaker Cords

A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. One of

the cables is colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge.

To make sure you always connect speakers with the correct polarity, determine

the difference between the cables of your speaker cord, make a note of which

cable you plan to use for which polarity (+ and –), and always connect the speaker

cords consistently.

Strip off 9 mm (3/8 in.) of an inch of insulation from the ends of the

cables.

Twist the exposed wires of the cable together to prevent short

circuits.

Loosen the terminal knob by turning it counterclockwise.

Insert only the exposed portion of the cable into the slot in the side of

the terminal, and tighten the terminal knob.

Note:

• If your speaker cords have banana plugs, tighten the terminal knob and insert the

plug into the end of the terminal.

Caution:

• Connect the speaker cords with care to avoid creating a short circuit. If you turn on

the power and there is a short circuit, this unit may be damaged even though the

protection circuit automatically shuts off the power.

■ Connecting the Main Speakers

Before connecting any speaker cords, identify which terminals are for the right

and left channels and also the + and – polarities. If you connect speakers with the

wrong polarity (+ to –), the RX-V1 will not reproduce clear sound.

Connect the + and – terminals of your right and left Main speakers to

the L and R MAIN + and – terminals on this unit.

■ Connecting the Center Speaker

Connect the + terminal of your Center speaker to the CENTER +

terminal and the – terminal of your Center speaker to the CENTER –

terminal.

Hookups

AMAINB

–

SPEAKERS

FRONT

REAR

CENTER REAR CENTER

–

BANANA PLUG

Right Main

Speaker A

Left Main

Speaker A

Right Main

Speaker B

Left Main

Speaker B

Center Speaker

English

■ Connecting the Front Effect Speakers

Connect the + and – terminals of your right and left Front Effect

speakers to the L and R FRONT + and – terminals on this unit.

■ Connecting the Rear and Rear Center Speakers

Connect the

and

–

terminals of your right and left Rear speakers to

the L and R REAR

and

–

terminals on this unit.

Connect the + terminal of your Rear Center speaker to the REAR

CENTER + terminal and the – terminal of your Rear Center speaker

to REAR CENTER – terminal.

■ Connecting a Front Subwoofer

Connect the signal input jack on your subwoofer to the PRE OUT/

MAIN IN SUBWOOFER MONO jack.

By connecting two Subwoofers to the SUBWOOFER SPLIT jacks, this

unit can reproduce subtle directional changes in the low frequency sounds.

When you use two Subwoofers, connect both of them to the SUBWOOFER

SPLIT jacks using pin plugs.

Caution:

• The SUBWOOFER jacks (output) have a built-in high cut-off filter (90 Hz). When

using a powered subwoofer, set the high cut-off frequency to “MAX” on your

Subwoofer.

Hookups

SPEAKERS

FRONT

REAR

CENTER REAR CENTER

–

SPEAKERS

FRONT

REAR

CENTER REAR CENTER

–

PREOUT/MAIN IN

FRONT

REAR

(SURROUND)

SUB

WOOFER

SPLIT

CENTER

OUT

MAIN

OUT

MONO

REAR CTR

RB-

2320

232C

OUT

REMOTE 1

REMOTE 2

CTRL

OUT

+5V

20mA

100Ω

Right Front

Effect Speaker

Left Front

Effect Speaker

Right Rear

Speaker

Left Rear

Speaker

Rear Center Speaker

Subwoofer system

Right

Subwoofer

system

Left

Subwoofer

system

Preparations

Hookups

■ Connecting a Rear Subwoofer

By using both Front and Rear Subwoofers, the CINEMA-DSP sound field

programs can produce realistic movie effects with powerful, dynamic sound. To

take advantage of this dynamic sound, be sure to set the 1C. REAR L/R SP item

in the SET MENU to “LARGE” (see page 41), and connect your Rear speakers

and Subwoofer as shown below.

Connect the right + input terminal on your Subwoofer to the REAR

R + terminal, and the right – input terminal on your Subwoofer to

the REAR R – terminal with speaker cords.

Connect the left + input terminal on your Subwoofer to the REAR

L + terminal, and the left – input terminal on your Subwoofer to the

REAR L – terminal with speaker cords.

Connect your Rear speakers to the output terminals on the Rear

Subwoofer.

Be sure to connect the Rear speakers to the Subwoofer with the correct

polarity.

• Adjust the speaker volume for the Subwoofer with the controls on the Subwoofers,

not on the RX-V1.

■ Impedance Selector switch

Select the position whose requirements your speaker system meets.

(Upper position)

Front Effect:

The impedance of each speaker must be 6Ω or higher.

Rear: The impedance of each speaker must be 4Ω or higher.

Rear Center:

The impedance of the speaker must be 4Ω or higher.

Center:The impedance of the speaker must be 4Ω or higher.

Main: If you use one pair of main speakers, the impedance of each

speaker must be 4Ω or higher.

If you use two pairs of main speakers, the impedance of each

speaker must be 8Ω or higher.

(Lower position)

Front Effect:

The impedance of each speaker must be 8Ω or higher.

Rear: The impedance of each speaker must be 8Ω or higher.

Rear Center:

The impedance of the speaker must be 8Ω or higher.

Center:The impedance of the speaker must be 8Ω or higher.

Main: <Except Canada model>

If you use one pair of main speakers, the impedance of each

speaker must be 8Ω or higher.

If you use two pairs of main speakers, the impedance of each

speaker must be 16Ω or higher.

The impedance of each speaker must be 8Ω or higher.

SPEAKERS

FRONT

REAR

CENTER REAR CENTER

–

Note:

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

SET BEFORE POWER ON

FRONT

REAR

REAR CENTER

CENTER

MAIN A OR B

A + B

FRONT

REAR

REAR CENTER

CENTER

MAIN A OR B

A + B

WARNING

Do not change the IMPEDANCE

SELECTOR switch setting while the power to

this unit is on, otherwise this unit may be

damaged.

IF THIS UNIT FAILS TO TURN ON

WHEN THE STANDBY/ON SWITCH IS

PRESSED:

The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may

not be set to either end. If so, set the switch to

either end when this unit is in the standby

mode.

Right Rear

Speaker

Left Rear

Speaker

Subwoofer

system

English

Connecting External Amplifiers

If you want to increase the power output to the speakers, or want to use another amplifier, connect an external amplifier to the PRE OUT/

MAIN IN terminals as follows.

~ MAIN jacks

MAIN OUT jack ....... Main channel line output jacks.

The signals output through these jacks

are affected by BASS, TREBLE,

BALANCE, and BASS EXTENSION

settings.

MAIN IN jacks .......... Line input to the RX-V1 Main channel

amplifiers.

Ÿ CENTER jacks

CENTER OUT jack . Center channel line output jacks.

CENTER IN jack ..... Line input to the RX-V1 Center channel

amplifier.

! REAR CT jack

Rear Center channel line output jack.

⁄ SUBWOOFER jacks

Subwoofers reinforce very low frequencies.

MONO ....................Main, Center and Rear channel

frequencies below 90 Hz are output

through this jack. You can also direct

DTS and Dolby Digital LFE signals to

this output.

SPLIT .....................The SPLIT jacks output stereo separation

for the Main and Rear channels and a

split mono signal for the Center and LFE

channels.

Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on

the subwoofer. Subwoofer volume cannot be adjusted from this

unit. Depending on the settings in SET MENU items

1. SPEAKER SET, 3A. LFE LEVEL and 4A. LFE LEVEL,

some signals may not be output from the SUBWOOFER jacks.

@ FRONT

Front Effect channel line output jacks.

¤ REAR (SURROUND)

Rear channel line output jacks.

PREOUT/MAIN IN

FRONT

REAR

(SURROUND)

SUB

WOOFER

SPLIT

CENTER

OUT

MAIN

OUT

MONO

REAR CTR

Hookups

Note:

• When RCA pin plugs are connected to the PRE OUT/MAIN IN output jacks for output to external amplifiers, the corresponding internal amplifiers will be

muted.

Preparations

Connecting Power Supply Cords

■ Connecting the AC Power Cord

After completing all connections, plug the AC power cord into a convenient AC

outlet.

■ AC OUTLETS

Use these to connect the power cords from your other components to this unit.

The power to the switched outlets is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON

(SYSTEM POWER ON or STANDBY on the remote). These outlets will supply

power to any connected unit whenever this unit is turned on. The maximum power

(total power consumption of components) that can be connected to AC

OUTLETS is 100 W (U.S.A. and Canada model) or 120 W (Australia model).

AC OUTLETS

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

Hookups

Connecting an External Decoder

The RX-V1 is equipped with six additional input jacks (left and right MAIN, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and SUBWOOFER) for

discrete multi-channel input from an external decoder, sound processor, or pre-amplifier.

Connect the output jacks on your external decoder to the 6CH

INPUT jacks.

Be sure to match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for

the main and surround channels.

To listen to the sound from your external decoder, press 6CH INPUT on this

unit or the remote control.

Note:

• When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, this unit automatically turns off

the digital sound field processor, and you cannot listen to DSP programs.

MAIN

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

6CH INPUT

SURROUND

DVD

VCR 1

D-TV

CBL

/SAT

ZONE 2 OUT VIDEO

OUT

DIGITAL

Subwoofer Output

External Decoder

Center Output

Main OutputSurround Output

AC Power Cord

AC OUTLETS

English

DVD

D-TV

CBL

/SAT

MONITOR

OUT

VIDEO

PREOUT/MAIN IN

SPEAKERS

FRONT

REAR

CENTER REAR CENTER

AMAINB

PR/CR

/CB

FRONT

REAR

(SURROUND)

SUB

WOOFER

SPLIT

CENTER

OUT

MAIN

OUT

MONO

REAR CTR

75Ω

UNBAL.

–

GND

ANT

Connecting the Antennas

Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. These antennas should provide sufficient signal strength in most situations.

However, a properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception. If you experience poor reception quality using the indoor antennas,

an outdoor antenna may improve the reception.

Connect each antenna as shown below.

■ Connecting the AM loop antenna

Press the tab to unlock the terminal hole.

Insert the AM loop antenna lead wires to the AM ANT and GND

terminals.

Lift the tab to its original position to lock the lead wires.

Lightly pull on the lead wires to confirm a good connection.

Attach the loop antenna to the antenna stand.

Orient the AM loop antenna so that the best reception is obtained.

Notes:

• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. The antenna may be

hung on a wall.

• The AM loop antenna should remain connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is

connected to this unit.

• To minimize the influence of automobile ignition noise, locate the antenna as far

from heavy traffic as possible.

• Keep the ribbon cable or coaxial cable as short as possible.

Do not bundle or roll up excess cable.

• The antenna should be at least 1.8m (6 feet) from reinforced concrete walls and

metallic structures.

■ Optional outdoor FM antenna

Consult your dealer or authorized service center

about the best method of selecting and erecting an

outdoor FM antenna.

■ Optional outdoor AM antenna

If this unit is in a steel building or at a great distance from the

transmitter, it may be necessary to install an outdoor AM antenna.

■ Connecting the indoor FM antenna

Connect the included indoor antenna to the 75Ω

UNBAL. FM ANT terminal.

Hookups

Loop Antenna

Antenna stand

Indoor FM antenna (included)

75Ω coaxial cable

Antenna adapter to match with

F-type connector (included for

U.S.A. and Canada Models)

75Ω/300Ω

antenna adapter

300Ω ribbon

cable

AM loop antenna (included)

Ground

Outdoor FM antenna

Preparations

On-Screen Displays (OSD)

You can display the operation information for this unit on a video monitor. If you display the SET MENU and DSP sound field program

parameter settings on a screen, it is much easier to see the available options and parameters than it is by reading this information on the front

panel display.

If a video source is being reproduced, the OSD is superimposed over the image.

If a video source is not being reproduced (or the power of the source equipment is off), the OSD is shown on a blue background.

OSD Modes

You can change the amount of information the OSD shows.

Full Display ...............This mode always shows the sound field program parameter settings on the

video monitor (see page 77).

Short Display............. This mode briefly shows the same contents as the front panel display at the

bottom of the screen, then disappears.

Display Off................ This mode briefly shows the “DISPLAY OFF” message at the bottom of the

screen, then disappears. Afterwards, no changes to operations appear on the

screen except those of the ON SCREEN.

Notes:

• When you choose the Full Display mode, INPUT SELECTOR, VOLUME and some

other types of operation information are displayed at the bottom of the screen in the

same format as the front panel display.

• The OSD signal is not output through the REC OUT Selector, and will not be recorded

with any video signal.

• The SET MENU, TEST DOLBY SUR and TEST DSP appear regardless of the OSD

mode.

Selecting the OSD Mode

When you turn on the power, the video monitor and front panel

display shows the level of the main volume for a few seconds and

then switches to show the current sound field program.

Press ON SCREEN on the remote control repeatedly to change the

display mode.

The OSD mode changes in the following order: Full Display, Short Display,

and Display Off.

Caution:

• If you choose a video input source that has equipment connected to both the S

VIDEO IN and composite VIDEO IN jacks, and both the S VIDEO OUT and

composite VIDEO OUT jacks are connected to a video monitor, the video signal is

output to both the S VIDEO OUT and VIDEO OUT jacks. However, the OSD is

carried only on the S-video signal. If no video signal is input, the OSD is carried on

both the S-video and composite video signals.

• If your video monitor is connected only to the COMPONENT VIDEO terminals of

this unit, the OSD is not shown. Make sure to connect your video monitor to the

COMPONENT VIDEO terminal and either VIDEO or S VIDEO terminals if you

would like to see the OSD.

• Playing back video software that has an anti-copy signal or video signals with a lot

of noise may produce unstable images.

ON SCREEN

LEVEL

SLEEP TEST

PARAMETER

SET MENU

Full Display

Short Display

ON SCREEN

English

This section explains how to set the speaker output levels using the test tone generator. The Dolby Surround test is for balancing the output

levels of the six speakers required for surround sound systems. The DSP test is for balancing the Front Effect speakers with the Main

speakers for the DSP sound field programs.

Before You Begin

Set BASS, TREBLE and BALANCE on the front panel to “0” (the

center position) and turn off BASS EXTENSION.

Sit in the main listening position and set PARAMETER/SET

MENU on the remote control to PARAMETER.

Set 10KEY/DSP on the remote control to DSP and press / DTS

SUR.

Press TEST on the remote control once or twice to select the test

you want.

• Select “TEST DOLBY SUR.” to match the output levels of the Center,

Rear Center and left and right Rear speakers to the left and right Main

speakers.

• Select “TEST DSP” to match the output levels of the Front Effect

speakers to the Main speakers.

Speaker Settings

The RX-V1 has seven SPEAKER SET items in the SET MENU that you must set according to the number of speakers in your configuration

and their size. The following table summarizes these SPEAKER SET items, and shows the initial settings as well as other possible settings. If

the initial settings are not appropriate for your speaker configuration, change the settings in the SET MENU (see page 41).

Summary of SPEAKER SET items 1A through 1G.

Item

1A. CENTER SP

1B. MAIN SP

1C. REAR L/R SP

1D. REAR CT SP

1E. LFE/BASS OUT

1F. FRNT EFCT SP

1G. MAIN LEVEL

Description

Selects the Center channel output mode according to the size of the Center speaker.

The possible settings are LRG (large), SML (small) and NONE.

Selects the Main channel output mode according to the size of the Main speakers.

The possible settings are LARGE and SMALL.

Selects the Rear channel output mode according to the size of the Rear speakers.

The possible settings are LRG (large), SML (small) and NONE.

Selects the Rear center channel output according to the size of the Rear Center speaker.

The possible settings are LRG (large), SML (small) and NONE.

Selects a speaker for the LFE/Bass signal output.

The possible settings are SW (subwoofer), MAIN, and BOTH.

Selects the Front Effect signal output mode for the Front Effect signals.

The possible settings are YES and NONE.

Selects the output level for the Main channel signal.

The possible settings are Normal and –10 dB.

Initial Setting

LRG

LARGE

LRG

BOTH

YES

Normal

Speaker Output Levels

BASS TREBLE

–

BALANCE

10KEY DSP

PARAMETER

SET MENU

Preparations

Speaker Output Levels

Dolby Surround Test

Use the Dolby Surround Test to balance the output levels of speakers required for surround sound systems.

Press TEST on the remote control so “TEST DOLBY SUR.”

appears on the video monitor and front panel display.

Adjust VOLUME +/– so you can hear the test tone.

• The test tone is produced from the left Main speaker, Center speaker, right

Main speaker, right Rear speaker, Rear Center speaker and left Rear

speaker in order. The tone is produced for 2.5 seconds each time.

• You can stop the sequence temporarily by pressing

Adjust the output level of the effect speakers using the cursor – or +

buttons on the remote control so the output level coming from each

speaker is the same.

• You can increase the output levels of the effect channels (left Rear, right

Rear, Rear Center and Center) to +10 dB. If the output level of the Center,

Rear, and Rear Center speakers is lower than that from the Main speakers

even after you have increased the sound volume level of the Center, Rear,

and Rear Center speakers up to +10 dB, set the 1G. MAIN LEVEL item in

the SET MENU to “–10dB.” Setting the 1G. MAIN LEVEL item to this

setting decreases the Main speaker volume level to about one-third the

normal level. After you set the 1G. MAIN LEVEL item in the SET

MENU to “–10dB,” adjust the levels for the Center, Rear, and Rear Center

speakers again.

When you finish adjusting the output level of the Center, Rear, and

Rear Center speakers, press TEST repeatedly until the current DSP

program appears.

Note:

• The tonal quality of the speakers can be adjusted using the 7. CENTER GEQ, 8.

REAR CT GEQ, and 9. CINEMA EQ items in the SET MENU (see page 49~50).

TEST

English

DSP Test

Adjust the output level of the Front Effect speakers while this unit is reproducing a DSP sound field program. If you do not use Front Effect

speakers, set the 1F. FRNT EFCT SP item in the SET MENU to “NONE” (see page 41), and the DSP Front Effect signals will be mixed with

the Main channel signals.

Press TEST repeatedly until “TEST DSP” appears on the video

monitor and front panel display.

Adjust VOLUME so you can hear the test tone.

• The test tone is produced alternately from the Front Effect speakers and

Main speakers. The tone is produced for 2.5 seconds each time.

Adjust the output level of the Front Effect speakers using + and – so

the output level coming from the Front Effect speakers is the same as

that of the Main speakers.

• The test tone is automatically produced from the Front Effect speakers

while you are adjusting the level.

When you finish adjusting the output level of the Front Effect

speakers, press TEST repeatedly until the current DSP program

appears.

Notes:

• If you cannot hear the test tone, set VOLUME, turn off the power, and check the

speaker cords and hookups.

• The test tone can be reproduced separately from the left and right Front Effect

speakers. This is useful when you want to check the hookups to these speakers.

Press

to reproduce the test tone from the left speaker, and press

to reproduce

the tone from the right speaker. (The OSD shows which speaker is reproducing the

tone.)

• You cannot adjust the output level of the left and right Front Effect speakers

separately.

• You can stop the test tone’s alternation temporarily by pressing

• The tonal quality of the speakers can be adjusted using the 7. CENTER GEQ, 8.

REAR CT GEQ, and 9. CINEMA EQ items in the SET MENU (see page 49~50).

• If the sound volume of the Front Effect speakers is lower than that of the Main

speakers, even after you have increased the output level up to +10 dB, set the 1G.

MAIN LEVEL item in the SET MENU to “–10dB.” Setting the 1G. MAIN LEVEL

item to “–10dB” decreases the Main speaker output level to about one-third of the

normal level.

After you set the 1G. MAIN LEVEL item in the SET MENU to “–10dB,” repeat

the TEST DOLBY SUR. procedure on the previous page.

Speaker Output Levels

TEST

Basic Operation

Basic Playback 31

Power Control ................................................................................................... 31

Selecting a Source ............................................................................................. 32

Input Modes and Indications............................................................................. 33

Selecting a Sound Field Program...................................................................... 34

AM/FM Tuner 35

Manual Tuning.................................................................................................. 35

Automatic Tuning ............................................................................................. 35

Presetting Stations............................................................................................. 36

Tuning to Preset Stations .................................................................................. 38

Exchanging Preset Stations ............................................................................... 38

Basic Recording 39

Preparations....................................................................................................... 39

English

Power Control

Press STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER on the remote

control) to turn on the power.

• The front panel (and the monitor screen) shows the level of the volume for

a few seconds and then switches to show the current sound field program.

Press STANDBY/ON (or STANDBY on the remote control) to turn

off the power.

Note:

• This unit stores its current operational status in memory before the power is turned

off. By connecting a commercially available timer to this unit, you can easily

playback or record a source at any time you wish.

Basic Playback

TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR

MACRO

MACROLEARN

OFF ON

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

V-AUX TAPE PHONO

D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD

VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

ENTER-

TAINMENT

CONCERT

VIDEO 2

CONCERT

VIDEO 1

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

6.1/ES

THEATER

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

/DTS

SUR.

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

++ +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E

PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

+–

CHP/INDEX

–– –

STANDBY/ON

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

STANDBY/ON

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

PHONES BASS TREBLE

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

RX-V1

INPUT MODE

INPUT SELECTOR

VOLUME

S VIDEO VIDEO L RAUDIO

VIDEO AUX

CINEMA DSP

DOLBY

DIGITAL

SURROUND

ON OFF

–

VCR 2 CD

VCR 1

TUNER

CBL/SAT TAPE

D-TV

DVD

BALANCE

PHONOVCR 3

VIDEO AUX

REC OUT/ZONE 2

SOURCE/REMOTE

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

STANDBY/ON

6CH IMPUT

PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING

EFFECT

A/B/C/D/E

SPEAKERS

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

FM/AM MEMORY

MANL/AUTO FM

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MANL MONO

STANDBY/ON

INPUT MODE

INPUT SELECTOREFFECT VOLUME

VOLUME

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER

Input buttons

EFFECT

STANDBY/ON EFFECT INPUT SELECTOR VOLUME

INPUT MODE

Basic Operation

Selecting a Source

Select the source using INPUT SELECTOR, or press one of the

input buttons on the remote control.

• The current source is indicated on the front panel display with an arrow.

• The current source name and input mode appear on the front panel display

and the video monitor for a few seconds.

DVD .................................. DVD player

LD...................................... LD player

D-TV.................................. Digital TV or TV

CBL/SAT........................... Cable TV or Satellite tuner

VCR 1 ................................ Video deck 1

VCR 2 ................................ Video deck 2

VCR 3 ................................ Video deck 3

V-AUX .............................. Other A/V equipment

PHONO ............................. Turntable

CD...................................... CD player

TUNER.............................. AM/FM tuner

TAPE ................................. TAPE deck

MD..................................... MD recorder

Start playback (or select a broadcast station) on the source

equipment.

• Refer to the operation instructions for the equipment.

Adjust VOLUME (or VOLUME +/– on the remote control).

Caution:

• If the power of the equipment connected to the VCR 1, VCR 2, VCR 3, TAPE,

and MD OUT jacks is turned off, reproduced sound may be distorted or the volume

may be lowered. In these cases, turn on the equipment.

■ BGV (Back Ground Video) Function

The BGV (Back Ground Video) function allows you to combine a video signal

from a video source with a sound signal from an audio source. (For example, you

can listen to classical music while you are watching a video.)

Using the remote control, select a source from the video group, then select a

source from the audio group. Use the input buttons on the remote control to make

your selections. The BGV function does not work if you select the sources using

INPUT SELECTOR on the front panel.

INPUT SELECTOR

V-AUX TAPE PHONO

D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD

VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD

VOLUME

–

VOLUME

Basic Playback

D-TV

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

VCR 2

VCR 3

V-AUX

DVD

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

The selected source

Select this

source:

To reproduce the signal

from this equipment.

English

Basic Playback

Input Modes and Indications

The RX-V1 comes with various input jacks. If your external component is connected to more than one type of input jack, you can set the

priority of the input signal. Press INPUT MODE on the front panel or an input button (press it repeatedly) on the remote control to display or

change the input mode.

AUTO: ................. This mode is automatically selected when you turn on the power of this

unit. In this mode, the input signal is automatically selected in the

following order.

1) Dolby Digital or DTS encoded signals

2) Digital (PCM) signals

3) Analog signals

DTS:..................... In this mode, only digital input signals encoded with DTS are selected

even if other signals are input at the same time.

ANALOG: ........... In this mode, only analog input signals are selected even if digital signals

are input at the same time.

AUTO: ................. In this mode, this unit automatically selects the signal in the following

order.

1) Dolby Digital RF encoded signals

2) DTS encoded signals

3) Digital (PCM) signals

4) Analog signals

D.D. RF:............... This unit only selects Dolby Digital RF encoded signals.

DTS:..................... This unit only selects DTS encoded signals.

DGTL:.................. This unit only selects digital (PCM) signals input through the OPTICAL

jacks.

ANALOG: ........... This unit only selects signals input through the ANALOG jacks. This unit

will not select Dolby Digital RF or DTS signals.

Notes:

• For CD, DVD, and CBL/SAT sources, if digital signals are input from both the

OPTICAL and COAXIAL terminals, the digital signal from the COAXIAL terminal is

selected.

• When the “AUTO” mode is selected, the RX-V1 automatically determines the type of

signal. If the RX-V1 detects a DTS or Dolby Digital signal, the decoder automatically

switches to the appropriate setting and reproduces 5.1 channel sound.

• When you use functions such as pause, search, or disc change while playing a disc

encoded with DTS signals, the DTS indicator flashes until the next playback starts.

• If you play a disc encoded with DTS signals and the input mode is set to “ANALOG”,

this unit reproduces the noise of an unprocessed DTS signal. When you want to play a

DTS source, be sure to connect the source to a digital input jack and set the input mode

to “AUTO” or “DTS. ”

• If you switch the input mode to “ANALOG” while playing a disc encoded with DTS

signals, this unit reproduces no sound.

• For LD software that does not contain a digital soundtrack, connect the LD player to

the analog jacks and set the input mode to “AUTO” or “ANALOG.”

• The input mode resets to “AUTO” after you turn off the power. When the current input

source is D-TV, CBL/SAT, and VCR 1, the input mode resets to the one set using the

15. INPUT MODE item in the SET MENU after you turn off the power (see page 52).

• If the LD player is transmitting signals in a non-standard method, the RX-V1 cannot

detect the DTS or Dolby Digital signal. In this case, the decoder automatically switches

to PCM or analog.

• Some audio/video equipment, such as LD players, output different audio signals

through their analog and digital jacks. Change the input mode as necessary.

AUTO

Dolby Digital RF

DTS

DIGITAL

ANALOG

Basic Operation

Selecting a Sound Field Program

You can enhance your listening experience by selecting a DSP sound field program. The 24 DSP sound field programs are divided into 12

DSP program groups. For details about each program, see pages 71~76.

Set 10KEY/DSP to DSP.

Press one of the DSP program group buttons (or PROGRAM

on the main unit) repeatedly until the DSP program you want

appears in the front panel display.

• For example, to select “Live Concert,” press HALL 2 repeatedly. You can

also select sound field programs within the current group by setting

PARAMETER/SET MENU to the PARAMETER position and pressing

the cursor + or – button.

Notes:

• If a DTS or Dolby Digital signal is input when the input mode is set to “AUTO”,

the sound field program automatically switches to the appropriate decoding

program.

• Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not on the name

of the program. The acoustics of your listening room affect the sound field

program. Minimize the sound reflections in your room to maximize the effect

created by the program.

• When you select an input source, the main unit automatically selects the last sound

field program used with that source.

• When you turn off the main unit, the current source and sound field program are

memorized and are automatically selected when you turn on the power again.

• When high rate 96kHz sampling 24 bit digital signals are output from source

equipment, the DSP sound field cannot operate on the source sounds. In this case,

the sounds are reproduced as normal 2-channel stereo.

■ Virtual CINEMA DSP and HP CINEMA DSP

You can experience the virtual CINEMA DSP sound field by setting the 1C. REAR L/R SP item in the SET MENU to “NONE.” The

sound field processing is changed to the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode according to the selected sound field program. Virtual CINEMA

DSP is performed using the Main speakers. You can also listen to HP (Headphone) CINEMA DSP by connecting your headphones to the

PHONES jack while the DSP sound fields are on.

■ Normal Stereo Reproduction

For normal stereo reproduction, press EFFECT to turn off the effect.

Notes:

• When you turn off the effect, no sound is reproduced from the Front Effect, Center,

Rear, and Rear Center speakers.

• If you turn off the effect while DTS or Dolby Digital signals are being reproduced, the

dynamic range of the signal is automatically compressed.

• The sound volume may be extremely reduced when you turn off the effect or if you

change SET MENU item 3B. D-RANGE to MIN. In this case turn on the effect.

Basic Playback

Europe Hall A

Europe Hall B

Europe Hall C

U.S.A. Hall D

Europe Hall E

Live Concert

Rock Concert

Roxy Theatre

Warehouse Loft

Arena

Church

Tokyo

Freiburg

Royaumont

Jazz Club

Village Gate

Village Vanguard

The Bottom Line

Entertainment

Disco

Party

Game/Amusement

Hi-Fi DSP Programs

Concert Video 1

Pop/Rock

Concert Video 2

Classical/Opera

Pavilion

TV Theater

Mono Movie

Variety/Sports

Movie Theater 1

Spectacle

Sci-Fi

Movie Theater 2

Adventure

General

/DTS SURROUND

Normal/Matrix 6.1/ES

Enhanced/6.1/ES

CINEMA-DSP Programs

6.1/ES

If you want to utilize the Rear Center

speaker with a 5.1 channel program

source, press 6.1/ES. However, note

that to achieve the proper effect with the

rear center channel, Dolby Digital

Surround EX or DTS ES software

should be used.

10KEY/DSP

English

AM/FM Tuner

Automatic tuning is effective when the radio signals are strong and have no interference. However, manual tuning is best for weaker signals

that have some interference.

Manual Tuning

Select “TUNER” as the input source.

You can use INPUT SELECTOR on the main unit or the input button on

the remote control.

Press AM/FM to select the reception band.

“FM” or “AM” appears in the display.

Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the

“AUTO TUNING” indicator goes off in the display.

If the colon (:) appears in the display next to the AM or FM indicator, press

PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off.

Press PRESET/TUNING

to tune to the desired station

manually.

Hold down the button to continue the tuning search.

• Manually selecting an FM station will automatically change the reception to

monaural to increase the signal quality.

Automatic Tuning

Select “TUNER” as the input source.

You can use INPUT SELECTOR on the main unit or the input button on

the remote control.

Press AM/FM to select the reception band.

“FM” or “AM” appears in the display.

Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the

“AUTO TUNING” indicator appears in the display.

If the colon (:) appears in the display next to the AM or FM indicator, press

PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off.

Press PRESET/TUNING

once to begin auto tuning.

Press

to tune to a higher frequency, or press

to tune to a lower

frequency. Press the same button again if the tuning search stops short of the

correct station.

Use manual tuning if the tuning search does not stop at the correct station

because the signals are weak.

DSP

SPEAKERS

D-TV

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

VCR 2

VCR 3

V-AUX

DVD

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

SLEEP

STEREO

AUTO

TUNING

MEMORY

DSP

SPEAKERS

D-TV

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

VCR 2

VCR 3

V-AUX

DVD

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

SLEEP

STEREO

AUTO

TUNING

MEMORY

PRESET/TUNING

FM/AM

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN’L MONO

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN’L MONO

PRESET/TUNING

AUTO

FM/AM

Turn this indicator off.

Note:

Basic Operation

SPEAKERS

D-TV

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

VCR 2

VCR 3

V-AUX

DVD

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

SLEEP

STEREO

MEMORY

SPEAKERS

Presetting Stations

■ Manually presetting stations

This unit can store up to 40 stations (8 stations x 5 groups). Using this feature, you

can easily tune to any preset station by selecting the preset station number (see

page 38).

Tune to a station.

See the previous page for tuning instructions.

Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM).

The MEMORY indicator flashes for about five seconds.

Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset station group (A to E).

The group letter appears on the display.

Note:

• You must select a preset station group before the MEMORY indicator stops

flashing (about five seconds).

Press PRESET/TUNING

to select a preset station number

(1 to 8).

Press

to select a higher preset station number.

Press

to select a lower preset station number.

Note:

• You must select a preset station group before the MEMORY indicator goes off

(about five seconds).

Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM).

The station band and frequency appear in the display with the preset group

and number you selected.

Repeat steps 1 through 5 to store other stations.

You can store up to 40 stations (A1~A8, B1~B8, C1~C8, D1~D8, and

E1~E8).

Notes:

• The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this

unit is set to standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or

power service is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut

for more than one week, the memory may be deleted.

• Any stored station data existing at a preset number is cleared when you store a new

station at that preset number.

• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency.

AM/FM Tuner

A/B/C/D/E

MEMORY

MAN’L/AUTO FM

PRESET/TUNING

MEMORY

MAN’L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

Shows the displayed station has been programmed to A-1.

English

■ Automatically presetting stations

You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store FM stations. With this

function, the unit automatically tunes to FM stations with strong signals, then

stores up to 40 of those stations in order.

Tune to the FM station from which you want automatic presetting to

begin.

See page 35 for tuning instructions.

Press and hold MEMORY for more than 3 seconds.

The preset number and MEMORY and AUTO TUNING indicators flash.

Then, after about five seconds, automatic preset tuning begins.

Automatic Preset Tuning Options

Before Automatic Preset Tuning begins (within about five seconds), you can set

the preset number from which the unit will store FM stations and the direction in

which the unit will scan for stations.

• Press A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING

to select the preset

number where the first station will be stored. The unit will stop storing

stations if it reaches preset number E8.

• Turn off PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) (“ : ” is off) and press PRESET/

TUNING

to scan for lower frequency stations or PRESET/TUNING

to scan for higher frequency stations. If you do not press either button

before Automatic Preset Tuning begins, the unit will scan for higher

frequency stations.

When Automatic Preset Tuning is complete, the display shows the frequency

of the last preset station.

Notes:

• You can replace a preset station with another FM or AM station manually by

simply following the procedure of the section “Manually presetting stations” on

page 36.

• If the number of received stations does not reach to E8, the search finishes

automatically after searching all frequencies.

• With this function, only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored

automatically. If the station you want to program is weak in signal strength, tune to

it in monaural mode manually, then program it by following the procedure in

“Manually presetting stations” on page 36.

AM/FM Tuner

SPEAKERS

D-TV

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

VCR 2

VCR 3

V-AUX

DVD

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

SLEEP

STEREO

AUTO

TUNING

MEMORY

MAN’L/AUTO FM

Basic Operation

Tuning to Preset Stations

Press A/B/C/D/E to select the preset station group.

The preset group letter appears in the display and changes each time you

press A/B/C/D/E.

Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) so that the colon (:) appears next

to the AM or FM indicator.

“:” must appear in the display to recall preset stations. If necessary, press

PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again.

Press PRESET/TUNING

to select a preset station number

(1 to 8).

The preset group and number appear in the display along with the station

band, frequency, and signal strength information.

Exchanging Preset Stations

You can exchange the stations stored on two preset numbers. The example below describes the procedure for exchanging the stored stations

at preset numbers E1 and A5.

Tune to the E1 preset station number.

See above for “Tuning to Preset Stations.”

Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for more than 3 seconds.

“E-1” flashes in the display.

Tune to the A5 preset station number.

See above for “Tuning to Preset Stations.”

A-5 flashes in the display.

Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again.

The stations stored at the two preset locations are exchanged.

PRESET/TUNING

SPEAKERS

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

AM/FM Tuner

A/B/C/D/E

SPEAKERS

D-TV

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

VCR 2

VCR 3

V-AUX

DVD

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

SLEEP

STEREO

AUTO

TUNING

SPEAKERS

D-TV

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

VCR 2

VCR 3

V-AUX

DVD

TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

SLEEP

STEREO

AUTO

TUNING

SPEAKERS

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

SPEAKERS

Shows the exchange of stations is completed.

English

REC OUT/ZONE 2 allows you to record one source while viewing and/or listening to another source.

Preparations

Turn on the power to the RX-V1 and all connected equipment.

Select the source equipment you want to record using REC OUT/

ZONE 2.

• To record the current source, set REC OUT/ZONE 2 to SOURCE/

REMOTE.

• To record a source that you do not want to reproduce, set REC OUT/

ZONE 2 to the source you want to record.

Start playback (or select a broadcast station) on the source

equipment.

Start recording on the recording equipment.

• If you want to listen to another source, and REC OUT/ZONE 2 is not set

to SOURCE/REMOTE, select the source you want to reproduce with

INPUT SELECTOR and adjust the volume.

Notes:

• Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.

• When this unit’s power is off, you cannot record between other equipment

connected to this unit.

• Operating BASS and TREBLE, BASS EXTENSION, BALANCE, VOLUME,

and DSP programs do not affect the recorded signal.

Caution:

• The RF (AC-3) input signal cannot be output using REC OUT/ZONE 2.

■ Special considerations when recording DTS software

The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS

bitstream will result in noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this

unit to record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them, the following

considerations need to be made.

For DTS encoded LDs, DVDs, and CDs:

Only 2-channel analog audio signals may be recorded as follows:

Laser Discs:

Set your Laser Disc player’s left and right outputs to the analog soundtrack.

DVDs:

Use the disc menu to set the DVD player’s mixed 2-channel left and right audio

outputs to the PCM or Dolby Digital soundtrack.

Compact Discs:

The DTS signal recorded on CDs can only be output as a digital bitstream, and

therefore cannot be recorded.

Basic Recording

VCR 2 CD

VCR 1

TUNER

CBL/SAT TAPE

D-TV

DVD

PHONOVCR 3

VIDEO AUX

REC OUT/ZONE 2

SOURCE/REMOTE

STANDBY/ON

Advanced

Operation

Advanced Operation

SET MENU Items 41

Operating the SET MENU ................................................................................ 42

1. SPEAKER SET (1A. CENTER SP to 1G. MAIN LEVEL) ......................... 43

2. LOW FREQ. TEST....................................................................................... 46

3. DOLBY D. SET (Dolby Digital Set) ............................................................ 47

4. DTS SET ....................................................................................................... 48

5. SP DELAY TIME ......................................................................................... 48

6. AUDIO DELAY ........................................................................................... 48

7. CENTER GEQ (Center Graphic Equalizer) ................................................. 49

8. REAR CT GEQ (Rear Center Graphic Equalizer) ....................................... 49

9. CINEMA EQ ................................................................................................ 50

10. HP TONE CTRL (Headphone Tone Control) ............................................ 51

11. PARAMETER INI (Parameter Initialization) ............................................ 51

12. 6.1/ES AUTO.............................................................................................. 51

13. MEMORY GUARD ................................................................................... 52

14. CMPNT-V INPT (Component Video Input) .............................................. 52

15. INPUT MODE ............................................................................................ 52

16. INPUT RENAME ....................................................................................... 53

17. DIMMER .................................................................................................... 53

18. ZONE 2 SET ............................................................................................... 53

Remote Control Features 54

Using the Remote Control ................................................................................ 54

Each Component Control Area ......................................................................... 56

Operating a Tuner (TUNER Area) ................................................................... 56

Operating a Tape Deck (TAPE Area) ............................................................... 56

Operating a CD Player (CD Area) .................................................................... 57

Operating an MD Recorder (MD Area) ............................................................ 57

Operating an LD Player (LD Area) .................................................................. 58

Operating a DVD Player (DVD Area) .............................................................. 58

Operating a VCR (VCR1/VCR2/VCR3 Area) ................................................. 59

Operating a TV or Digital TV (D-TV Area)..................................................... 59

Operating a Cable or Satellite TV Tuner (CBSAT Area) ................................. 60

Free area (OPTN and PHONO Areas) .............................................................. 60

Seting the Manufacturer Code in the Remote Control...................................... 61

Programming a New Remote Control Function ............................................... 62

Using the Macro Feature................................................................................... 63

Changing the Source Name in the Display Window ........................................ 65

Clearing a Learned Function or Macro ............................................................. 65

Clearing Learned Functions, Macros, Renamed Displays, and Manufacturer

Setups ................................................................................................................ 66

Adjusting the Levels of the Effect Speakers 67

Setting the Sleep Timer 67

ZONE 2 68

Connections....................................................................................................... 68

Remote Control in ZONE 2 .............................................................................. 69

English

Items

1. SPEAKER SET

1A. CENTER SP

1B. MAIN SP

1C. REAR L/R SP

1D. REAR CT SP

1E. LFE/BASS OUT

1F. FRNT EFCT SP

1G. MAIN LEVEL

2. LOW FREQ. TEST

3. DOLBY D. SET

3A. LFE LEVEL

3B. D-RANGE

4. DTS SET

4A. LFE LEVEL

5. SP DELAY TIME

6. AUDIO DELAY

7. CENTER GEQ

8. REAR CT GEQ

9. CINEMA EQ

9A. L, C, R EQ

9B. FRNT EFCT EQ

9C. REAR L/R EQ

9D. REAR CT EQ

10. HP TONE CTRL

11. PARAMETER INI

12. 6.1/ES AUTO

13. MEMORY GUARD

14. CMPNT-V INPT

15. INPUT MODE

16. INPUT RENAME

17. DIMMER

18. ZONE 2 SET

Descriptions

Selects the output mode suitable for your Center speaker.

Selects the output mode suitable for your Main speakers.

Selects the output mode suitable for your Rear speakers.

Selects the output mode suitable for your Rear Center speaker.

Selects the speakers for your LFE/BASS signal output.

Selects the output mode for your Front Effect speakers.

Selects the output level for your main channels.

Matches the Subwoofer level with the level of the other speakers.

Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital signals.

Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby Digital signals.

Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for DTS signals.

Adjusts the delay time for Center and Rear Center speakers.

Adjusts the delay time for all channels.

Matches the Center speaker tonal quality with the Main speakers.

Controls the tonal quality of the Rear Center speaker.

Adjusts the tonal balance of the Main and Center speakers, Front Effect speakers,

Rear speakers and Rear Center speaker separately.

Adjusts the tonal balance of the headphones.

Initializes the parameters of a group of DSP programs.

Selects the AUTO mode of Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 and DTS ES decoding.

Locks DSP program parameters and other SET MENU settings.

Selects the equipment to be connected to the component video inputs A, B or C.

Selects the initial input mode of the sources connected to D-TV, CBL/SAT and

VCR 1.

Changes the name of the inputs.

Adjusts the brightness of the front panel display.

Selects the mode of Zone 2.

Setting (Bold as default)

LRG / SML / NONE

LARGE / SMALL

LRG / SML / NONE

SW / MAIN / BOTH

YES / NONE

Normal / –10 dB

TEST TONE: OFF / ON

OUTPUT: MAIN L/R, MAIN L, CENTER,

MAIN R, R SUR.(REAR R), REAR CT,

L SUR.(REAR L), SUBWOOFER, FRONT

FREQ.: 35 Hz-250 Hz

SPEAKER: –20 dB to 0 dB

HEADPHONE: –20 dB to 0 dB

SP(SPEAKER): MAX / STD / MIN

HP(HEADPHONE): MAX / STD / MIN

SPEAKER: –10 dB to +10 dB (0 dB)

HEADPHONE: –10 dB to +10 dB (0 dB)

CENTER: 0 ms to 5 ms

REAR CNTR: 0 ms to 30 ms (3 ms)

0 ms to 99 ms

5-band: –6 dB to +6 dB (0 dB)

LCR, FRNT EFCT, REAR L/R, REAR CT: OFF /

HIGH-

FRQ: 1 kHz to 12.7 kHz

GAIN: –9 dB to +6 dB (–3 dB or 0 dB)

PEQ-

FRQ: 1 kHz to 12.7 kHz (8 kHz or 12.7 kHz)

GAIN: –9 dB to +6 dB (–3 dB or –4 dB)

BASS, TRBL: –6 dB to +3 dB (0 dB)

1 to 12

ON / OFF

OFF / ON

A: DVD

B: D-TV

C: CBL/SAT

D-TV: AUTO / LAST

CBL/SAT: AUTO / LAST

VCR1: AUTO / LAST

Up to eight characters.

–4 to 0

CTRL IN : MODE 1 / MODE 2

ZONE 2 OUT: FIX(fixed) / VAR.(variable)

SET MENU Items

The SET MENU consists of eighteen items including the Speaker Set, Center Graphic Equalizer and Parameter Initialization features.

Choose the appropriate item and adjust or select the values as necessary.

Notes:

• You can adjust the items in the SET MENU while reproducing a source.

• We recommend that you adjust the items in the SET MENU while using a video monitor. It is easier to see the video monitor screen than it is to see the

front panel display on this unit while adjusting SET MENU items.

Page

Advanced

Operation

Operating the SET MENU

This section describes how to adjust items in the SET MENU using the remote control.

■ General procedure for adjusting items

Some items require extra steps to change to the desired setting.

Set PARAMETER/SET MENU to SET MENU.

Press

repeatedly to select an item, then press + or – to change the setting of that item.

• The last item you adjusted appears on the front panel display (or in the SET MENU OSD if you are using a video monitor).

• If “Press + / – Key!” appears on the display, press + or – to select that item, then press

to select a sub item, then press +

or – to change the setting of that item.

Press

repeatedly or a DSP program button to exit the SET MENU.

SET MENU Items

ON SCREEN

LEVEL

SLEEP TEST

PARAMETER

SET MENU

PARAMETER

SET MENU

–

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

ENTER-

TAINMENT

CONCERT

VIDEO 2

CONCERT

VIDEO 1

6.1/ES

THEATER

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

/DTS

SUR.

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

CHP/INDEX

–

PARAMETER / SET MENU

Cursor buttons

OSD (On Screen Display)

Front Panel Display

English

1. SPEAKER SET (1A. CENTER SP to 1G. MAIN LEVEL)

Use this feature to select suitable output modes for your speaker configuration. You must set the output mode when you use a subwoofer.

■ 1A. CENTER SP (Center Speaker Mode)

By adding a Center speaker to your speaker configuration, the RX-V1 can provide good dialogue localization for many listeners and

superior synchronization of sound and images. The OSD shows a large, small or no center speaker depending on how you set this item.

The initial setting is “LRG”.

Select the “LRG” (Large) setting if you have a large Center speaker. The entire range of Center channel signals is sent

to the Center speaker.

Select the “SML” (Small) setting if you have a small Center speaker. Center channel low frequency signals of 90 Hz

and below are directed to the speakers selected with the 1E. LFE/BASS OUT item (see page 44).

Select the “NONE” setting if you do not have a Center speaker. All of the Center channel signals are directed to the

left and right Main speakers. The “NONE” position provides good dialogue localization for the person sitting in the

main listening position.

■ 1B. MAIN SP (Main Speaker Mode)

The display shows small or large Main speakers depending on how you set this item. The initial setting is “LARGE”.

Select the “LARGE” setting if you have large Main speakers. The entire range of left and right Main channel signals is

directed to the left and right Main speakers.

Select the “SMALL” setting if you have small Main speakers. The Main channel low frequency signals of

90 Hz and below are directed to the speakers selected with the 1E. LFE/BASS OUT item (see page 44).

Note:

• When you select the “MAIN” setting for the 1E. LFE/BASS OUT item, the Main channel low frequency signals of 90 Hz and below are directed to

the Main speakers even if you select the “SMALL” setting for the Main speaker mode. In this case, the OSD shows large Main speakers.

■ 1C. REAR L/R SP (Rear Speaker Mode)

The OSD shows large, small or no Rear speakers depending on how you set this item. The initial setting is “LRG”.

Select the “LRG” setting if you have large left and right Rear speakers or if you use a Rear Subwoofer (see page 22).

The entire range of Rear channel signals is sent to the left and right Rear speakers.

Select the “SML” setting if you have small left and right Rear speakers. Rear channel low frequency signals of 90 Hz

and below are directed to the speakers selected with the 1E. LFE/BASS OUT item (see page 44).

Select the “NONE” setting if you do not have Rear speakers.

• In this case, Rear Center speaker will automatically be set to “NONE” and the 1D. REAR CT SP item will be skipped.

SET MENU Items

NoneSmallLarge

Large

Small

Large Small None

Advanced

Operation

■ 1D. REAR CT SP (Rear Center Speaker Mode)

By adding a Rear Center speaker to your speaker configuration, the RX-V1 can provide more realistic front-to-back and back-to-front

transitions. The initial setting is “LRG”.

Select the “LRG” setting if you have a large Rear Center speaker. The entire range of Rear Center channel signals is

sent to the Rear Center speakers.

Select the “SML” (small) setting if you have a small Rear Center speaker. Rear Center channel low frequency signals

of 90 Hz and below are distributed to speakers selected with the 1E. LFE/BASS OUT item.

Select the “NONE” setting if you do not have a Rear Center speaker.

■ 1E. LFE/BASS OUT (Bass Out Mode)

LFE signals carry low frequency effects when this unit decodes DTS or Dolby Digital signals. Low frequency signals are defined as

90 Hz and below. The initial setting is “BOTH”.

Select the “SW” (Subwoofer) setting if you use a Subwoofer. The LFE signals are directed to the Subwoofer.

Select the “MAIN” setting if you do not use a Subwoofer. The LFE signals are directed to the Main speakers.

Select the “BOTH” setting if you use a Subwoofer and you want to mix the Main channel low frequency sound signals

with the LFE signals.

Note:

• The low frequency signals of 90Hz and below from all Main, Center, Rear and Rear Center channels are directed to the LFE channel when you

select the small speaker setting in items 1A, 1B, 1C and 1D.

SET MENU Items

Large

Small None

Subwoofer Main Both

English

■ 1F. FRNT EFCT SP (Front Effect Speaker Mode)

The RX-V1 uses Front Effect speakers to localize the virtual sound sources of the sound field programs. If you do not use Front Effect

speakers, you can direct the Front Effect signals to the Main speakers.

The OSD shows small or no Front Effect speakers depending on how you set this item. The initial setting is “YES”.

Select the “YES” setting if you use Front Effect speakers.

Select the “NONE” setting if you do not use Front Effect speakers. The Front Effect signals are mixed with the Main

channels.

■ 1G. MAIN LEVEL

Change this setting if you cannot match the sound volume of the Front, Rear, and Center speakers with the Main speakers because of the

unusually high efficiency performance of the Main speakers. The initial setting is “Normal”.

Select the “Normal” setting if you can match the volume of your effect speakers with the volume of your Main

speakers using the Dolby Surround Test (page 28).

Select the “–10dB” setting if you cannot match the volume of your effect speakers with the volume of your Main

speakers using the Dolby Surround Test (page 28).

Note:

• When this unit decodes 96 kHz sampling/24 bit digital signals or 6CH INPUT is on, level adjustments in items 1A~1F are not possible.

SET MENU Items

YES NONE

Normal –10dB

Advanced

Operation

SET MENU Items

2. LOW FREQ. TEST

Use this feature to adjust the Subwoofer volume so it matches the volume of the other speakers in your configuration. Change the setting

using the remote control while sitting in the main listening position.

Press + or – to set the TEST TONE to “ON”, and adjust the volume using VOLUME + so you can hear the tone.

Press

repeatedly to go to OUTPUT and press + or – to select the speaker you want to compare with the Subwoofer.

• If “SUBWOOFER” is selected, test tones above 90 Hz will not be output from the Subwoofer. The test tone will not necessarily

be output from the selected speakers. The output mode of the test tone depends on the settings of the 1. SPEAKER SET items in

the SET MENU.

Press

repeatedly to go to FREQ. and press + or – to select the frequency you want to use.

Adjust the Subwoofer volume using the controls on the Subwoofer so it matches the volume of the speaker you are

comparing it to.

Notes:

• Do not turn up the VOLUME too high.

• If no test tone is heard, turn off the power and make sure all the necessary hookups are correct.

■ About the Test Tone

The test tone is produced by the tone generator.

The tone generator produces a narrow band noise centered at a specified

frequency by the band pass filter.

You can change the center frequency from 35 Hz through 250 Hz in one-sixth

octave steps.

You can use the test tone not only for adjusting the subwoofer level, but also for

checking the low frequency characteristics of your listening room. Low frequency

sounds are especially affected by the listener’s position, speaker placement,

subwoofer polarity and other conditions.

Digital Generator

(Wide Band Noise Produced)

Band Pass Filter

35 Hz~250 Hz

Center freq.

FREQ.

NOISE

English

SET MENU Items

3. DOLBY D. SET (Dolby Digital Set)

■ 3A. LFE LEVEL

Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low frequency effect) channel when playing back Dolby Digital encoded software.

This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital signals. The LFE signal carries the low frequency special effect sound

which is only added to certain scenes.

You can adjust the levels from 0 dB to –20 dB.

• Adjust the LFE levels according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones.

■ 3B. D-RANGE (Dynamic Range)

Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range. This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital signals.

Select the “MAX” setting for feature films.

Select the “STD” (Standard) setting for general use.

Select the “MIN” setting for listening to sources at extremely low volume levels.

Note:

• When D-RANGE is set to “MIN”, sound output may be faint because some Dolby Digital software is not compatible with the minimum level

dynamic range.

L-LEVEL BST

H-LEVEL CUT

0.0

1.0

MAX

STD

MIN

Output Level

Input Level

Dialogue

level

Dialogue

level

Dialogue

level

Advanced

Operation

SET MENU Items

4. DTS SET

■ 4A. LFE LEVEL

Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low frequency effect) channel when playing back DTS encoded software. This

setting is effective only when this unit decodes DTS signals. The LFE signal carries the low frequency special effect sound which is only

added to certain scenes.

You can adjust the levels from –10 dB to +10 dB.

• Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones.

5. SP DELAY TIME

Use this feature to adjust the delay of the Center and the Rear Center channel sounds. This feature works when this unit decodes DTS or

Dolby Digital signals. Ideally, the Center speaker and the Rear Center speaker should be the same distance from the main listening position

as the left and right Main speakers. However, in most home situations, the Center speaker or the Rear Center speaker is placed in line with

the Main speakers or the Rear speakers. By delaying the sound from the Center speaker and the Rear Center speaker, the apparent distance

from the Center speaker and the Rear Center speaker to the main listening position can be adjusted to make it seem the same as the distance

between the left and right Main speaker, and the left and right Rear speakers to the listening position. Adjusting the delay time for the Center

speaker is especially important for giving depth to the dialogue.

You can adjust the delay time from 0 ms to 5 ms for the Center speaker and from 0 ms to 30 ms for the Rear Center

speaker.

• Increasing the delay 1 ms simulates moving the speakers about 30 cm (one foot) farther away from the listening position.

6. AUDIO DELAY

Use this feature to adjust the delay time of all channel sounds, when this unit decodes DTS or Dolby Digital signals. Adjusting AUDIO

DELAY is especially important for matching the sounds to screen pictures. Initial settings is “0ms”.

You can adjust the delay time from 0ms to 99ms.

Rear Center speaker image

Center speaker image

English

7. CENTER GEQ (Center Graphic Equalizer)

Use this feature to adjust the built-in five band graphic equalizer so the Center speaker tone matches that of the left and right Main speakers.

You can select the 100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz, or 10 kHz frequencies.

Use

to select a higher frequency and % to select a lower frequency.

Press + or – to adjust the level of that frequency.

Note:

• You can monitor the Center speaker sound while adjusting this item using the Dolby Surround test tone generator. Press TEST before starting the

procedure above. “TEST DOLBY SUR.” appears, and the test tone starts alternating among the speakers. Once you begin the procedure above, the

test tone remains at the Center speaker and you can hear how the sound changes as you adjust the various frequency levels. To turn off the test tone

generator, press TEST repeatedly until the current DSP program appears (see page 28).

8. REAR CT GEQ (Rear Center Graphic Equalizer)

Use this feature to adjust the built-in five band graphic equalizer so the Rear Center speaker tone matches that of the left and right Main

speakers.

Use

to select a higher frequency and % to select a lower frequency.

Press + or – to adjust the level of that frequency.

SET MENU Items

Advanced

Operation

SET MENU Items

9. CINEMA EQ

Use this feature to match the tonal quality of four groups of speakers: the Main and Center speaker group, the Front Effect speakers group,

the Rear speakers group, and the Rear Center speaker group. CINEMA-EQ consists of a high-shelving equalizer (HIGH) and a parametric

equalizer (PEQ). The high-shelving equalizer changes high frequency characteristics, and the parametric equalizer boosts or cuts any selected

frequency. The equalizer can be used for a variety of purposes, such as adjusting the tonal quality of differing types of speakers, adjusting the

tonal quality in different installation environments, or adjusting the source sound to your liking.

The CINEMA EQ characteristic charts below show the value of the CINEMA EQ factory settings for each speaker group for general

listening conditions.

If you want to change the characteristics, follow the procedure below to adjust the frequency and gain for the high-shelving equalizer (HIGH)

and parametric equalizer (PEQ). For the more detailed characteristics in different settings, see “CINEMA-EQ Frequency Characteristics” on

page 87.

Press

repeatedly to select one of the speaker groups and press + to select “ON”.

Press

repeatedly to select one of the following parameters, then press + or – to change the setting of that

parameter.

• Each time you press

, the parameter changes on the front panel display as shown above. Press the cursor

to go in the

reverse order.

Notes:

• When the 1F. FRNT EFCT SP item is set to “NONE”, the Front Effect signals are output from the Main speakers.

• CINEMA-EQ does not work when you press EFFECT to turn off the effect.

PEQ

HIGH

PEQ

HIGH

PEQ

FRQ

▲ L.C.R. Preset Value

HIGH : FRQ 12.7 kHz GAIN –3 dB

PEQ : FRQ 12.7 kHz GAIN –4 dB

▲ FRONT and REAR Preset Value

HIGH : FRQ 12.7 kHz GAIN 0dB

PEQ : FRQ 8.0 kHz GAIN –3dB

English

SET MENU Items

10. HP TONE CTRL (Headphone Tone Control)

Use this feature to adjust the level of bass and treble when you use your headphones. The initial Setting is 0 dB for both bass and treble.

This does not effect to the 96 kHz sampling digital signal.

Select BASS or TRBL and press + or – to change each level. You can adjust the level from –6 dB to +3 dB.

11. PARAMETER INI (Parameter Initialization)

Use this feature to initialize the parameters for each DSP program within a DSP program group. When you initialize a DSP program group,

all of the parameter values within that group revert to their initial settings.

Press the DSP program group button on the remote control for the DSP program you want to initialize.

• All of the DSP programs within the selected program group are initialized.

Repeat this step to initialize other DSP program groups.

Notes:

• The asterisk (*) mark next to a DSP program group number indicates that you have changed the parameter values in one or more DSP programs

within that group.

• The parameter values of the DSP programs do not change if you initialize a program group that does not have the asterisk (*) mark.

• When the MEMORY GUARD function is set to “ON” (see page 52), you cannot initialize any program groups.

• You cannot initialize the individual DSP programs within a group separately.

Caution:

• Once you initialize a DSP program group, you cannot have this unit revert the parameter values back to the previous settings automatically.

12. 6.1/ES AUTO

Use this feature to switch the DOLBY Digital Matrix 6.1 and DTS ES AUTO mode on or off.

Select “ON” to allow the main unit to automatically turn on the Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder when the

software with identification signal is detected.

Select “OFF” if you want to control the mode manually by pressing 6.1/ES on the remote.

Advanced

Operation

SET MENU Items

13. MEMORY GUARD

Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP program parameter values and other settings on this unit.

Select “ON” to use MEMORY GUARD to protect the following features:

• DSP program parameters

• All SET MENU items

• Front, Rear Center speaker and Subwoofer levels

• The On-Screen Display mode

Notes:

• When MEMORY GUARD is “ON”, you cannot use any of the test modes.

• When MEMORY GUARD is “ON”, you cannot select any other SET MENU item.

14. CMPNT-V INPUT (Component Video Input)

Use this feature to designate the input for each COMPONENT VIDEO terminal, A, B, and C. The initial settings are as written on the rear

panel. (Terminal A is for DVD, terminal B is for D-TV, and terminal C is for CBL/SAT.)

Select [A], [B], or [C] according to which terminal your equipment is connected to by pressing

Select the video input for your equipment by pressing + or –.

• You cannot select the same input once you have already selected it.

15. INPUT MODE

Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources connected to D-TV, CBL/SAT and VCR 1 input jacks when you turn on this unit.

Select “AUTO” to allow this unit to automatically detect the type of input signal and select the appropriate input mode.

Select “LAST” to set this unit to automatically select the last input mode used for that source.

English

16. INPUT RENAME

Use this feature to change the name of the input which appears on the OSD or the front panel display.

Select the input you want to change the name of by pressing an input button (or using INPUT SELECTOR).

Press + or – to place the

under the space or the character you want to edit.

Press

to select the character you want to use and + or – to move to the next one.

• Press

to change the character in the following order, or press

to go in the reverse order.

A~Z, a space, 0~9, a space, a~z, a space, #,

, +, and so on.

• Follow the procedure above to rename other inputs.

Press + or – repeatedly to exit the INPUT RENAME mode.

17. DIMMER

You can adjust the brightness of the front panel display from –4 to 0.

18. ZONE 2 SET

Select ZONE2 OUT to change the setting of the ZONE 2 output volume.

Selecting “VAR.” allows you to control the volume output to ZONE 2 with the remote control.

Select “FIX” when you don’t want to change the volume of output to ZONE 2 with the remote control.

Use CTRL IN to change the setting of the REMOTE 1 IN and REMOTE 2 IN jacks.

Selecting “MODE 1” allows you to control this unit using the tuner preset buttons on the remote control.

Selecting “MODE 2” disables control of this unit using the tuner preset buttons on the remote control.

SET MENU Items

Advanced

Operation

Remote Control Features

The remote control can operate the main unit as well as other Yamaha audio and video components. To control the components of other

manufacturers (or some Yamaha), you must set up the remote control with the manufacturer’s codes. This remote control also has a

sophisticated Learn feature that allows it to acquire functions from the remote controls of other components in your system (or other

household appliances) equipped with infrared remote control receivers. The Macro feature allows you to program a series of operations in

sequence onto a single button, or use the factory preset macros to operate other Yamaha components. These features make it possible for you

to reduce the number of remote control units in your entertainment room.

Notes:

• For operating distance of the remote contorol and notes about batteries, refer to page 5.

• For the name and function of each part and button, refer to pages 8 and 9.

• If the memory in the remote control becomes full, no further learning is possible even if there are still some programmable buttons available.

Using the Remote Control

The main unit control area is the shaded area shown below. It is

for controlling the RX-V1. You can use functions within this area

no matter which Component Control Area is selected.

The component control area is the shaded area shown below. Each

component has different functions for operation buttons in the

component control area. The component, which was chosen by

pressing an input button, can be controlled and the display

window shows the corresponding name of the input.

TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR

MACRO

MACROLEARN

OFF ON

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

V-AUX TAPE PHONO

D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD

VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

ENTER-

TAINMENT

CONCERT

VIDEO 2

CONCERT

VIDEO 1

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

EX/ES

THEATER

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

++ +

TV-VOL

A / B / C / D / E PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

+–

CHP/INDEX

–– –

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SEARCH CHAPTER

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

ENTER-

TAINMENT

CONCERT

VIDEO 2

CONCERT

VIDEO 1

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

6.1/ES

THEATER

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

+–

CHP/INDEX

––

ON SCREEN

LEVEL

SLEEP TEST

PARAMETER

SET MENU

TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR

MACRO

MACROLEARN

OFF ON

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

V-AUX TAPE PHONO

D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD

VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

ENTER-

TAINMENT

CONCERT

VIDEO 2

CONCERT

VIDEO 1

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

6.1/ES

THEATER

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

++ +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

+–

CHP/INDEX

–– –

Input selector

10KEY/DSP

(DSP is selected)

10KEY/DSP

(10KEY is selected)

There are 14 component control areas. You can setup the manufacturer

code and program other remote control functions in each area (Cannot

setup the manufacturer code in the OPTN area). See pages 61 and 62.

Input selector

and switching the

control area for each

component

English

Remote Control Features

■ SOURCE SELECT

You can control another component independently from the input you selected by pressing an input button.

Press SELECT

to choose a component and set the remote control to be used for it.

The display window will show one of the following: V-AUX, TAPE, PHONO, D-TV (digital and regular TV),

CBSAT (Cable TV/Satellite TV), TUNER, MD, CD, VCR 1, VCR 2, VCR 3, LD, DVD, Zone2, OPTN (Option).

■ About Zone2

When you make up a second audio-video room with this unit’s Zone2 system, you might want to use this remote control. Selecting

Zone2 sets the remote control to be in the Zone2 mode. See page 69 for details.

■ About OPTN

OPTN is an extra component control area to be programmed with other remote control functions. (You cannot setup the manufacturer

code in this area.) See page 60 for the programmable area.

■ Light up function

The buttons which are active and the display window light up for 10 seconds after pressing LIGHT.

SOURCE

SELECT

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

+–

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

+–

TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR

MACRO

MACROLEARN

OFF ON

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

V-AUX TAPE PHONO

D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD

VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

1234

+–

Pressing % selects Zone2 first.

Pressing ﬁ selects OPTN first.

Advanced

Operation

Remote Control Features

Each Component Control Area

The general operational buttons are shown for each area. Some of them may not function depending on the equipment you have.

■ Operating a Tuner (TUNER Area)

■ Operating a Tape Deck (TAPE Area)

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

V-AUX TAPE PHONO

D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD

VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

ENTER-

TAINMENT

CONCERT

VIDEO 2

CONCERT

VIDEO 1

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

6.1/ES

THEATER

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

++ +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E

PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

+–

CHP/INDEX

–– –

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

V-AUX TAPE PHONO

D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD

VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

ENTER-

TAINMENT

CONCERT

VIDEO 2

CONCERT

VIDEO 1

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

6.1/ES

THEATER

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

++ +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

+–

CHP/INDEX

–– –

POWER

Preset group A/B/C/D/E

PRESET + / –

Preset group A

Preset group B

Preset group E

Preset group D

Preset group C

Preset number 1 to 8

Fast forward

Rewind

REC / PAUSE

TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and

TV MUTE function if you

have set up the manufacturer

code for the D-TV Area.

Deck A / Deck B

Direction A / B

PLAY

STOP

English

Remote Control Features

■ Operating a CD Player (CD Area)

■ Operating an MD Recorder (MD Area)

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

V-AUX TAPE PHONO

D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD

VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

ENTER-

TAINMENT

CONCERT

VIDEO 2

CONCERT

VIDEO 1

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

6.1/ES

THEATER

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

++ +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

+–

CHP/INDEX

–– –

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

V-AUX TAPE PHONO

D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD

VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

ENTER-

TAINMENT

CONCERT

VIDEO 2

CONCERT

VIDEO 1

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

6.1/ES

THEATER

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E

PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

+–

CHP/INDEX

–– –

TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and

TV MUTE function if you

have set up the manufacturer

code for the D-TV Area.

Skip Search

PAUSE (YAMAHA : Pause / Stop)

Numeric buttons 1 to 9

Numeric button +10

Numeric button 0

DISC +/– (Disc Skip)

DISPLAY

STOP

POWER

INDEX

PLAY

CLEAR

TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and

TV MUTE function if you

have set up the manufacturer

code for the D-TV Area.

REC / PUASE

Numeric buttons 1 to 9

Numeric button +10

Numeric button 0

Skip Search

DISPLAY

POWER

PLAY

PAUSE

STOP

Advanced

Operation

Remote Control Features

■ Operating an LD Player (LD Area)

■ Operating a DVD Player (DVD Area)

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

V-AUX TAPE PHONO

D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD

VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

ENTER-

TAINMENT

CONCERT

VIDEO 2

CONCERT

VIDEO 1

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

6.1/ES

THEATER

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

++ +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E

PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

+–

CHP/INDEX

–– –

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

V-AUX TAPE PHONO

D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD

VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

ENTER-

TAINMENT

CONCERT

VIDEO 2

CONCERT

VIDEO 1

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

6.1/ES

THEATER

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

++ +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

+–

CHP/INDEX

–– –

TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and

TV MUTE function if you

have set up the manufacturer

code for the D-TV Area.

Chapter / Time

CHAPTER +/– (Chapter Search)

Numeric buttons 1 to 9

Numeric button +10

Numeric button 0

DISPLAY

POWER

STOP

SOUND

PLAY

PAUSE

CLEAR

Numeric buttons 1 to 9

Numeric button +10

Numeric button 0

Title / Index

TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and

TV MUTE function if you

have set up the manufacturer

code for the D-TV Area.

Skip Search

TITLE

DISPLAY

POWER

Menu cursor / ENTER

SOUND

PLAY

PAUSE

STOP

CLEAR

Disc Skip

Return

English

Remote Control Features

■ Operating a VCR (VCR 1 / VCR 2 / VCR 3 Area)

■ Operating a TV or Digital TV (D-TV Area)

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

V-AUX TAPE PHONO

D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD

VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

ENTER-

TAINMENT

CONCERT

VIDEO 2

CONCERT

VIDEO 1

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

6.1/ES

THEATER

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

++ +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

+–

CHP/INDEX

–– –

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

V-AUX TAPE PHONO

D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD

VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

ENTER-

TAINMENT

CONCERT

VIDEO 2

CONCERT

VIDEO 1

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

6.1/ES

THEATER

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

++ +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E

PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

+–

CHP/INDEX

–– –

Rewind /

Fast Forward

TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and

TV MUTE function if you

have set up the manufacturer

code for the D-TV Area.

REC

(Press twice)

Numeric buttons 1 to 9

Numeric button 10 or 0

POWER

TV / VIDEO

PLAY

PAUSE

STOP

CH +/–

You can control your VCR,

if you have set up the code for VCR1.

Numeric buttons 1 to 9

Numeric button 10 or 0

Enter

DISPLAY

POWER

TV INPUT

TV VOL +/–

TV MUTE

CH +/–

Advanced

Operation

Remote Control Features

■ Operating a Cable or Satellite TV Tuner (CBSAT Area)

■ Free Area (OPTN and PHONO Areas)

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

ENTER-

TAINMENT

CONCERT

VIDEO 2

CONCERT

VIDEO 1

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

6.1/ES

THEATER

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

++ +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

+–

CHP/INDEX

–– –

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

V-AUX TAPE PHONO

D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD

VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

ENTER-

TAINMENT

CONCERT

VIDEO 2

CONCERT

VIDEO 1

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

6.1/ES

THEATER

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

++ +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

+–

CHP/INDEX

–– –

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

V-AUX TAPE PHONO

D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD

VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

ENTER-

TAINMENT

CONCERT

VIDEO 2

CONCERT

VIDEO 1

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

6.1/ES

THEATER

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

++ +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

+–

CHP/INDEX

–– –

You can control your VCR,

if you have set up the code for VCR1.

Numeric buttons 1 to 9

Numeric button 0

Enter

Recall

Menu cursor / ENTER

TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and

TV MUTE function if you

have set up the manufacturer

code for the D-TV Area.

DISPLAY

POWER

CH +/–

TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and

TV MUTE function if you

have set up the manufacturer

code for the D-TV Area.

English

Remote Control Features

Setting the Manufacturer Code in the Remote Control

You can control other components by setting a manufacturer code. A code can be set up in each component controol area except for the

OPTN area. The Yamaha code is factory preset for DVD, LD, CD, MD, TUNER, and TAPE (Yamaha for LD, and Yamaha1 for others).

There is no factory preset code on VCR1/2/3, D-TV, CBSAT, V-AUX, and PHONO.

Select the source component you want to preset by using

the input buttons.

Press and hold LEARN for about three seconds using a

ballpoint pen or similar object.

Use

to select the name of your component’s

manufacturer.

• You will find the names of most audio-video manufacturers

worldwide in alphabetical order on the display window.

Press POWER (or any other button) on the remote control

while pointing it at the component to check if you have set

up the code correctly. If the component cannot be

controlled by the remote control, try entering another code

for the same manufacturer.

Press LEARN to confirm the preset.

• If you want to preset another code for another component

immediately, press ENTER and repeat steps 1 to 4.

Note:

• If you have already programmed a remote control function to a button, the function takes priority over the set up manufacturer code’s function.

■ Controlling a different component from the source component (input) you selected

Repeat steps 1 and 2 of the procedure in “Setting the

Manufacturer Code in the Remote Control”.

Select a Library (component category) by using

• There are 12 Libraries to set up a manufacturer code; L:TV,

L:CAB (CABLE), L:DBS, L:SAT, L:VCR, L:DVD, L:LD,

L:CD, L:MD, L:TAP (TAPE), L:TUN (TUNER), *L:AMP.

*L:AMP has three codes; YPC, DSP, and NO. “YPC” should be

selected to operate the RX-V1. “DSP” is for operating Yamaha DSP

amplifiers other than the RX-V1. “NO” is to clear the main unit

control area functions.

Repeat steps 3 and 4 of the procedure in “Setting the

Manufacturer Code in the Remote Control ”.

Note:

• “ERROR” appears in the display window in the following conditions: when pressing a button other than the cursor and ENTER; when pressing more than

one button at once; and when one of MACRO ON/OFF, 10KEY/DSP, PARAMETER/SET MENU is switched to another position.

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

V-AUX TAPE PHONO

D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD

VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD

LEARN

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

+–

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

+–

flashes

alternately

Advanced

Operation

Remote Control Features

Programming a New Remote Control Function

If you desire to program functions not included in the basic operations covered by the manufacturer code, or a manufacturer code is not

available, the following procedure needs to be performed. The possible programming area is the same as a component control area, so

buttons are programmable independently for each source component area. It is also possible to program in the main unit control area.

(Refer to page 54 for details on component control area and main unit control area.)

Place this remote control and the other remote control

about 5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in.) apart on a flat surface so that

their infrared transmitters are aimed at each other.

Select a source component.

Press LEARN using a ball point pen or similar object.

Press and release the button where you want the new

function to be programmed.

Press and hold the button on the other remote control that

has the function you want to program into this remote

control until “OK” appears in the display window.

• “NG” appears in display window when programming is not

done correctly.

Repeat Steps 4 and 5 to program additional functions.

Press LEARN again to exit the Learn mode.

LEARN

Notes:

• If you do not press any button within 30 seconds, the learning process is canceled.

• This remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn most of the other remote

control’s functions. However, you may not be able to program some special signals or extremely long transmissions. (Refer to the operation instructions for

the other remote control.) When the memory is full, “FULL” appears in the display window, and this remote control cannot acquire any more functions.

Clear unnecessary programmed functions to allow the unit to acquire new functions.

• Even if the batteries in the other remote control have enough power to transmit signals for operation, they may not have enough power to transmit signals to

this remote control.

• When the remote controls are either too close together or too far apart, you may not be able to program this remote control.

• Direct sunlight interferes with infrared rays.

• “ERROR” appears in the display window in the following conditions: when pressing more than one button at once; and when MACRO ON/OFF is

switched to another position.

TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR

MACRO

MACROLEARN

OFF ON

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

V-AUX TAPE PHONO

D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD

VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

TAPE

A/B

TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR

MACRO

MACROLEARN

OFF ON

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

V-AUX TAPE PHONO

D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD

VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

LEARN

TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR

MACRO

MACROLEARN

OFF ON

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

V-AUX TAPE PHONO

D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD

VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

5~10 cm (2 to 4 in.)

flashes

alternately

English

Using the Macro Feature

The Macro feature makes it possible to perform a series of operations by pressing just one button. For example, when you want to play a CD,

normally you would turn on the components, select the CD input, and press the play button to start playback. Using the Macro feature, you

can perform all those operations by simply pressing the CD macro button. The macro buttons (the input buttons and SYSTEM POWER

ON/STANDBY) are factory preset with macro programs. You can also program your own macros (see page 64).

Remote Control Features

Macro button First Second

Third

TUNER

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

TAPE

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

VCR 2

VCR 3

DVD

V-AUX

PHONO

D-TV

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

TUNER

TAPE

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

VCR 2

VCR 3

DVD

V-AUX

PHONO

D-TV

POWER

PLAY

Press a Macro button Automatically transmits signals of each button sequentially

*1 In order to turn on some Yamaha components connected to this unit, connect those components to AC OUTLETS on the rear panel.

*2 If the macro you select includes power on/off functions, the equipment may turn off if it is already on when you press the macro button. For example, if

your TV is on and you press the SYSTEM POWER macro button, the TV turns off.

Note:

• Make sure you set up the manufacturer code (See page 61) or program a function using the Learn feature (See page 62) to the remote control for your

component, or the factory preset macros do not work.

(*1)

(*2)

(D-TV Area)

(TAPE Area)

(MD Area)

(LD Area)

(DVD Area)

(VCR1 Area)

(VCR2 Area)

(VCR3 Area)

SYSTEM

POWER

PLAY

(CD Area)

Advanced

Operation

MACRO

TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR

MACRO

MACROLEARN

OFF ON

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

V-AUX TAPE PHONO

D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD

VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

Remote Control Features

■ Operating the Macro Feature

Set MACRO ON/OFF to ON.

Press a Macro button.

Notes:

• When you are finished using the Macro feature, set MACRO ON/

OFF to OFF.

• While the main unit is carrying out a macro program, the main unit

does not receive any other button’s function until the macro is

complete (the TRANSMIT indicator stops flashing).

• Continue to aim the remote control at the equipment the macro is

operating until the macro program is complete.

■ Programming a Macro

You can use the Macro feature to transmit many remote control commands by pressing a single button.

Press MACRO using a ball point pen or similar object.

• If you do not initiate the procedure within 30 seconds, the

macro programming process is canceled.

Press the macro button on which you want to program the

Macro.

• If you want to change the source component, use SOURCE

SELECT

or input buttons. When you use input

buttons, input is selected as a Macro step, whereas SOURCE

SELECT

only changes the component.

• The display window shows the button you chose for

programming the macro and the component name in

alternation.

Press the buttons of the functions that you want to include

in the macro sequence in order.

• You can set up to 10 Macro steps (10 functions).

Press MACRO again when the sequence you want to

program is complete.

• After you set 10 steps, “FULL” is displayed.

Notes:

• “NG” appears in the display window when programming is not done correctly.

• “ERROR” appears in the display window in the following conditions: when pressing more than one button at once; and when MACRO ON/OFF is

switched to another position.

MACRO

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

V-AUX TAPE PHONO

D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD

VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

+–

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

V-AUX TAPE PHONO

D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD

VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD

6CH INPUT

MCR1 : DVD input

(ex)

MCR2 : DVD ›

MCR3 : DVD #

Macro buttons

MACRO ON/OFF

flashes

alternately

indicates the number

of macrosteps you

entered

flashes

alternately

(ex)

MCR 1 : DVD input

MCR 2 : DVD ›

MCR 3 : DVD #

English

Select the source component that you want to clear on the

window by using input buttons.

Press LEARN if you want to clear a learned function, or

press MACRO to clear a programmed macro, using a ball

point pen or similar object.

Press and hold CLEAR using a ball point pen or similar

object, and at the same time press the button from which

you want to clear the learned function or macro for about

3 seconds.

• “C:NG” appears in the display window if the operation is

unsuccessful. Should this occur, try doing step 3 again.

You can clear other learned functions and macros at this time by

continuing to hold down CLEAR and pressing the other buttons

on which those learned functions or macros are programmed.

Press LEARN again to confirm clearing a learned

function, or press MACRO again to confirm clearing a

programmed macro.

• Once you clear a learned function or macro from a button, the

button reverts to its factory preset function or macro.

Changing the Source Name in the Display Window

Remote Control Features

Clearing a Learned Function or Macro

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

V-AUX TAPE PHONO

D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD

VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD

CLEAR

MACRO

LEARN

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

V-AUX TAPE PHONO

D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD

VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD

RE-NAME

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

V-AUX TAPE PHONO

D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD

VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

+–

RE-NAME

MACRO

LEARN

flashes

alternately

flashes

alternately

While pressing

Select the source component you want to rename by using

the input buttons.

Press RE-NAME using a ballpoint pen or similar object.

Use the cursor buttons

to select a character.

• Pressing

changes the character in the following order: A~Z,

a~z, 0~9, space, -(hyphen).

Use the cursor buttons

to enter a character or move

to the next cursor postion.

Press RE-NAME to confirm renaming.

• If you want to rename another source component immediately,

press ENTER and repeat steps 1, 3 and 4.

Advanced

Operation

Press CLEAR using a ballpoint pen or similar object.

Press

to select the clear mode. The mode is shown

in the window in the following order:

Press and hold CLEAR again for about 3 seconds.

• “C:NG” appears in the display window if the operation is

unsuccessful.

Press CLEAR to confirm clearing.

• Once you clear a learned function or macro from a button, the

button reverts to its factory preset function or macro.

Clearing Learned Functions, Macros, Renamed Displays, and

Manufacturer Setups

Remote Control Features

Notes:

• If the remote control is without batteries for more than twenty minutes, or if worn out batteries remain in the unit, the contents of the memory may be

cleared.

When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries and program any acquired functions that may have been cleared.

• “ERROR” appears in the display window for the following conditions: when pressing a button other than the cursor and ENTER; when pressing more than

one button at once; and when one of MACRO ON/OFF, 10KEY/DSP, PARAMETER/SET MENU is switched to another position.

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

+–

CLEAR

For example, when DVD is selected as

the source component.

Clears all programmed functions

including manufacturer code presets.

This returns to the factory presets.

(L: name of a component) Clears all

learning functions of the component.

Clears all learning functions of the

main unit control area (see page 54).

Clears all learning functions.

Clears all macros.

Clears all renamed displays in the

display window.

English

Setting the Sleep Timer

Use this feature to automatically turn off the main unit after the amount of time you set. The Sleep Timer is useful when you plan to fall

asleep while the main unit is reproducing or recording a source. The Sleep Timer also automatically turns off external components connected

to AC OUTLETS. The Sleep Timer can only be set using the remote control.

■ To set the Sleep Timer

Select a source using INPUT SELECTOR and start playback (or

select a broadcast station) on the source component.

Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of time before the main

unit automatically turns off.

Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown

below. After a few seconds the display returns to the previous indication.

= SLEEP 120 min = SLEEP 90 min

SLEEP OFF + SLEEP 30 min + SLEEP 60 min +

■ To cancel the Sleep Timer

Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears in the front

panel display.

After a few seconds, the display returns to the previous indication.

Note:

• The Sleep Timer setting can also be canceled by turning off the main unit using

STANDBY on the remote control (or STANDBY/ON on the front panel) or

disconnecting the AC Power Cord from the AC outlet.

ON SCREEN

LEVEL

SLEEP TEST

PARAMETER

SET MENU

Adjusting the Levels of the Effect Speakers

ON SCREEN

LEVEL

SLEEP TEST

PARAMETER

SET MENU

You can adjust the volume level of each effect speaker (Center, Right Rear, Rear Center, Left Rear, Front Effect, and Subwoofer) while

listening to a music source.

Set PARAMETER/SET MENU to PARAMETER.

Press LEVEL to select the speaker(s) you want to adjust.

Each time you press this button the selected speaker changes and appears in

the front panel display only as follows: Center, Right Rear, Rear Center,

Left Rear, Front Effect Speakers, and Subwoofer

Adjust the speaker volume level using the + or – on the remote

control.

You can adjust the Center, Right Rear, Rear Center, Left Rear, Front Effect

Speakers from +10 dB to –10 dB.

You can adjust the Subwoofer from 0 dB down to –20 dB.

Notes:

• You cannot adjust the left and right speakers independently.

• When you adjust the speaker level using LEVEL, the settings you made using the

Dolby Surround Test and DSP Test change.

• When PARAMETER/SET MENU is set to SET MENU, you cannot adjust the

speaker level using LEVEL. However, each time you press LEVEL the current

level setting of each speaker appears. Select the speaker level you want to check

using

Center

Right Rear

Rear Center

Left Rear

Front

Subwoofer

Advanced

Operation

ZONE 2

You can make up a multi-room audio-video system with this unit. With this feature, you can set this unit to reproduce separate input sources

in the main room and second (Zone 2) room using the supplied remote control in the second room.

ONLY ANALOG SIGNALS ARE SENT TO THE SECOND ROOM. FOR ANY SOURCE YOU WISH TO LISTEN

TO IN THE SECOND ROOM, YOU MUST CONNECT THE ANALOG OUTPUT FROM THE SOURCE TO THE

CORRESPONDING ANALOG INPUT ON THIS UNIT.

Connections

To use the multi-room functions of this unit, you need the following additional equipment:

• An infrared signal receiver in the second room

• An infrared emitter in the main room

This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control in the second room to the main room

(for example, to a CD player or LD player).

• An amplifier and speakers for the second room

• A video monitor for the second room

Notes:

• Since there are so many ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-room installation,

we recommend that you consult with a custom installation specialist for the Zone 2

connections which will best meet your requirements.

• Some Yamaha models are able to connect directly to the REMOTE 1 OUT jacks of

this unit. If you own these products, you may not need to use an infrared emitter. Up to

six Yamaha components can be connected as shown.

■ A sample of system configuration and connections

■ Special considerations when using DTS software

The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Therefore, if you attempt to send the DTS signal to Zone 2, you will only be able to hear the digital

noise sound that could damage your loudspeakers.

Due to this characteristic of DTS encoded discs, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made.

For DTS encoded LDs or DVDs

Only 2-channel audio signals may be sent to Zone 2, as follows:

• Laser disc – Set your Laser Disc player’s left and right outputs to the analog sound track.

• DVD disc – Use the disc menu to set the DVD player’s mixed 2-channel left and right audio outputs to PCM or Dolby Digital.

For DTS encoded compact discs

DO NOT USE the Zone 2 feature with DTS encoded compact discs.

OUT OUT

Remote 1

OUT

IN IN

This Unit

Main Room

DVD Player

(or other component)

Infrared emitter

This Unit

Second Room

Amplifier

Video

monitor

Remote control

(in the Zone 2 mode)

Infrared signal receiver

REMOTE 1 OUT

VIDEO SIGNAL ZONE 2 OUT

REMOTE 1 IN

AUDIO SIGNAL ZONE 2 OUT

English

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

V-AUX TAPE PHONO

D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD

VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

ENTER-

TAINMENT

CONCERT

VIDEO 2

CONCERT

VIDEO 1

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

6.1/ES

THEATER

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

++ +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

+–

CHP/INDEX

–– –

Remote Control in ZONE 2

In the second (Zone 2) room, the supplied remote control can be used as the Zone 2 remote control. You can select the input source and

control the component which is located in the main room directly from the second room regardless of the listening condition in the main

room.

Press SOURCE SELECT

to display ZONE2 in the display

window.

Use the input buttons to select the input source you want to listen to.

• The display window shows “2: name of selected input” if the remote

control is in the Zone 2 mode.

You can control the component using the Component Control Area

buttons.

Note:

• VOLUME + / – can be used to adjust the volume if you set the SET MENU item

18. ZONE2 SET, ZONE2 OUT to “VAR.” (see page 53).

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEAR

ZONE 2

VOLUME

Additional

Information

Additional Information

Digital Sound Field Processing (DSP) 71

Understanding Sound Fields ............................................................................. 71

Recreating a Sound Field .................................................................................. 71

E/R (Early Reflection) ...................................................................................... 71

4ch REV. (Four Channel Reverberation).......................................................... 71

Illustration of the Virtual Sound Sources and Echo Patterns............................ 71

Hi-Fi DSP-Sound Field Program 72

Program Group 1 : Concert Hall 1 .................................................................. 72

Program Group 2 : Concert Hall 2 .................................................................. 72

Program Group 3 : Church.............................................................................. 72

Program Group 4 : Jazz Club .......................................................................... 72

Program Group 5 : Rock Concert ................................................................... 72

Program Group 6 : Entertainment ................................................................... 72

CINEMA-DSP 73

The Sound Design of CINEMA-DSP Sound Field Programs .......................... 73

Sound Field Images of the CINEMA-DSP Programs....................................... 73

Movie Theater Programs................................................................................... 74

CINEMA-DSP Sound Field Program 75

Program Group 7 : Concert Video 1 ............................................................... 76

Program Group 8 : Concert Video 2 ............................................................... 76

Program Group 9 : TV Theater ....................................................................... 76

Program Group 10 : Movie Theater 1.............................................................. 76

Program Group 11 : Movie Theater 2.............................................................. 76

Program Group 12 : Dolby/DTS Surround ...................................................... 76

Sound Field Program Parameter Editing 77

Changing Parameter Settings ............................................................................ 77

Resetting a Parameter to the Factory Preset Value ........................................... 77

Digital Sound Field Parameter Descriptions 78

EFCT TRIM (Effect Trim) ............................................................................... 78

INIT. DLY (Initial Delay)................................................................................. 78

P. INIT. DLY (Presence Initial Delay) ............................................................. 78

RC. INIT. DLY (Rear Center Initial Delay) ..................................................... 78

S. INIT. DLY (Surround Initial Delay) ............................................................ 78

S. DLY (Surround Delay) ................................................................................. 79

ROOM SIZE ..................................................................................................... 79

RC. ROOM SIZE (Rear Center Room Size) .................................................... 80

S. ROOM SIZE (Surround Room Size)............................................................ 80

LIVENESS........................................................................................................ 80

S. LIVENESS (Surround Liveness).................................................................. 80

RC LIVENESS (Rear Center Liveness) ........................................................... 80

REV. TIME (Reverberation Time) ................................................................... 81

REV. DELAY (Reverberation Delay) .............................................................. 81

REV. LEVEL (Reverberation Level) ............................................................... 81

English

Digital Sound Field Processing (DSP)

Understanding Sound Fields

A sound field is defined as the “characteristic sound reflections of a particular space.”

In concert halls and other music venues, we hear early reflections and reverberations as

well as the direct sound produced by the artist(s). The variations in the early reflections

and other reverberations among the different music venues is what gives each venue its

special and recognizable sound quality.

Yamaha sent teams of sound engineers all around the world to measure the sound

reflections of famous concert halls and music venues, and collect detailed sound field

information such as the direction, strength, range, and delay time of those reflections.

Then we stored this enormous amount of data in the ROM chips of the RX-V1.

Recreating a Sound Field

Recreating the sound field of a concert hall or an opera house requires localizing the

virtual sound sources in your listening room. The traditional stereo system that uses

only two speakers is not capable of recreating a realistic sound field. Yamaha’s DSP

requires four effect speakers to recreate sound fields based on the measured sound

field data. The processor controls the strength and delay time of the signals output

from the four effect speakers to localize the virtual sound sources in a full circle

around the listener.

The DSP sound field programs can be classified in two types based on the sound field

processing method: programs that use early reflections only and programs that use

both early reflections and reverberation.

E/R (Early Reflection)

Each sound field is distinguished by the structure of the reflected sound. The increased processing capability of DSP technology enables

Yamaha engineers to incorporate even minute reflections with long delay times into the sound field data.

4ch REV. (Four Channel Reverberation)

This type of program consists of early reflections and high quality digital reverberation processing. Reverberation is the most important

element for recreating the sound field of a church. To recreate a realistic spatial sound image from reverberation data, Yamaha has adapted

the four-channel-output reverberation technology.

Illustration of the Virtual Sound Sources and Echo Patterns

The virtual sound sources and echo patterns for the DSP sound field programs are shown below. The illustration of the virtual sound sources

shows early reflection sound only and the illustration of the echo patterns shows both reflected sound and reverberation.

The center of these circles represent the virtual

sound source.

The size of the circle indicates the strength of the

virtual sound source.

The direct sound source

The listening position

Virtual Sound Sources

Echo Patterns

Direct sound source

Early

reflections

50~80 mSec

Reverbration

Additional

Information

Hi-Fi DSP-Sound Field Program

■ Europe Hall A

This is a large fan-shaped concert hall in

Munich which has approximately 2500

seats. Almost the whole interior is made

of wood. There is relatively little

reflection from the walls, and sound

spreads finely and beautifully.

■ Europe Hall B

This is a large shoe-box type concert

hall with less than 2400 seats located in

Frankfurt. This hall has a very solid,

powerful sound. The listener’s virtual

seat is in the center-right section on the

first floor.

■ Europe Hall C

A classic shoe-box type concert hall

with approximately 1700 seats. Pillars

and ornate carvings create extremely

complex reflections which produce a

very full, rich sound.

■ U.S.A. Hall D

This is a large 2600 seat concert hall in

the United States which features a fairly

traditional European design. The interior

is relatively simple, in the American

style. The middle and high frequencies

are richly and beautifully reinforced.

■ Europe Hall E

This is a large 2200 seat shoe-box type

concert hall in Amsterdam. It has a

circular stage with seats located behind

the stage.

■ Live Concert

A large round concert hall with a rich

surround effect. Pronounced reflections

from all directions emphasize the

extension of sounds. The sound field has

a great deal of presence, and your virtual

seat is near the center, close to the stage.

■ Tokyo

The acoustic environment of an ordinary

church with moderate reverberations.

The reverberation lasts 2.5 seconds. This

is ideal for reproducing church organ

and choral music.

■ Freiburg

This program recreates the acoustic

environment of a big church located in

south Germany. The reverberation delay

is very long while the early reflections

are smaller than with other sound field

programs.

■ Royaumont

This program features the sound field

created by the refectory (dining hall) of

a beautiful medieval Gothic monastery

located in Royaumont on the outskirts of

Paris.

■ Village Gate

This is the sound field at a jazz club in

New York. It is in a basement and has a

relatively spacious floor area. The

listener’s virtual seat is at the center left

of the hall.

■ Village Vanguard

A traditional jazz club in New York,

located on 7th Avenue. This room has a

low ceiling, and the “stage” is located in

a corner. This program creates an

intimate “close-to-the music” feel.

■ The Bottom Line

This is the sound field at stage front in

“The Bottom Line”, a famous New York

jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people

to the left and right in a sound field

offering a real and vibrant sound.

■ Roxy Theatre

The ideal program for lively, dynamic

rock music. The data for this program

was recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock

club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the

center-left of the hall.

■ Warehouse Loft

This program simulates a space enclosed

by concrete. An energetic sound field is

created with relatively clear reflections

from the walls.

■ Arena

A classic shoe-box type concert hall.

This program gives you long delays

between direct sounds and effect

sounds, with the extraordinarily

spacious feel of a large arena.

■ Disco

This program recreates the acoustic

environment of a lively disco in the

heart of a big city. The sound is dense

and highly concentrated. It is also

characterized by a high-energy,

“immediate” sound.

■ Party

This is a sound field suitable for

background music at parties where you

can hear the sound directly from the rear

as well, thus realizing music enjoyment

over a wide area.

■ Game/Amusement

This program adds a deep and spatial

feeling to video game sounds and is also

suitable for karaoke.

Program Group 1 : Concert Hall 1

Program Group 2 : Concert Hall 2

Program Group 3 : Church

Program Group 4 : Jazz Club

Program Group 5 : Rock Concert

Program Group 6 : Entertainment

English

CINEMA-DSP

The Sound Design of CINEMA-DSP Sound Field Programs

Filmmakers intend the dialog to be located right on the screen, the effect sound a little farther back, the music spread even farther back, and

the surround sound around the listener. Of course, all of these sounds must be synchronized with the images on the screen.

CINEMA-DSP is an upgraded version of YAMAHA DSP specially designed for movie soundtracks. CINEMA-DSP integrates the DTS,

Dolby Digital, and Dolby Pro Logic surround sound technologies with YAMAHA DSP sound field programs to provide the surround sound

field. It recreates the most complete movie sound design in your audio room. In CINEMA-DSP sound field programs, Yamaha’s exclusive

DSP processing is added to the front left, center, and right channels, so the listener can enjoy realistic dialogue, depth of sound, smooth

transition between sound sources, and a surround sound field that goes beyond the screen.

When a DTS or Dolby Digital signal is detected, the CINEMA-DSP sound field processor automatically chooses the most suitable sound

field program for that signal.

Sound Field Images of the CINEMA-DSP Programs

Each CINEMA-DSP program has its own type of sound field processing block. The sound field data, including the presence and surround

sound fields, are based on actual measured data. The presence and surround sound fields can be expressed in the distribution of virtual sound

sources and echo patterns. However, as these two types of sound fields are processed with complex elements such as energy balance and

mixing signal ratios, they are expressed as a sound field based on auditory perception.

Stereo input

Presence sound field

Sound source

Screen

Listening position

Listening room

Surround sound field

Reverberation

Presence sound field

Front sound source

Screen

Listening position

Listening room

Left surround sound source

Left surround sound field

Right surround sound source

Right surround sound field

Reverberation

Dolby Digital or DTS input

PRESENCE SOUND FIELD

DIALOG EFFECT

MUSIC

AV ROOM

R SURROUND SOUND FIELD

L SURROUND SOUND FIELD

Additional

Information

CINEMA-DSP

Movie Theater Programs

Most movie software has four-channel (left, center, right and surround) sound information encoded using Dolby Surround matrix processing

and stored on the left and right tracks. These signals are processed by the Dolby Pro Logic decoder. The Movie Theater Programs are

designed to recreate the spaciousness and delicate nuances of sound that tend to be lost in the encoding and decoding processes.

The six-channel soundtracks found on 70 mm film produce precise sound field localization and rich, deep sound without using matrix

processing. The RX-V1’s Movie Theater 70 mm Programs provide the same quality of sound and sound localization that six-channel

soundtracks do. The built-in Dolby Digital decoder brings the professional quality sound designed for movie theaters, into your home. With

the RX-V1’s Movie Theater program, you can recreate a dynamic sound that gives you the feeling of being at a public theater in your living

room using the Dolby Digital technology.

■ Dolby Pro Logic + DSP Sound Field Effect

These programs express an immense sound field and a large surround effect. They also give depth to the sound from the Main Speakers

to recreate the realistic sound of a Dolby Stereo theater.

■ Dolby Digital/DTS + DSP Sound Field Effect

These programs use Yamaha’s tri-field DSP process on each of the Dolby Digital signals for the front, left surround, and right surround

channels. This processing enables the RX-V1 to reproduce the immense sound field and surround expression of a Dolby Digital equipped

movie theater without sacrificing the clear separation of all channels.

■ Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1/DTS ES + DSP Sound Field Effect

These programs provide you the maximum experience of the spacious surround effects since an extra Rear Center DSP sound field

created from the Rear Center channel is added.

Presence DSP

Sound Field

Right Surround DSP

Sound Field

Left Surround DSP

Sound Field

Presence DSP

Sound Field

Surround DSP

Sound Field

English

CINEMA-DSP Sound Field Program

According to the input signal format, the RX-V1 automatically chooses the appropriate decoder and DSP sound field pattern.

* The Matrix decoder is ON.

■ Program Groups 7~9

These are sound field programs for the audio-video sources.

■ Program Groups 10~12

Ideal for reproducing a movie program which is encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital, or DTS. When the newest movie program

encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS ES is input, you can enjoy the full 6.1 channel reproduction using the internal Matrix

decoder.

PRO LOGIC functions when the input signal is analog or PCM audio, or encoded with Dolby Digital in two channels.

DOLBY DIGITAL functions when the input signal is encoded with Dolby Digital in more than two channels.

DTS DIGITAL SUR functions when the input signal is encoded with DTS.

Note:

• No sound wil be output from the Main speakers when a monaural source is played with sound field Program Groups 7~12.

Program

Group

CONCERT

VIDEO 1

CONCERT

VIDEO 2

THEATER

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

PRO LOGIC

DOLBY

DIGITAL

DTS

DIGITAL SUR

Pop/Rock

Classical/Opera

Pavilion

Mono Movie

Variety/Sports

70 mm Spectacle

70 mm Sci-Fi

70 mm Adventure

70 mm General

Normal

Enhanced

Input

Stereo

(2ch)

DOLBY DIGITAL

(5.1ch)

DTS Spectacle

DTS Sci-Fi

DTS Adventure

DTS General

Normal

Enhanced

DTS

(5.1ch)

DOLBY DIGITAL

(6.1ch)*

DTS ES

(6.1ch)*

Table of Program Names for Each Input Format

Spectacle ES

Sci-Fi ES

Adventure ES

General ES

Enhanced ES

– – – – – – – –

Spectacle 6.1

Sci-Fi 6.1

Adventure 6.1

General 6.1

Matrix 6.1

Enhanced 6.1

– – – – – – – –

DGTL Spectacle

DGTL Sci-Fi

DGTL Adventure

DGTL General

Normal

Enhanced

Additional

Information

CINEMA-DSP Sound Field Program

Program Group 9 : TV Theater

■ Mono Movie

This program is provided for reproducing monaural video

sources (such as old movies). The program produces the

optimum reverberation to create sound depth using only the

presence sound field.

■ Variety/Sports

Though the presence sound field is relatively narrow, the

surround sound field employs the sound environment of a large

concert hall. With this program, you can enjoy watching various

TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or

sports programs.

Program Group 10 : Movie Theater 1

■ Spectacle

This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70 mm

movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail,

making both the video and the sound fields incredibly real. This

program is ideal for any kind of Dolby Surround video source

(especially large-scale movie productions).

■ Sci-Fi

This program clearly reproduces the broad and expansive

cinematic space from the soundtracks of the latest science fiction

films.

Program Group 11 : Movie Theater 2

■ Adventure

This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design

of the newest 70 mm and multichannel soundtrack films. The

sound field is made to be similar to that of the newest movie

theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are

restrained as much as possible.

■ General

This program is for reproducing sounds from 70 mm and

multichannel soundtrack films, and is characterized by a soft and

extensive sound field. The presence sound field is relatively

narrow. It spatially spreads all around and toward the screen,

restraining the effect of conversations without losing clarity.

Program Group 12 : Dolby/DTS Surround

■ Normal/Matrix 6.1/ES

The built-in decoder precisely reproduces sounds and sound

effects from sources. The highly efficient decoding process

improves crosstalk and channel separation and makes sound

positioning smoother and more precise.

In this program, no DSP effect is applied.

■ Enhanced/6.1/ES

This program ideally simulates the multiple surround speaker

systems of 35 mm film theaters. The Dolby Surround decoding

and the digital sound field processing create precise effects

without altering the original sound orientation. The surround

effects produced by this sound field wrap around the viewer

naturally from the back to the left and right and toward the

screen.

Program Group 7 : Concert Video 1

■ Pop/Rock

This program produces an enthusiastic atmosphere and lets you

feel as if you are at an actual jazz or rock concert.

■ DJ

The sound field makes the voice of a disc jockey sound clearer.

Program Group 8 : Concert Video 2

■ Classical/Opera

This program provides excellent vocal depth and overall clarity

by restraining excessive reverberation.

The surround sound field is relatively moderate but it reproduces

beautiful sound using data collected from a concert hall.

■ Pavilion

This program reproduces vocals clearly, letting you feel the

spaciousness of a pavilion. Reverberation, which is somewhat

delayed, reproduces the live acoustics unique to a pavilion, and

helps to make concert scenes more exciting.

English

Sound Field Program Parameter Editing

You can enjoy good quality sound with the pre-set parameters. Although you do not have to change the initial settings, you can change some

of the parameters to better suit the input source or your listening room.

Changing Parameter Settings

Set PARAMETER/SET MENU to PARAMETER on the remote

control.

Turn on your video monitor and press ON SCREEN to select the

full display.

Select the sound field program you want to adjust.

Press

to select the parameter.

Press + or – to change the parameter value.

When you set the parameter to a value other than the factory preset value, an

asterisk mark appears by the parameter name on the monitor screen.

Repeat steps 3 through 5 above as necessary to change other

program parameters.

Resetting a Parameter to the Factory Preset Value

Program No. Program Name

Program Type (subprogram)

Cursor Parameters

Example of the CONCERT HALL 1

■ To reset all of the parameters back to the

factory preset values

Use the SET MENU to reset all of the parameter values of all

DSP programs within the selected group to the factory preset

values (see page 51). This operation resets all of the parameter

values of all DSP programs within that group to the factory

preset values.

■ To reset some of the parameters to the

factory preset values

Select the parameter you want to reset. Then, press and hold + or

– until the value stops at the factory preset value temporarily.

(The asterisk mark by the parameter name disappears on the

video monitor.)

Notes:

• The available parameters may be displayed on more than one OSD page for some of the programs. To scroll through pages, press

• When “MEMORY GUARD!” appears on the screen, the Memory Guard function is on, and you cannot change parameter values. Turn off the Memory

Guard function using the SET MENU (see page 52).

PARAMETER

SET MENU

Additional

Information

Digital Sound Field Parameter Descriptions

You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your listening room. Not all

of the following parameters are found in every program.

EFCT TRIM (Effect Trim)

Function .................... This parameter adjusts the level of all the effect sounds within a narrow range.

Control Range ........... –3 dB - +3 dB

Description ................ Depending on the acoustics of your listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the effect level relative

to the direct sound.

INIT. DLY (Initial Delay)

Function .................... This parameter changes the apparent distance from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the direct

sound and the first reflection heard by the listener.

Control Range ........... 1 - 99 milliseconds

Description ................ The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. The larger the value, the farther the

apparent distance seems. For a small room, this parameter would be set to a small value, for a large room, set it to

a large value.

P. INIT. DLY (Presence Initial Delay)

Function .................... This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the presence sound field.

Control Range ........... 1 - 99 milliseconds

Description ................ The larger the value, the later the first reflection begins.

RC. INIT. DLY (Rear Center Initial Delay)

Function .................... This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the rear center sound field.

Control Range ........... 1 - 49 milliseconds

Description ................ The larger the value, the later the first reflection begins.

S. INIT. DLY (Surround Initial Delay)

Function .................... This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the surround side of the

sound field. You can only adjust this parameter when at least two front channels and two rear channels are used.

Control Range ........... 1 - 49 milliseconds

Description ................ The larger the value, the later the first reflection begins. You can only adjust this parameter for the Dolby Digital

and DTS signals.

Level

Time Time

Time

INIT. DLYINIT. DLY

INIT. DLY

Reflection Face

Sound Source

Small value = 1 ms

Large value = 99 ms

Sound Source

Primary

Reflected

Sound

English

S. DLY (Surround Delay)

Function .................... This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the surround sound field.

Control Range ........... 0 - 49 milliseconds (The range depends on the signal format.)

Description ................ When Dolby Digital signals are decoded: the larger the parameter, the later the surround sound source begins.

When a non-Dolby Digital program is decoded: the larger the parameter, the later the surround sound field

begins.

No surround sound source is produced.

ROOM SIZE

Function .................... This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround

sound field becomes.

Control Range ........... 0.1 - 2.0

Description ................ As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between the original

reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the reflected sounds, you can

change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from one to two, doubles the apparent

length of the room.

Digital Sound Field Parameter Descriptions

Level

Time

S Sound Field

Direct Sound

Dolby Digital or DTS Input

Level

Time

S Sound Field

Direct Sound

Others

The surround sound field is not reproduced.

Time

Level

Time

Level

Time

Sound Source

Primary

Reflected

Sound

Small

value

Large value

Small value = 0.1

Large value = 2.0

Sound Source

S. DELAY

S. INIT.

DELAY

SURROUND (LS/RS)

S. DELAY

Additional

Information

Digital Sound Field Parameter Descriptions

RC. ROOM SIZE (Rear Center Room Size)

Function .................... This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the rear center sound field.

Control Range ........... 0.1 - 2.0

Description ................ The larger the value, the more reflective the presence sound field walls become.

S. ROOM SIZE (Surround Room Size)

Function .................... This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field.

Control Range ........... 0.1 - 2.0

Description ................ The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes.

LIVENESS

Function .................... This parameter adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early

reflections decay.

Control Range ........... 0 - 10

Description ................ The early reflections of a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces

than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as

“dead,” while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live.” The LIVENESS parameter lets you

adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the “liveness” of the room.

S. LIVENESS (Surround Liveness)

Function .................... This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual walls in the surround sound field.

Control Range ........... 0 - 10

Description ................ The larger the value, the more reflective the surround sound field walls become.

RC. LIVENESS (Rear Center Liveness)

Function .................... This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual wall in the rear center sound field.

Control Range ........... 0 - 10

Description ................ The larger the value, the more reflective the surround sound field walls become.

Level

Time

Source Sound

Level

Time

Level

Time

Dead

Live

Source Sound

Small Reflected

Sound

Large

Reflected Sound

Small value = 0

Large value = 10

English

Digital Sound Field Parameter Descriptions

REV. TIME (Reverberation Time)

Function .................... This parameter adjusts the amount of time it takes for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay by

60 dB (at 1 kHz). This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range.

Control Range ........... 1.0 - 5.0 seconds

Description ................ Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening room environments and a shorter time for “live”

sources and listening room environments.

REV. DELAY (Reverberation Delay)

Function .................... This parameter adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the

reverberation sound.

Control Range ........... 0 - 250 milliseconds

Description ................ The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel like you

are in a larger acoustic environment.

REV. LEVEL (Reverberation Level)

Function .................... This parameter adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound.

Control Range ........... 0 - 100%

Description ................ The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes.

60 dB 60 dB 60 dB

Reverberation

Short

Reverberation

Long Reverberation

Rever-

beration

Small value = 1.0 s Large value = 5.0 s

(dB)

60 dB

Level

Time

Source Sound

Reverberation

Level

Time

Source Sound

REV. TIME

Primary Reflected Sound

Source Sound

Reverberation

REV.

DELAY

REV TIME

REV LEVEL

Appendix

Troubleshooting 83

Reference Chart for the INPUT and OUTPUT Jacks 87

CINEMA - EQ Frequency Characteristics 87

Specifications 88

English

Troubleshooting

Refer to the chart below when the RX-V1 does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the

instruction below does not help, turn the power off, disconnect the power cord, and contact your dealer or the nearest Yamaha Audio

Products Service Department.

After this unit is exposed to strong external electric shock (such as lightning and large static electricity) or you mishandle the operation of

this unit, it may not function properly. In these cases, turn the power off, unplug the power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, and start

operating.

Problem

Possible Cause What to Do

General

The unit fails to turn on when

STANDBY/ON is pressed, or

returns to standby mode

suddenly soon after the power

is turned on.

Hum

No Sound or no picture

No picture

No sound is coming from one

side.

The volume level cannot be

increased very much when

adjusting VOLUME.

The sound suddenly goes off.

Plug in the power cord securely (see page

24).

Set the switch completely to either position

(depending on your speakers) while this unit

is in standby mode (see page 22).

Make sure all speaker wire connections on

this unit and on all speakers are secure and

that the wire for each connection does not

touch anything other than its respective

connection.

Connect the audio plugs securely. If the

problem persists, the cords may be defective.

Connect the grounding cord of your turntable

to the GND terminal of this unit (see page

16).

Turn up the volume.

Connect the equipment correctly. If the

problem persists, the cords may be defective.

Select the appropriate input source with

INPUT SELECTOR.

Press INPUT MODE to select another input

mode

Play a source whose signals this unit can

reproduce.

Connect this unit’s S VIDEO MONITOR OUT

terminal to the TV’s S-video input terminal or

disconnect the S-video cable from the source

equipment.

Connect all cables securely. If the problem

persists, the cords may be defective.

Adjust BALANCE.

Turn VOLUME to minimum, press MUTE to

restore audio, and adjust the volume again.

Turn on the power to the equipment.

Reset the protection circuitry by turning the

unit off and on.

Cancel the SLEEP timer function.

The power cord is not plugged in or is not

completely inserted.

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR on the rear

panel is not set correctly.

The protection circuitry has been activated.

There is a faulty cable connection.

No connection from the turntable to the

GND terminal.

The volume is turned down.

Faulty or incorrect input or output

connection.

Incorrect input source.

This unit is set to DTS input mode.

Digital signals other than PCM audio,

Dolby Digital, or DTS encoded signals are

input to this unit by playing a CD-ROM,

etc.

The source equipment is connected to this

unit using an S-video cable, but there is

no S-video connection between this unit

and your video monitor.

There is a faulty cable connection.

BALANCE is turned all the way to one

side.

MUTE is on.

The equipment connected to the TAPE/

MD OUT jacks of this unit is turned off.

The protection circuitry has been activated

because of short circuit etc.

The SLEEP timer came on.

Appendix

Troubleshooting

Problem Possible Cause What to Do

No sound is coming from the

Effect speakers.

No sound is coming from the

Front Effect speakers.

No sound is coming from the

Center speaker.

No sound is coming from the

Rear Effect speakers.

No sound is coming from the

Subwoofer.

Poor bass reproduction.

The volume level cannot be

increased, or sound is

distorted.

DSP parameters and some

other settings on this unit

cannot be changed.

This unit does not operate

properly.

Press EFFECT to turn on the effect sound.

Select another sound field program.

Adjust the Front Effect speaker level (see

page 67).

Select “YES” (see page 45).

Select the appropriate mode for your Center

speaker (see page 43).

Select another sound field program.

Refer to the instructions for the source

currently playing.

Increase the right and left Rear speaker

levels (see page 67).

Select another sound field program.

Select “SW” or “BOTH” (see page 44).

Select “BOTH” (see page 44).

Select “MAIN” (see page 44).

Select the appropriate output mode for each

channel based on the size of the speakers in

your configuration (see pages 43 through

44).

Turn on the power to the equipment.

Select “OFF” (see page 52).

Disconnect the AC power cord from the

outlet, then plug it in again after about one

minute.

The effect is off.

A Dolby Surround or DTS decoding sound

field program is being used with material

not encoded with Dolby Surround or DTS.

PRO LOGIC/Normal, DOLBY DIGITAL/

Normal or DTS DIGITAL SUR./Normal of

DSP program 12 is selected.

The front level is turned to minimum.

The 1F. FRNT EFCT item in the SET

MENU is set to “NONE”.

The 1A. CENTER SP item in the SET

MENU is set to “NONE”.

One of the Hi-Fi DSP sound field

programs (1 to 6) is selected.

The input signals of a source encoded

with Dolby Digital or DTS do not include

center channel signals.

The right and left Rear speaker levels are

set to minimum.

A monaural source is played with sound

field program 12.

The 1E. LFE/BASS OUT item in the SET

MENU is set to “MAIN” when a Dolby

Digital or DTS encoded software is

played.

The 1E. LFE/BASS OUT item in the SET

MENU is set to “SW” or “MAIN” when a 2-

channel encoded software is played.

The 1E. LFE/BASS OUT item in the SET

MENU is set to “SW” or “BOTH” and your

system does not include a subwoofer.

The output mode selection for each

channel (MAIN, CENTER or REAR) in the

SET MENU does not match your speaker

configuration.

The power to the equipment connected to

the REC OUT jacks of this unit is off.

The 13. MEMORY GUARD item in the

SET MENU is set to “ON”.

The internal microcomputer has been

frozen by an external electric shock (such

as lightning or excessive static electricity)

or by a power supply with low voltage.

English

Problem Possible Cause What to Do

FM stereo reception is

noisy.

There is distortion and clear

reception cannot be

obtained even with a good

FM antenna.

A desired station cannot be

tuned in with the automatic

tuning method.

Previously preset stations

can no longer be tuned in

using preset tuning.

A desired station cannot be

tuned in with the automatic

tuning method.

There are continuous

crackling and hissing

noises.

There are buzzing and

whining noises (especially

in the evening).

Check the antenna connections.

Try using a high quality directional FM

antenna.

Set TUNING MODE to the manual tuning

mode.

Adjust the antenna orientation to eliminate

multipath interference.

Use the manual tuning method.

Use a high quality directional FM antenna.

Repeat the presetting procedure (see page

36).

Tighten the AM loop antenna connections

and adjust the antenna’s orientation for best

reception.

Use the manual tuning method.

Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.

This will help somewhat but it is difficult to

eliminate all the noises.

Relocate this unit away from the TV.

Because of the characteristics of FM

stereo broadcasts, this is limited to cases

where the transmitter is too far away or

the antenna input is poor.

There is multipath interference.

The station is too weak.

This unit has been unplugged for a long

period.

Weak signal or loose antenna

connections.

Noises result from lightning, fluorescent

lamps, motors, thermostats and other

electrical equipment.

A television set is being used nearby.

Problem

Possible Cause What to Do

Tuner

Troubleshooting

A source cannot be recorded

by a tape deck or VCR

connected to this unit.

CHECK SP WIRES!" appears

on the display.

There is noise from a nearby

TV or tuner.

The sound is degraded when

listening with the headphones

connected to the CD player or

cassette deck that are

connected to this unit.

“INPUT DATA ERROR”

appears on the display and no

sound is heard.

Make additional connections to the analog

jacks (see pages 16 through 19).

Make sure all speaker cables are

connected correctly.

Move this unit farther away from the affected

equipment.

Turn on the power to this unit.

Check the source, or turn off the source

equipment, then turn it on again.

The source unit is connected to this unit

using digital jacks only.

Speaker cables are short circuited.

This unit is too close to the affected

equipment.

The power to this unit is off.

A non-standard source is played back, or

the equipment playing back the source is

not operating correctly.

Appendix

The remote control does not

work.

The remote control does not

function properly.

The remote control

does not “learn” new functions.

(The TRANSMIT indicator does

not light up or flash.)

Continuous functions such as

volume are learned, but

operate only for a moment

before stopping.

Replace the batteries with new ones and

press RESET (see page 5).

Press RESET on the remote control (see

page 5).

The remote control will function within a

maximum range of 6 m (20 feet), no more

than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel

(see page 5).

Change the position of this unit.

Press RESET on the remote control (see

page 5).

Replace the batteries (and press RESET on

the remote control) (see page 5).

Place the remote controls at the proper

distance (see page 62).

Learning is not possible.

Further learning is not possible without

deleting unnecessary new functions (see

page 66).

Press RESET on the remote control (see

page 5).

Be sure to press and hold the function button

on the other remote control until TRANSMIT

begins flashing slowly.

The batteries are dead.

The internal microcomputer has “frozen”.

Wrong distance or angle.

Direct sunlight or lighting (such as an

inverter type of fluorescent lamp) is

striking the remote control sensor of this

unit.

The internal microcomputer has “frozen”.

The batteries of this remote control and/or

the other remote control are too weak.

The distance between the two remote

controls is too far or near.

The signal coding or modulation of the

other remote control is not compatible with

this remote control.

Memory capacity is full.

The internal microcomputer has “frozen”.

The learning process is incomplete.

Problem

Possible Cause What to Do

Remote Control

Troubleshooting

English

Reference Chart for the INPUT and OUTPUT Jacks

CINEMA - EQ Frequency Characteristics

∗3

∗4

∗2

Ο Ο

∗1

▲ HIGH Frequency

Range GAIN +6 ~ –9 dB

FRQ

▲ PEQ Frequency

Range GAIN +6 ~ –9 dB Q 1.85 (fixed)

–3

–6

–9

20 50 100 200 500 1k 2k 5k 10k 20k

FRQ

▲ HIGH Frequency

Range FRQ 1.0 ~ 12.7 kHz

–3

–6

–9

20 50 100 200 500 1k 2k 5k 10k 20k

1.0k

1.2k

1.6k

2.0k

2.5k

3.2k

4.0k

5.0k

5.7k

6.3k

7.1k

8.0k

9.0k

10.1k

11.3k

12.7kHz

FRQ

▲ PEQ Frequency

Range FRQ 1.0 ~ 12.7 kHz Q 1.85 (fixed)

–3

–6

–9

20 50 100 200 500 1k 2k 5k 10k 20k

1.0k

1.2k

1.6k

2.0k

2.5k

3.2k

4.0k

5.0k

5.7k

6.3k

7.1k

8.0k

9.0k

10.1k

11.3k

12.7kHz

FRQ

–3

–6

–9

20 50 100 200 500 1k 2k 5k 10k 20k

Cinema EQ is a digital equalizer that lets you independently adjust the sound quality of each speaker.

■PEQ (Parametric Equalizer): Allows

smooth boost and cut at an arbitrary frequency

range. The center frequency can be in the 1 to

12.7 kHz range, with gain between +6 and –9 dB.

*1 This input can be changed to another video input by using the SET MENU. *2 Only for VCR 1

*3 SPLIT L,R, and MONO outputs *4 MAIN L,R, CENTER, FRONT L,R, REAR L,R, and REAR CENTER total 8 channels

■HIGH (High Shelving Filter): Adjusts high

frequency response smoothly. There are 16

responses affecting frequencies in the 1 to 12.7

kHz range, while gain is adjusted between +6 and

–9 dB.

SIGNAL

PHONO

TUNER

TAPE

DVD

D-TV

CBL/SAT

VCR 1, 2, 3

V-AUX

6 CH INPUT

SUBWOOFER

ZONE 2 OUT

MONITOR OUT

SPEAKER OUT

HEADPHONES

ANALOG

AUDIO

OUT

DIGITAL

COAXIAL OPTICAL

VIDEO

COMPOSITE S-VIDEO COMPONENT

IN OUT IN OUT

IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT

Appendix

Specifications

Audio Section

Minimum RMS Output Power per Channel

MAIN L/R, CENTER, REAR L/R/C

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.015% THD, 8 ohms) ------------ 110 W

FRONT L/R (1 kHz, 0.05% THD, 8 ohms) ------------ 35 W

Dynamic Power (IHF)

MAIN L/R (8/6/4/2 ohms) -------------- 150/180/240/340 W

Dynamic Headroom

MAIN L/R (8 ohms) --------------------------------------1.3 dB

Power Band Width

MAIN L/R (55 W, 0.04% THD, 8 ohms)

---------------------------------------------------10 Hz to 50 kHz

Damping Factor

MAIN L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 ohms) --------- 200 or more

Input Sensitivity/Impedance (110 W/8 ohms)

CD, etc. -------------------------------------- 150 mV/47k-ohms

PHONO MM --------------------------------2.5 mV/47k-ohms

MAIN IN ----------------------------------------- 1 V/47k-ohms

Output Level/Impedance

REC OUT ----------------------------------- 150 mV/600 ohms

MAIN OUT ------------------------------------- 1 V/1.2 k-ohms

SUBWOOFER [SPLIT L/R] ----------------- 2 V/1.2 k-ohms

[MONO] ----------------- 4 V/1.2 k-ohms

PHONES Output ------------------------------------ 150 mV/100 ohms

Frequency Response (10 Hz to 100 kHz)

CD, etc. to MAIN L/R SP. OUT------------------------ –3 dB

Total Harmonic Distortion (20 Hz to 20 kHz)

CD, etc. to MAIN OUT (1 V) -----------------0.005% or less

MAIN IN to SP OUT (55 W/8 ohms)-------- 0.005% or less

Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A network)

(Input shorted, EFFECT off) ------------------ 96 dB or more

Residual Noise (IHF-A network)

MAIN L/R SP. OUT --------------------------- 150 µV or less

Channel Separation (Vol –30 dB, 5.1 k-ohms terminated)

1 kHz/10 kHz ---------------------------- 70 dB/60 dB or more

Tone Control (MAIN L/R)

Bass Boost/Cut ---------------------------------±10 dB (50 Hz)

Treble Boost/Cut ----------------------------- ±10 dB (20 kHz)

Bass Extension ---------------------------------- +6 dB (60 Hz)

Video Section

Video Signal Type ------------------------------------------------- NTSC

[Australia model]------------------------------------------- PAL

Composite Video Signal Level ----------------------- 1 Vp-p/75 ohms

S-Video Signal Level

Y------------------------------------------------- 1 Vp-p/75 ohms

C-------------------------------------------- 0.286 Vp-p/75 ohms

Component Video Signal Level

Y------------------------------------------------- 1 Vp-p/75 ohms

B/CB, PR/CR --------------------------------- 0.7 Vp-p/75 ohms

Maximum Input Level ------------------------------------------ 1.5 Vp-p

Signal to Noise Ratio ------------------------------------ 50 dB or more

Frequency Response

(MONITOR OUT) ------------------- 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB

FM Section

Tuning Range ---------------------------------------- 87.5 to 107.9 MHz

[Australia model] -------------------------- 87.5 to 108.0 MHz

50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF, 75 ohms, 100% mod., 1 kHz)

Mono------------------------------------------ 1.6 µV (15.3 dBf)

Stereo ------------------------------------------23 µV (38.5 dBf)

Usable Sensitinity (75 ohms) [Australia model only]

DIN, Mono (S/N 26 dB) -------------------------------- 0.9 µV

DIN, Stereo (S/N 46 dB) --------------------------------- 28 µV

Signal-to-Noise Ratio

(IHF) Mono/Stereo ------------------------------- 81 dB/75 dB

[Australia model]

(DIN Weighted, 40 kHz Dev.) Mono/Stereo

------------------------------------------------------- 75 dB/69 dB

Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)

Mono/Stereo -------------------------------------------- 0.1/0.2%

Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ----------------------------------------- 48 dB

Frequency Response

20 Hz to 15 kHz ------------------------------------------0±1 dB

AM Section

Tuning Range ------------------------------------------ 530 to 1,710 kHz

[Australia model] ----------------------------531 to 1,611 kHz

Usable Sensitivity --------------------------------------------- 300 µV/m

Signal-to-Noise Ratio ---------------------------------------------- 52 dB

General

Power Supply --------------------------------------AC 120 V, 50/60 Hz

[Australia model] --------------------------- AC 240 V, 50 Hz

Power Consumption----------------------------------------------- 550 W

AC Outlets (Total 120 W maximum)------------------- 3 (Switched)

[Australia model] (100 W maximum)--------- 1 (Switched)

Dimensions (W x H x D) -------------------------471 x 211 x 473 mm

(18-1/2” x 8-1/4” x 18-5/8”)

Weight ----------------------------------------------- 28 kg (61 lbs 11oz)

Accessories ----------------------------------------------- Remote control

Alkaline batteries

Quick reference guide

AM loop antenna

Indoor FM antenna

Antenna adapter (Except for Australia model)

*Specifications are subject to change without notice.

V482920-1Printed in Japan

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

V-AUX TAPE PHONO

D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD

VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

ENTER-

TAINMENT

CONCERT

VIDEO 2

CONCERT

VIDEO 1

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

6.1/ES

THEATER

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

++ +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

+–

CHP/INDEX

–– –

FAST FORWARD

REC / PAUSE

REWIND

DECK A / DECK B

DIRECTION A/B

PLAY

STOP

ON SCREEN

LEVEL

SLEEP TEST

PARAMETER

SET MENU

TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR

MACRO

MACROLEARN

OFF ON

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

V-AUX TAPE PHONO

D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD

VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

ENTER-

TAINMENT

CONCERT

VIDEO 2

CONCERT

VIDEO 1

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

6.1/ES

THEATER

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

/DTS

SUR.

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

++ +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

+–

CHP/INDEX

–– –

Setup Section

Power Buttons

Display Window

Program/10Key Section

Others

Source Select

Operation Section

Volume Section

Programming Section

Input Section

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

V-AUX TAPE PHONO

D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD

VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

ENTER-

TAINMENT

CONCERT

VIDEO 2

CONCERT

VIDEO 1

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

6.1/ES

THEATER

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

++ +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

+–

CHP/INDEX

–– –

POWER

(Preset Group) A

(Preset Group) B

(Preset Group) D

(Preset Group) E

PRESET

NUMBER 1~8

(Preset Group)

A/B/C/D/E

(Preset Group) C

PRESET + / –

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

V-AUX TAPE PHONO

D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD

VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

ENTER-

TAINMENT

CONCERT

VIDEO 2

CONCERT

VIDEO 1

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

6.1/ES

THEATER

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

+–

CHP/INDEX

–– –

POWER

STOP

INDEX

DISPLAY

SKIP SEARCH

+10

PLAY

PAUSE (YAMAHA

PAUSE / STOP)

CLEAR

1~9

DISC SKIP

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

V-AUX TAPE PHONO

D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD

VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

ENTER-

TAINMENT

CONCERT

VIDEO 2

CONCERT

VIDEO 1

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

6.1/ES

THEATER

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

++ +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

+–

CHP/INDEX

–– –

POWER

REC PAUSE

DISPLAY

SKIP SEARCH

+10

PLAY

PAUSE

STOP

1~9

Quick Reference Card

■ MD

■ Remote Control

■ TUNER ■ CD

■ TAPE

V483210

Quick Reference Card

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

V-AUX TAPE PHONO

D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD

VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

ENTER-

TAINMENT

CONCERT

VIDEO 2

CONCERT

VIDEO 1

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

6.1/ES

THEATER

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

++ +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E

PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

+–

CHP/INDEX

–– –

POWER

DISPLAY

ENTER

RECALL

1~9

CHANNEL + / –

MENU CURSOR /

ENTER

(*1)

(*2)

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

V-AUX TAPE PHONO

D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD

VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

ENTER-

TAINMENT

CONCERT

VIDEO 2

CONCERT

VIDEO 1

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

6.1/ES

THEATER

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

++ +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E

PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

+–

CHP/INDEX

–– –

POWER

TV / VIDEO

REC

(Press twice)

REWIND /

FAST FORWARD

10 or 0

PLAY

PAUSE

1~9

CHANNEL + / –

STOP

(*1)

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

V-AUX TAPE PHONO

D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD

VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

ENTER-

TAINMENT

CONCERT

VIDEO 2

CONCERT

VIDEO 1

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

6.1/ES

THEATER

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

++ +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E

PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

+–

CHP/INDEX

–– –

POWER

DISPLAY

ENTER

TV INPUT

TV VOLUME

TV MUTE

10 or 0

1~9

(*2)

CHANNEL + / –

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

V-AUX TAPE PHONO

D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD

VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

ENTER-

TAINMENT

CONCERT

VIDEO 2

CONCERT

VIDEO 1

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

6.1/ES

THEATER

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

++ +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E

PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

+–

CHP/INDEX

–– –

POWER

TITLE / INDEX

RETURN

DISPLAY

TITLE

SKIP SEARCH

+10

PLAY

SOUND

MENU CURSOR / ENTER

CLEAR

PAUSE

1~9

DISC SKIP

STOP

(*1)

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

V-AUX TAPE PHONO

D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD

VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

ENTER-

TAINMENT

CONCERT

VIDEO 2

CONCERT

VIDEO 1

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

6.1/ES

THEATER

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

++ +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E

PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

+–

CHP/INDEX

–– –

POWER

CHAPTER / TIME

STOP

DISPLAY

CHAPTER

+10

PLAY

SOUND

CLEAR

PAUSE

1~9

(*1)

■

VCR 1/VCR 2/VCR 3

■ CBSAT■ LD

■ DVD ■ D-TV

V483210

(*1) TV VOL, TV INPUT, TV MUTE function if you have setup the manufacturer code

for the D-TV Area.

(*1) TV VOL, TV INPUT, TV MUTE fonctionnent si vous avez réglé le code du

fabricant pour la zone D-TV.

(*1) TV VOL, TV INPUT und TV MUTE-Funktion, wenn Sie den Herstellercode für

den D-TV-Bereich eingestellt haben.

(*1) TV VOL, TV INPUT och TV MUTE om du har programmerat tillverkarkoden för

D-TV-området.

(*1) Funzioni TV VOL, TV INPUT, TV MUTE se avete impostato il codice del

fabbricante per l’area D-TV.

(*1) Funciones TV VOL, TV INPUT y TV MUTE si ha preparado el código del

fabricante para el área D-TV.

(*1) TV VOL, TV INPUT, TV MUTE functie als u de fabrikantencode voor de D-TV set

heeft ingevoerd.

(*1)ƒp“G–z⁄w‚g‹ D-TV ˇ ‡]'w Dﬁa‰s‰X¡A«h TV VOL¡BTV INPUT¡BTV MUTE

¥¥\ﬂ ¥i¥H¤ˇ¥˛¡C

(*2) You can control your VCR if you have setup the code for VCR 1.

(*2)

Vous pouvez commander votre magnétoscope si vous avez réglé le code pour VCR 1.

(*2) Sie können Ihren Videorecorder steuern, wenn Sie den Code für VCR 1 eingestellt

haben.

(*2) Du kan styra videon om du har programmerat tillverkarkoden för VCR 1.

(*2) Se si è impostato il codice per VCR 1, si può controllare il proprio VCR.

(*2) Podrá controlar su videograbadora si ha preparado el código para VCR 1.

(*2) U kunt uw eigen videorecorder bedienen als u de code voor VCR 1 heeft ingevoerd.

(*2)ƒp“G–z⁄w‚g‹ VCR 1 ‡]'w‰s‰X¡A«h–z¥i¥H––¤ VCR¡C

Transcripción de documentos

UCA RX-V1 Natural Sound AV Receiver Ampli-Tuner Audio-Video MACRO MACRO OFF POWER TRANSMIT RE-NAME STANDBY V-AUX TAPE PHONO D-TV CBL/SAT CLEAR TUNER LEARN MD CD VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD TITLE % ON SYSTEM DIGITAL SURROUND ENTER % SOURCE % DISPLAY SELECT % POWER MENU ! $ REC STOP PAUSE * STANDBY/ON 10KEY DSP PROGRAM 6CH IMPUT EFFECT PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING FM/AM MEMORY TUNING MODE MANL/AUTO FM AUTO/MANL MONO # 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO 1 CONCERT VIDEO 2 TV THEATER 6 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 7 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 8 /DTS SUR. 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX B PLAY HALL 2 1 9 A $ HALL 1 5 EX/ES SOUND – CHAPTER + SEARCH ! / INPUT MODE % VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR SPEAKERS DVD 6CH INPUT DOLBY D I G I T A L % CINEMA DSP NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX-V1 A / B / C / D / E PRESET EDIT PHONES BASS 1 0 TREBLE 1 2 1 2 3 3 4 – 5 5 BALANCE 1 1 2 2 3 3 0 4 4 + – 4 5 5 + 2 0 BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT 1 2 3 4 L 5 3 4 5 R ON OFF REC OUT/ZONE 2 LD D-TV CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 VIDEO AUX DVD MD TAPE TUNER CD PHONO + VIDEO AUX SOURCE/REMOTE S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R TV INPUT TV VOL – + MUTE CH TV MUTE – + VOLUME EFFECT – DISC OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 8 Ventilation – The unit should be situated so that its location or position does not interfere with its proper ventilation. For example, the unit should not be situated on a bed, sofa, rug, or similar surface, that may block the ventilation openings; or placed in a built-in installation, such as a bookcase or cabinet that may impede the flow of air through the ventilation openings. 9 Heat – The unit should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, stoves, or other appliances that produce heat. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. • Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. 1 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the unit is operated. 2 Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference. 3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the unit and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. 4 Follow Instructions – All operating and other instructions should be followed. 5 Water and Moisture – The unit should not be used near water – for example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink, laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool, etc. 6 Carts and Stands – The unit should be used only with a cart or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer. 6A A unit and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the unit and cart combination to overturn. 7 I Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer. 10 Power Sources – The unit should be connected to a power supply only of the type described in the operating instructions or as marked on the unit. 11 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the unit. 12 Cleaning – The unit should be cleaned only as recommended by the manufacturer. 13 Nonuse Periods – The power cord of the unit should be unplugged from the outlet when left unused for a long period of time. 14 Object and Liquid Entry – Care should be taken so that objects do not fall into and liquids are not spilled into the inside of the unit. 15 Damage Requiring Service – The unit should be serviced by qualified service personnel when: A. The power-supply cord or the plug has been damaged; or B. Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the unit; or C. The unit has been exposed to rain; or D. The unit does not appear to operate normally or exhibits a marked change in performance; or E. The unit has been dropped, or the cabinet damaged. 16 Servicing – The user should not attempt to service the unit beyond those means described in the operating instructions. All other servicing should be referred to qualified service personnel. 17 Power Lines – An outdoor antenna should be located away from power lines. 18 Grounding or Polarization – Precautions should be taken so that the grounding or polarization is not defeated. 19 For US customers only: Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna is connected to this unit, be sure the antenna system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. Note to CATV system installer: This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING MAST ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE GROUND CLAMP ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT (NEC SECTION 810–20) ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS (NEC SECTION 810–21) GROUND CLAMPS POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM (NEC ART 250. PART H) NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE FCC INFORMATION (for US customers only) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE : DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT : When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE : This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620. The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. We Want You Listening For A Lifetime YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels. II CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. 1. To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2. Install this unit in a cool, dry, clean place – away from windows, heat sources, sources of excessive vibration, dust, moisture and cold. Avoid sources of humming (transformers, motors). To prevent fire or electrical shock, do not expose the unit to rain or water. 3. Never open the cabinet. If something drops into the set, contact your dealer. 4. Do not use force on switches, controls or connection wires. When moving the unit, first disconnect the power plug and the wires connected to other equipment. Never pull the wires themselves. 5. The openings on the cover assure proper ventilation of the unit. If these openings are obstructed, the temperature inside the unit will rise rapidly. Therefore, avoid placing objects against these openings, and install the unit in a well-ventilated area to prevent fire and damage. 6. The voltage used must be the same as that specified on this unit. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may result in fire or other accidents. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from the use of this unit with a voltage other than that specified. 7. Digital signals generated by this unit may interfere with other equipment such as tuners, receivers and TVs. Move this unit farther away from such equipment if interference is observed. 8. Do not attempt to clean the unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 9. Be sure to read the “Troubleshooting” section regarding common operating errors before concluding that the unit is faulty. 10. When not planning to use this unit for a long period of time (e.g., a vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 11. To prevent lightning damage, disconnect the AC power plug and disconnect the antenna cable when there is an electrical storm. 12. Grounding or polarization – Precautions should be taken so that the grounding or polarization of the unit is not defeated. 13. AC outlet Do not connect audio equipment to the AC outlet on the rear panel if that equipment requires more power than the outlet is rated to provide. III This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below. MODEL: Serial No.: The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference. FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot and fully insert. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “AC3”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished Works.  1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942 and other world-wide patents issued and pending. “DTS”, “DTS Digital Surround” and “DTS ES” are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All Rights Reserved. English Contents Introduction 2 Features ............................................................................................................... 3 Getting Started .................................................................................................... 5 Controls and Functions ....................................................................................... 6 Preparations 12 Speaker System Configurations ........................................................................ 13 Speaker Placement ............................................................................................ 14 Hookups ............................................................................................................ 15 On-Screen Displays (OSD) ............................................................................... 26 Speaker Settings ................................................................................................ 27 Speaker Output Levels ...................................................................................... 27 Basic Operation 30 Basic Playback .................................................................................................. 31 AM/FM Tuner ................................................................................................... 35 Basic Recording ................................................................................................ 39 Advanced Operation 40 SET MENU Items ............................................................................................. 41 Remote Control Features .................................................................................. 54 Adjusting the Levels of the Effect Speakers ..................................................... 67 Setting the Sleep Timer ..................................................................................... 67 ZONE 2 ............................................................................................................. 68 Addtional Information 70 Digital Sound Field Processing (DSP) .............................................................. 71 Hi-Fi DSP-Sound Field Program ...................................................................... 72 CINEMA-DSP .................................................................................................. 73 CINEMA-DSP Sound Field Program ............................................................... 75 Sound Field Program Parameter Editing .......................................................... 77 Digital Sound Field Parameter Descriptions ..................................................... 78 Appendix 82 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................ 83 Reference Chart for the INPUT and OUTPUT Jacks ....................................... 87 CINEMA - EQ Frequency Characteristics ....................................................... 87 Specifications .................................................................................................... 88 1 Introduction Introduction Features 3 Introduction ......................................................................................................... 3 Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital Surround EX .................................................. 3 DTS and DTS ES ................................................................................................ 3 Comparing Surround Technologies .................................................................... 3 Digital Sound Fields (DSP) ................................................................................ 4 Multi-function remote control ............................................................................. 4 Various Input and Output Jacks .......................................................................... 4 Built-in 8-channel power amplifier ..................................................................... 4 Custom installation facility ................................................................................. 4 Getting Started 5 Checking the Package Contents .......................................................................... 5 Installing Batteries in the Remote Control .......................................................... 5 Using the Remote Control .................................................................................. 5 Controls and Functions 6 Front Panel .......................................................................................................... 6 Opening and Closing the Front Panel Door ........................................................ 7 Remote Control ................................................................................................... 8 Front Panel Display ........................................................................................... 10 Rear Panel ......................................................................................................... 11 2 Features English Introduction Welcome to the exciting world of digital home entertainment. The RX-V1 is the most complete and advanced AV receiver available. Though some of the more advanced features of this unit may not be familiar to you, they are easy to use. Incorporated state-of-the-art technology such as Dolby Digital and DTS can bring the same audio experience to your home as they have brought to feature films in quality theaters around the world. To make the listening experience even more enjoyable, the RX-V1 includes a number of exclusive, digitally created listening environments known as digital sound fields. Choosing a sound field program is like transporting yourself to such venues as an outdoor arena, an European church, or a cozy jazz club. Take some time now to read more about these features and enjoy the new experiences the RX-V1 brings to your home theater. Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital Surround EX The RX-V1 is equipped with a Dolby Digital decoder which reproduces industry standard Dolby Digital surround sound for a cinematic audio experience in your home. Dolby Digital is a 5.1 channel format because it uses five discrete channels (left and right Main channels, Center channel, and left and right Rear channels) and a special low frequency channel (that is used only enough to merit the “0.1” channel rating) to create incredibly realistic 360˚ surround effects. Recently, Dolby Digital Surround EX was introduced in movie theaters as an advanced surround technology. The addition of a Rear Center channel makes front-to-back transitions more realistic. You can enjoy the newest Dolby Digital Surround EX software with the CINEMA DSP programs in the RX-V1 such as Dolby Digital/ Matrix 6.1. DTS and DTS ES The RX-V1 is also equipped with a DTS decoder, which uses a 5.1 channel system to create a full surround sound environment. It was developed as a way to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with six channels of digital sound. In comparison with Dolby Digital, DTS uses less compression to store the sound information. The newly presented DTS ES system reproduces digital sound similar to Dolby Digital Surround EX. The use of the Rear Center speaker along with the existing 5.1 channel speakers provides a fully immersive cinematic audio experience. Comparing Surround Technologies To enjoy dynamic feature film sound at home, you should have the appropriate sound reproduction system for your home theater. The traditional standard for home surround systems was called Dolby Surround and consisted of four channels (left and right Main channels, a Center channel, and a Surround channel for effects). The new home theater standard is Dolby Digital and consists of 5.1 channels (left and right Main channels, a Center channel, left and right Rear channels, and an LFE (low frequency effect) channel). The newer DTS surround technology also makes use of a 5.1 channel system. The 6.1 channel system which adds a Rear Center channel to the 5.1 channel configuration is the latest advancement in surround sound technology, and is employed by Dolby Digital Surround EX and DTS ES. L C L R C L R 5.1 channels Left (L) and right (R) Main, Left (L) and right (R) Main, Center (C), and Surround (S) Center (C), left and right Rear channels (RL and RR), and Subwoofer (SW) channels L Reproduction Channel System Dolby Digital and DTS R 4 channels L Dolby Surround (Pro Logic) RR R S S C R SW SW RC RR Dolby Digital Surround EX and DTS ES 6.1 channels Left (L) and right (R) Main, Center (C), left and right Rear (RL and RR), Rear Center (RC), and Subwoofer (SW) channels 3 Introduction Features Digital Sound Fields (DSP) Technological advances in sound reproduction over the last 30 years have enhanced the listening experience with improved clarity, precision, and power. However, something has been missing: the atmosphere and acoustic ambience of the public venue. Our Yamaha engineers have extensively researched the nature of sound acoustics and the way sound reflects inside a room. We sent these engineers to famous theaters and concert halls around the world to measure the acoustics of those venues with sophisticated microphones. The data they collected is used to recreate these environments in digital sound fields. Some of these digital sound fields have been created using data measured at the original venue; others have been created from combinations of data to form unique environments for specific purposes. Some have been designed especially for music, and others especially for movies. Of course, this only solves half of the problem. Because these engineers have no way of knowing the acoustics of your entertainment room, we have made it possible for you to adjust the various parameters of this data to tailor each virtual venue to your taste. You can use these sound fields to enhance any source and in combination with any of the following surround sound technologies. CINEMA-DSP: Dolby Digital + DSP and DTS + DSP The Dolby Digital system and DTS system show their full capability in large movie theaters, because feature film soundtracks are designed to be reproduced in such environments. It is difficult to recreate a sound environment similar to a movie theater in your entertainment room because of the room size, wall materials, and the number of speakers in your entertainment system. Yamaha DSP technology makes it possible for you to enjoy nearly the same sound experience as that of a large movie theater in your entertainment room by compensating for lack of presence and dynamics in your entertainment room with Yamaha’s original digital sound fields combined with Dolby Digital or DTS soundtracks. Virtual CINEMA DSP and HP CINEMA DSP Yamaha developed the Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm which allows you to experience the virtual sound fields without surround speakers. This makes it possible for the RX-V1 to produce a full surround sound catering to the number of speakers you have. The RX-V1 also has an HP (Headphones) CINEMA DSP algorithm which is achieved by the crosstalk processing applying the precise Head Related Transfer Function. You can therefore enjoy listening to the CINEMA DSP soundfields on headphones. Multi-function remote control The remote control can operate other audio-video components once you program the remote control using the manufacturer code and Learn feature. Various Input and Output Jacks The RX-V1 has various output jacks for audio and video signals as well as a digital recording output jack. Many input jacks are also available for connection to multiple audio-video sources. All the video inputs and outputs have S-video jacks in addition to standard composite video jacks for improved video picture quality. Component video input and output jacks are also available to deliver the excellent video signals from DVD players and other high quality video sources. The coaxial and optical digital signal jacks (provided for direct transmission of digital signals) automatically detect Dolby Digital, DTS, and PCM signals. A demodulator circuit is built into the Dolby Digital RF input so you can connect it directly to the Dolby Digital RF signal output on your LD player. Additionally, there are six audio inputs for disscrete multichannel reproduction from an external decoder. The RX-V1 also comes with a monaural subwoofer jack and split subwoofer jacks which can reproduce delicate but powerful low frequency effects. Built-in 8-channel power amplifier Main: 110 W + 110 W (8Ω) RMS Output Power, 0.015% THD, 20-20,000 Hz Center: 110 W (8Ω) RMS Output Power, 0.015% THD, 20-20,000 Hz Rear: 110 W + 110 W (8Ω) RMS Output Power, 0.015% THD, 20-20,000 Hz Front: 35 W + 35 W (8Ω) RMS Output Power, 0.05% THD, 1 kHz Rear Center: 110 W (8Ω) RMS Output Power, 0.015% THD, 20-20,000 Hz Custom installation facility You can make up a multi-room audio-video system with this unit. With this feature, you can set this unit to reproduce separate input sources in the main room and in a second (ZONE 2) room using the supplied remote control in the second room. 4 Getting Started English Checking the Package Contents Check your package to make sure it has the following items. MACRO MACRO OFF POWER TRANSMIT RE-NAME STANDBY V-AUX TAPE PHONO D-TV CBL/SAT CLEAR TUNER LEARN MD CD VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD TITLE % ON SYSTEM DVD ENTER % SOURCE % DISPLAY SELECT % POWER MENU ! $ $ REC STOP PAUSE PLAY HALL 1 HALL 2 # JAZZ CLUB 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO 1 CONCERT VIDEO 2 TV THEATER 6 7 10 11 0 +10 CHP/INDEX Programming Section 8 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 9 FM Antenna Quick Reference Card * CHURCH 1 ROCK CONCERT 5 EX/ES SOUND – CHAPTER + SEARCH ! / 10KEY DSP Alkaline Batteries (3) (LR6) % % 6CH INPUT /DTS SUR. Power Buttons 12 Input Section +100 DISPLAY Display Window A / B / C / D / E PRESET + TV INPUT TV VOL – + + MUTE CH TV MUTE – SKIP SEARCH PLAY PAUSE (YAMAHA : PAUSE / STOP) Operation Section 1~9 PRESET NUMBER 1~8 VOLUME EFFECT SEARCH POWER STOP POWER Source Select – CLEAR (Preset Group) E (Preset Group) D (Preset Group) C +10 0 PRESET + / – DISC SKIP Program/10Key Section DISC INDEX (Preset Group) A (Preset Group) B (Preset Group) A/B/C/D/E Others Volume Section FAST FORWARD REWIND REC / PAUSE Setup Section DECK A / DECK B DISPLAY DIRECTION A/B PLAY STOP SEARCH POWER REC PAUSE AM Loop Antenna SKIP SEARCH PLAY PAUSE STOP 1~9 +10 0 Remote Control Antenna Adapter (U.S.A. and Canada Models only) Quick Reference Guide Installing Batteries in the Remote Control Insert the batteries in the correct direction by aligning the + and – marks on the batteries with the polarity illustrations (+ and –) inside the battery compartment. Change the batteries periodically. Do not use old batteries together with new ones. Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. ■ About Changing Batteries As the batteries wear out, the operating range of the remote control decreases and the TRANSMIT indicator does not flash or its light becomes dim. When you notice any of these conditions, change all of the batteries. Notes: Reset button • If the remote control is without batteries for more than 20 minutes, or if worn out batteries remain in the unit, the contents of the memory may be cleared. If the memory is cleared, insert new batteries and reprogram any functions that may have been cleared. • After you insert new batteries, be sure to push RESET in the battery compartment using a ball point pen or similar object before using the remote control. (This does not clear the contents of the memory.) Using the Remote Control The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on the main unit during operation. When the sensor is covered or there is a large object between the remote control and the main unit, the sensor cannot receive signals. The sensor may not be able to receive signals properly when it is exposed to direct sunlight or a strong artificial light (such as a fluorescent or strobe light). In this case, change the direction of the light or reposition the main unit to avoid direct lighting. ■ About handling the remote control DIGITAL CINEMA DSP NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX-V1 DOLBY D I G I T A L SURROUND VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR Handle the remote control with care. STANDBY/ON INPUT MODE SPEAKERS A PROGRAM B 6CH IMPUT EFFECT PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING FM/AM EDIT PHONES BASS 1 0 TREBLE 1 2 1 2 3 3 4 – 30° 5 5 BALANCE 1 2 1 2 3 3 0 4 4 + – 4 5 30° 5 + 2 0 BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT 1 2 3 4 L 5 3 4 5 R ON OFF REC OUT/ZONE 2 DVD MD TAPE TUNER CD PHONO TUNING MODE MANL/AUTO FM AUTO/MANL MONO VIDEO AUX SOURCE/REMOTE LD D-TV CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 VIDEO AUX MEMORY S VIDEO VIDEO L Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. AUDIO R Approximately 6m (20 feet) Do not drop the remote control. Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of conditions: • high humidity or temperature such as near a heater, stove or bath; or • dusty places; or • in places subject to extremely low temperatures. 5 Controls and Functions Introduction Front Panel DIGITAL CINEMA DSP NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX-V1 DOLBY D I G I T A L SURROUND VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR STANDBY/ON INPUT MODE SPEAKERS A PROGRAM B 6CH IMPUT EFFECT PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING FM/AM EDIT PHONES BASS 1 0 TREBLE 1 2 1 2 3 3 4 – 5 5 BALANCE 1 1 2 2 3 3 0 4 4 + – 4 5 5 + 0 BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT 1 2 2 3 4 L 5 3 4 5 R ON OFF REC OUT/ZONE 2 SOURCE/REMOTE LD D-TV CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 VIDEO AUX DVD MD TAPE TUNER CD PHONO MEMORY TUNING MODE MANL/AUTO FM AUTO/MANL MONO VIDEO AUX S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R PRESET/TUNING ~ STANDBY/ON Ÿ Remote Control Sensor Receives signals from the remote control. ! Front Panel Display Shows information about the operational status of this unit (see page 10). ⁄ INPUT MODE Selects the mode of input for sources that output two or more types of signals to this unit (see page 33). You cannot control the input mode when you select 6CH INPUT as the input source. Selects the input source (DVD, LD, D-TV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, VCR 2, VCR 3, V-AUX, PHONO, CD, TUNER, TAPE, MD) you want to listen to or watch. ¤ VOLUME Controls the output level of all audio channels. This does not affect the REC OUT level. # PHONES Outputs audio signals for private listening using headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals are output to the PREOUT jacks or the speakers. 6 TUNING MODE AUTO/MANL MONO When pushed in (ON), these buttons turn on the set of Main speakers connected to the A and/or B terminals on the rear panel. $ BASS Adjusts the low frequency response for the left and right Main speaker channels. Turn the control to the right to increase the low frequency response and turn the control to the left to decrease the low frequency response. If you increase or decrease the low frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality from the Center, Front Effect, Rear Center, and Rear speakers may not match that of the left and right Main speakers. › PROGRAM / % @ INPUT SELECTOR MEMORY MANL/AUTO FM ‹ SPEAKERS A/B % Turns this unit on (On mode) and off (Standby mode). When you turn on this unit, you will hear a click and there will be a four to five to second delay before this unit can reproduce sound. In Standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power so it can respond to the remote control. FM/AM EDIT Selects the sound field program (see page 34). Selecting a sound field program turns on the effect. % TREBLE Adjusts the high frequency response for the left and right main channels. Turn the control to the right to increase the high frequency response and turn the control to the left to decrease the high frequency response. If you increase or decrease the high frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality from the Center, Front Effect, Rear Center, and Rear speakers may not match that of the left and right Main speakers. Controls and Functions ^ 6CH INPUT fl BALANCE Controls the balance of the sound levels coming from the right and left Main speaker(s). Setting this control to the center position “0” is appropriate for most situations. Inputs audio and video signals from a portable external source such as a video camera. To reproduce source signals from these jacks, select V-AUX as the input source. To direct this source to the VCR 1 output jacks, select VIDEO AUX using REC OUT/ZONE 2. ) PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING / (the colon “:” turns on or off). This button is also used to exchange the places of two preset stations with each other. ‚ FM/AM Switches the reception band between FM and AM. & A/B/C/D/E Selects one of the five preset station groups. ‡ BASS EXTENSION ON/OFF When pushed in (ON), this feature boosts the bass frequency of the left and right main channels by +6 dB (60 Hz) while maintaining overall tonal balance. This boost is useful if you do not use a subwoofer. However, this boost may not be noticeable if the main speakers are set to “SMALL” and the bass output mode is set to “SW.” * PROCESSOR DIRECT ON/OFF _ MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) Enters a station into memory. See “Manually presetting stations” on page 36 for details. Hold down this button for more than three seconds to start automatic preset tuning. See “Automatically presetting stations” on page 37 for details. — TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) Switches the tuning mode between automatic and manual. To select the automatic tuning mode, press this button so that the AUTO TUNING indicator appears in the front panel display (the STEREO indicator also appears if receiving a stereo broadcast). To select the manual tuning mode, press this button so that the AUTO TUNING indicator does not appear. % % When pushed in (ON), BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE, and BASS EXTENSION are bypassed, eliminating any alteration of the original signal. ° PRESET/TUNING · VIDEO AUX % Switches between 6CH INPUT mode and normal input modes. 6CH INPUT mode takes priority over the source selected with INPUT SELECTOR. You cannot use DSP sound field programs while using an external decoder. Selects the source you want to direct to the audio/video recorder and ZONE 2 outputs independent of the source you are listening to in the main room. When set to the SOURCE/ REMOTE position, the input source is directed to all outputs. % Switches the effect speakers (Center, Front Effect, Rear and Rear Center) on and off. If you turn off the output of these speakers using EFFECT, all DTS and Dolby Digital audio signals are directed to the Main left and right channels except for the LFE channel. When DTS or Dolby Digital signals are mixed, the left and right Main channel signal levels may not match. English ( REC OUT/ZONE2 fi EFFECT / Selects preset stations when the colon “:” appears next to the band indication in the display, and selects the tuning frequency when the colon “:” does not appear. Opening and Closing the Front Panel Door When you are not operating the controls behind the front panel door, close the door. 7 Controls and Functions Introduction Remote Control MACRO TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR LEARN MACRO OFF ON SYSTEM Power Buttons Turn the power on and off. Press SYSTEM POWER to turn on the power and STANDBY to turn off (Standby mode) the power to the main unit. POWER STANDBY V-AUX TAPE PHONO D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD Programming Section Provides a selection of programming types you can utilize to conveniently operate your other components. Input Section Selects the input source. Press an input button repeatedly to select the input mode. Display Window Source Select Selects the source component without switching the input. % ENTER % SOURCE % DISPLAY SELECT % POWER MENU Program/10-Key Section ! ! $ $ REC STOP PAUSE PLAY * # JAZZ CLUB Functions as the numeric buttons or DSP program group buttons. HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO 1 CONCERT VIDEO 2 6 7 5 6.1/ES TV THEATER MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 9 TV INPUT 8 11 12 0 +10 +100 – + MUTE CH TV MUTE – + VOLUME EFFECT – DISC Functions vary depending on your components that are set up with the manufacturer code. PARAMETER % 8 SLEEP TEST Volume Section Controls the volume. ON SCREEN LEVEL Sets speaker output levels, SET MENU, DSP parameters, etc. Provides functions such as play, stop, skip, etc. for operating your other components. A / B / C / D / E PRESET TV VOL Setup Section Operation Section /DTS SUR. 10 CHP/INDEX + Others SOUND – CHAPTER + SEARCH / 10KEY DSP % Shows the source component that you select to control. % 6CH INPUT TITLE % SET MENU Controls and Functions Used for clearing functions acquired using the Learn and Rename features, programmed macros, and preset manufacturer codes (see pages 65, 66). ! RE-NAME Used for changing the source name in the display window (see page 65). ⁄ LEARN Used for setting up the manufacturer code or programming the functions of other remote controls (see pages 61, 62). @ MACRO Used to program a series of operations onto a single button (see page 63). ¤ MACRO ON/OFF Turns the macro function on and off. # TRANSMIT Flashes while the remote control is sending signals. ‹ 6CH INPUT Switches to the 6CH INPUT mode when using an external decoder. $ LIGHT Turns the light on or off. When you press this button once, the light turns on for about ten seconds. Press again to turn off the light. › 10KEY/DSP Selects the numeric button (10KEY) mode or DSP mode. You can use the 13 buttons to select numbers or DSP programs directly according to the position of this switch. % DSP program group/Numeric buttons Select DSP programs or numbers according to the position of 10KEY/DSP. (Press a button repeatedly to select a DSP program within that group.) fi A/B/C/D/E Selects one of the five preset station groups. TV operation buttons TV INPUT switches between TV and VCR mode. TV MUTE mutes the TV sound. PRESET +/– selects a preset station. CH +/– selects the next or previous channel. DISC +/– skips to the next or previous disc. & MUTE Mutes the sound. Press again to restore audio output at the previous volume level. ‡ VOLUME +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. * EFFECT Switches the effect speakers (center, front, rear, and rear center) on and off. If the output of these speakers is switched off, all DTS and Dolby Digital audio signals are directed to the main left and right channels except for the LFE channel. ° Cover Slides down to show the setup buttons. ( LEVEL Selects the effect speaker channels (center, front, rear and subwoofer) so you can adjust their level independently. Press this button repeatedly to select the effect speaker channel you want to adjust, then use + or – to adjust the level. · ON SCREEN Selects the On-Screen Display mode for your video monitor. ) SLEEP Timer Sets the Sleep Timer. Press repeatedly to set the amount of time before the main unit is automatically turned off. ‚ TEST Selects the test mode (see page 27). _ PARAMETER/SET MENU Selects the PARAMETER mode or SET MENU mode. You can use the cursor % / / + / – buttons to adjust DSP program parameter values or SET MENU items according to the position of this switch. — Cursor buttons % / % Ÿ CLEAR fl +/– % Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate. English ~ Infrared window /+/– Selects and adjusts DSP program parameters and SET MENU items according to the position of PARAMETER/SET MENU. + RESET Press this button after you exchange batteries or when the remote control stops working properly. (Pressing RESET does not clear acquired functions.) ^ TV VOL +/– Increases or decreases the TV volume level. 9 Controls and Functions Introduction Front Panel Display LD D-TV CBL/SAT VCR 1 STEREO VCR 2 AUTO VCR 3 TUNING V-AUX VIRTUAL DIGITAL PRO LOGIC DSP PCM SPEAKERS A B MEMORY ~ DTS indicator Ÿ VIRTUAL indicator Lights up when using Virtual Cinema DSP (See page 34.) ! Multi-information display Shows the current DSP program and other information when adjusting or changing settings. ⁄ STEREO indicator @ Input source indicator Shows the current input source with the arrow-shaped cursor. PRO LOGIC Light up according to the type of Dolby signals this unit is reproducing. “ DIGITAL” lights up when the built-in Dolby Digital decoder is on. “ PRO LOGIC” lights up when the built-in Dolby Pro Logic Decoder is on. 10 Lights up when you select a digital sound field program. ‹ Headphones indicator Lights up when headphones are connected. $ SPEAKERS A/B indicator Lights up according to which set of main speakers are selected. Both indicators light up when both sets of speakers are selected. › PCM indicator Lights up when the AUTO TUNING indicator is on and the unit is receiving a strong signal for an FM stereo broadcast. DIGITAL and indicators SLEEP # DSP indicator Lights up when the built-in DTS decoder is on. ¤ DVD MD TAPE TUNER CD PHONO Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) digital audio signals. % AUTO TUNING indicator Shows that the Tuner is in automatic tuning mode. fi MEMORY indicator Flashes to show a station can be saved. ^ SLEEP indicator Lights up while the Sleep Timer is on. Controls and Functions ~ RF (AC-3) input jack Connect to the RF output terminal of your LD player. Ÿ Audio equipment jacks Refer to page 16 for hookup information. ! Video equipment jacks Refer to page 18 for hookup information. ⁄ Antenna input terminals Refer to page 25 for hookup information. @ Speaker terminals Refer to page 20 for hookup information. ¤ AC OUTLETS Use these outlets to supply power to your other audio/video equipment. # AC power cord English Rear Panel $ DIGITAL OPTICAL/COAXIAL jacks Refer to page 15 for detailed information. › 6CH INPUT jacks Refer to page 24 for hookup information. % ZONE 2 OUT/VIDEO OUT jacks Refer to page 68 for hookup information. fi REMOTE 1 IN/OUT/REMOTE 2 IN jacks Refer to page 68 for hookup information. ^ RS232C/CTRL OUT +5V terminals These are control expansion terminals for commercial use. Consult your dealer for details. fl PRE OUT/MAIN IN jacks Refer to page 23 for hookup information. Connect to a power outlet. ‹ IMPEDANCE SELECTOR Use this switch to match the amplifier output to your speaker impedance. Turn off the power before you change the setting of this switch (see page 22). 11 Preparations Preparations Speaker System Configurations 13 Eight or Seven Speaker Configuration –Full Cinema DSP– ............................ 13 Six Speaker Configuration –Hi Fi DSP– .......................................................... 13 Five Speaker Configuration –Standard 5.1 Channel– ....................................... 13 Four Speaker Configuration –Minimum Requirement– ................................... 13 Speaker Placement 14 Placing the Main Speakers ................................................................................ 14 Placing the Center Speaker ............................................................................... 14 Placing the Front Effect, Rear and Rear Center Speakers ................................ 14 When You Use a Projection Screen .................................................................. 14 Placing the Subwoofers ..................................................................................... 14 Hookups 15 Connecting to Digital Jacks .............................................................................. 15 About the Video Jacks ...................................................................................... 15 About the RF (AC-3) Signal Input Jack ...................................................... 15 Connecting Audio Components ........................................................................ 16 Connecting Video Components ........................................................................ 18 Connecting Speakers ......................................................................................... 20 Connecting External Amplifiers ....................................................................... 23 Connecting an External Decoder ...................................................................... 24 Connecting Power Supply Cords ...................................................................... 24 Connecting the Antennas .................................................................................. 25 On-Screen Displays (OSD) 26 OSD Modes ....................................................................................................... 26 Selecting the OSD Mode .................................................................................. 26 Speaker Settings 27 Before You Begin ............................................................................................. 27 Speaker Output Levels 27 Dolby Surround Test ......................................................................................... 28 DSP Test ........................................................................................................... 29 12 Speaker System Configurations Rear Rear Speakers Speakers Front Front Effect Effect Speakers Speakers Main Speakers Center Speaker Front FrontSubwoofer Subwoofer RearCenter CenterSpeaker Speaker Rear Rear Subwoofer Subwoofer Rear ■ Eight or Seven Speaker Configuration –Full Cinema DSP– ( ) When you reproduce feature film software, this configuration fullly expresses the powerful and realistic sound qualities of 70 mm multitrack audio. The dialogue is positioned as if it were coming from directly on the screen, the sound effect is positioned slightlly behind the screen, and the soundtrack music is positioned even further behind the screen to express the width and depth of the overall presentation. This configuration makes the most of this unit’s capability. The Rear Center speaker is useful for playback of Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS ES. ■ Six Speaker Configuration –Hi Fi DSP– This configuration is used the most for audio playback with HiFi DSP. It does not position the dialogue sound as well as a seven or eight speaker configuration. However, it creates a dynamic DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor) sound field which adds depth to the sound. For this speaker configuration, change SET MENU item 1A. CENTER SP to “NONE” and 1D. REAR CT SP to “NONE” (see page 41). ■ Five Speaker Configuration –Standard 5.1 Channel– This configuration does not express the height of the sound field as well as the seven or eight speaker configuration. However, it positions the dialogue sound as coming directly from the screen. For this speaker configuration, change SET MENU item 1F. FRNT EFCT SP to “NONE” and 1D. REAR CT SP to “NONE” (see page 41). ■ Four Speaker Configuration –Minimum Requirement– In this configuration, the Center speaker signals and Front Effect speaker signals are directed to the left and right Main speakers. For this speaker configuration, change SET MENU item 1A. CENTER SP to “NONE,” item 1F. FRNT EFCT SP to “NONE,” and item 1D. REAR CT SP to “NONE” (see page 41). 13 English The most complete speaker configuration consists of eight speakers: the left and right Main speakers, a Center speaker, the left and right Rear speakers, the left and right Front Effect speakers, and a Rear Center speaker. If you do not use eight speakers, you can direct the signals for speakers that are not in your system to other speakers in your configuration. A Subwoofer can be used with any of these configurations to produce a fuller sound. Speaker Placement Where you place your speakers has a tremendous effect on how well your system sounds. ■ Placing the Main Speakers TV or Video monitor Main speaker Main speaker Place the left and right Main speakers an equal distance from the main listening position. If you have a TV or video monitor in your system, the distance of each speaker from each side of the TV or video monitor should be the same. ■ Placing the Center Speaker Preparations TV or Video monitor If you have a TV or video monitor in your system, align the front face of the Center speaker with the front face of the monitor. Place the speaker as close to the monitor as possible, such as directly over or under the monitor. If you place the speaker under the monitor, the Front Effect speakers can adjust the height of the sound to correspond with the action on the screen (depending on the listener’s position). If you have a projection screen in your system, place the Center speaker under the screen. Be sure to align the speaker with the center of the screen. Center speaker approx. 1m 0.5~1m (3ft) (1~3ft) 1.5~3m 0.5~1m approx. 1m (5~15ft) (1~3ft) (3ft) ■ Placing the Front Effect, Rear and Rear Center Speakers These speakers should be placed about 0.5~1m (1~3 feet) outside the Main speakers and in the front of the room. They should be turned toward the main listening position. Place the Rear speakers in the back of the room so they face the main listening position. The Rear speakers can be placed farther apart than the Front Effect speakers. The Front Effect and Rear speakers should be placed about 1.8m (6 feet) above the floor. FR FL L C R R RR L RC Once you begin listening to programs, continue to adjust the speaker placement until you obtain a balanced sound from the Main speakers and the Front Effect and Rear speakers. ■ When You Use a Projection Screen Place the speakers as shown in the illustration. The Main speakers should be placed about one-quarter of the way up from the bottom of the screen. 1 L R 1/4 Place the Center speaker in the center and directly under the screen. The Center speaker provides precise dialogue localization. C When you use a projection screen with your system, the Front Effect speakers provide better effect quality. The CINEMA-DSP sound field programs (see page 34) raise the sound from the Center speaker upward and provide natural sound corresponding with the video images. ■ Placing the Subwoofers Place the Front Subwoofer near the Main speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections. If you use a Rear Subwoofer, place it behind the main listening position. The placement of the Rear Subwoofer is not critical because of the ultralow frequencies of the sound being reproduced. By adding a high quality Subwoofer to the speaker configurations shown on pages 21 and 22, you can enjoy more powerful and realistic movie effects, even if your Main speakers are large. Note: Rear speakers Rear Speakers Front Effect speakers Front Effect Speakers Main speakers • If you use different brands of speakers (with different tonal qualities) in your configuration, the tone of a moving human voice and other types of sound may not shift smoothly. We recommend that you use speakers from the same manufacturer or speakers with the same tonal quality. You can also adjust the output levels and equalization of your effect speakers using the SET MENU (see page 41). Center speaker Front Subwoofer Front Subwoofer Rear Center Speaker Rear Center Rear Subwoofer speaker Rear Subwoofer 14 If you are using small speakers, the addition of a Subwoofer will reinforce the sound effects of movies (see page 21). Hookups The RX-V1 has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, DTS and Dolby Digital bitstreams. When you connect components to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks (for CD, DVD, and CBL/SAT) priority is given to the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are acceptable for 96 kHz/24 bit digital signals. ■ About the Dust Protection Cap Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect the fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are not using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in place. This cap protects the jack from dust. About the Video Jacks There are three types of video jacks. Video signals input through the VIDEO jacks are the conventional composite video signals. Video signals input through the S VIDEO jacks are separated into luminance (Y) and color (C) video signals. The S-video signals achieve high quality color reproduction. Video signals input through the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks are separated into luminance (Y) and color difference (PB/CB, PR/CR) video signals. The jacks are also separated into three for each signal. The description of the component video jacks may be different depending on the component (e.g. Y, CB, CR / Y, PB, PR / Y, B-Y, R-Y/ etc.). Component video signals provide the best quality in picture reproduction. Composite VIDEO terminal S VIDEO terminal Note: • Each type of video jack works independently. Signals input through the composite video, S-video, and component jacks are output through the corresponding composite video, S-video, and component jacks respectively. Caution: • Use a commercially available S-video cable when connecting to the S VIDEO jacks, and commercially available video cables when connecting to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. COMPONENT VIDEO terminals Y About the PB/CB PR/CR • When you are using the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks, check the details in the owner’s manual that came with the component being connected. RF (AC-3) Signal Input Jack If your LD player has an RF (AC-3) signal output jack, connect it to the RF (AC-3) input jack on this unit. If RF (AC-3) and analog signals are input at the same time, priority is given to the RF signals. When you want to reproduce RF (AC-3) signals, set the input mode to “D.D. RF” using INPUT MODE. Note: • RF(AC-3) RF (AC-3) signals cannot be output using the REC OUT selector. When you record sound or images from an LD player, be sure to connect the player to either the DIGITAL OPTICAL or analog AUDIO jacks. LD Caution: • Even if you connect an LD player with an RF (AC-3) output jack to this unit, you cannot reproduce Dolby Digital sound from all LD discs. You must playback an LD disc encoded with Dolby Digital signals in order to take advantage of the Dolby Digital sound. 15 English Connecting to Digital Jacks Hookups Connecting Audio Components Before you connect any components, disconnect the power supply to all the components you plan to connect including the RX-V1 and determine which jacks are for the left and right channels and for input and output. When you connect other YAMAHA audio equipment (such as a CD player or changer, MD deck, or tape deck, connect to terminals with the same number labels. Yamaha applies this labelling system to all its products. In the hookup illustrations on the following pages: indicates signal direction, indicates coaxial cables, Preparations C L indicates left side analog cables, R indicates right side analog cables, O indicates optical cables; and, S indicates S-video cables. After you finish all hookups, check them again to make sure they are correct. L ■ Connecting a Turntable Output R Turnable 1 Ground Connect the left and right signal output cords to the PHONO L and R jacks. Note: RF(AC-3) AUDIO PHONO GND AUDIO VIDEO LD CD • These jacks are for connecting a turntable with an MM or high output MC cartridge. If you have a turntable with a low output MC cartridge, use an inline boosting transformer or MC-head amplifier when connecting to these jacks. VIDEO S VIDEO DVD LD CD D-TV DVD Caution: CBL IN CBL • The GND terminal does not electrically ground the turntable. It simply reduces noise in the signal. In some cases, you may hear less noise if you do not connect to the GND terminal. Optical Output ■ Connecting a CD Player Analog Output L CD player 1 R Coaxial Output C RF(AC-3) O GND AUDIO PHONO AUDIO VIDEO VIDEO S VIDEO COMPONEN Y LD DVD A CD LD B D-TV C CD DVD CBL /SAT COAXIAL IN (PLAY) • When you connect a CD player to both the COAXIAL CD and OPTICAL CD jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the COAXIAL CD jack. CBL /SAT TAPE CD OUT IN (REC) VCR 1 IN (PLAY) OUT MD MD OUT (REC) IN OUT IN REMOTE 1 (REC) VCR 2 DVD 16 Notes: • The COAXIAL CD and OPTICAL CD jacks are available for a CD player which has coaxial or optical digital outputs. OPTICAL IN (PLAY) Connect the left and right analog signal output jacks on your CD player to the CD 1 L and R jacks. MAIN OUT OUT • The OPTICAL jacks on this unit conform to the EIA standard. If you use a fiber optic cable that does not conform to this standard, the RX-V1 may not function properly. Hookups ■ Connecting a Tape Deck Analog Output English Analog Input L R Tape Deck L RF(AC-3) R AUDIO PHONO GND AUDIO DVD CD COAXIAL 2 Connect the left and right signal input jacks on your tape deck to the TAPE 4 (REC) L and R jacks. LD CD D-TV DVD CBL /SAT Connect the left and right signal output jacks on your tape deck to the TAPE 3 (PLAY) L and R jacks. VIDEO S VIDEO VIDEO LD 1 CBL /SAT IN (PLAY) Notes: TAPE OPTICAL CD IN OUT • You can monitor audio recordings if you connect a three-head tape deck to the TAPE 3 (PLAY) jacks. (REC) VCR 1 IN (PLAY) IN OUT (PLAY) MD MD OUT (REC) IN OUT • When you connect a tape deck to the RX-V1, keep the deck’s power on while using the RX-V1. If the power is off, the RX-V1 may distort the sound from other equipment. (REC) VCR 2 DVD MAIN OUT IN SURROUND LD • When you record from source equipment connected to the RX-V1 while the RX-V1’s power is off, the recorded sound may be distorted. To avoid this problem, turn on the RX-V1. ■ Connecting an MD or DAT Deck Optical Input Optical Output Analog Input MD or DAT Deck 1 Connect the left and right analog signal output jacks on your MD or DAT deck to the MD 3 (PLAY) L and R jacks. 2 Connect the left and right analog signal input jacks on your MD or DAT deck to the MD 4 (REC) L and R jacks. 3 Connect the optical digital signal output jack on your MD or DAT deck to the OPTICAL MD (PLAY) jack. 4 Connect the optical digital signal input jack on your MD or DAT deck to the OPTICAL MD (REC) jack. L R Analog Output L R RF(AC-3) GND LD CD CD DVD O AUDIO PHONO AUDIO VIDEO VIDEO S VIDEO C DVD A LD B D-TV C O CBL /SAT COAXIAL IN (PLAY) CBL /SAT TAPE OPTICAL CD OUT IN (REC) VCR 1 IN (PLAY) IN (PLAY) Note: OUT MD MD OUT (REC) OUT IN R (REC) VCR 2 DVD MAIN OUT • When you connect your MD or DAT deck to both the analog and digital input and output jacks, priority is given to the digital signals. R 17 Hookups Connecting Video Components Before you connect any components, disconnect the power supply to all the components you plan to connect including the RX-V1 and determine which jacks are for the left and right channels and for input and output. After you finish all hookups, check them again to make sure they are correct. Note: • If you make S-video connections to this unit, it is not necessary to make composite video connections. If both types of connections are made, this unit gives priority to the S-video signal. Optical Output Preparations LD Player O C ■ Connecting an LD Player S-video Output Video Output 1 L RF-Signal Output Analog Audio Output RF(AC-3) AUDIO PHONO GND AUDIO DVD COMPONENT VIDEO Y PB/CB DVD B D-TV D-TV C CBL /SAT CBL /SAT MONITOR OUT TAPE OPTICAL IN OUT PREOUT/MAIN IN (REC) VCR 1 IN IN (PLAY) FRONT OUT (PLAY) MD MD IN OUT (REC) REAR IN OUT VCR 2 MAIN DVD (SURROUND) REMOTE 1 (REC) OUT REMOTE 2 CENTER IN RS232C OUT 6CH INPUT 2 MONO IN IN VCR 3 SUB WOOFER D-TV SUB WOOFER SPLIT OUT SURROUND LD Connect the left and right audio signal output jacks on your LD player to the LD L and R jacks. If your LD player has an RF signal or optical digital signal outputs, you can connect them to this unit. RF (AC-3) Connect the RF signal output jack on your LD player to the LD jack. Connect the optical digital signal output jack on your LD player to the OPTICAL LD jack. PR/CR A (PLAY) CD S LD IN CBL /SAT COAXIAL C DVD CD CD VIDEO S VIDEO VIDEO LD R REAR CTR CENTER OUT Connect the composite video signal output jack on your LD player to the LD VIDEO jack. CENTER CBL /SAT ZONE 2 OUT VIDEO OUT MAIN IN MONITOR OUT 1 CTRL OUT +5V 20mA MONITOR OUT 2 VCR 1 100Ω If your LD player has an S-video output, you can connect it to this unit. Connect the S-video signal output jack on your LD player to the LD S VIDEO jack. MAIN OUT DIGITAL ■ Connecting a TV or Digital TV Analog Audio Output L Optical Output R C Video Output O RF(AC-3) AUDIO PHONO GND AUDIO CD VIDEO S VIDEO VIDEO LD Component Output COMPONENT VIDEO Y PB/CB A DVD LD B D-TV D-TV C CBL /SAT 75Ω UNBAL. FM AN DVD (PLAY) COAXIAL MONITOR OUT TAPE OPTICAL IN OUT CD 2 GN CBL /SAT IN CBL /SAT AM AN If your TV has an S-video output or component video output, you can connect it to this unit. Connect the S-video signal output jack on your TV to the D-TV S VIDEO jack or connect the component signal output jacks on your TV to the D-TV COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. VCR 1 IN FRONT OUT (PLAY) MD MD IN OUT (REC) REAR IN OUT VCR 2 MAIN OUT SUB WOOFER RS232C OUT 6CH INPUT MONO CENTER IN IN IN SURROUND VCR 3 D-TV SUB WOOFER SPLIT OUT REMOTE 2 LD (SURROUND) REMOTE 1 (REC) DVD B REAR CTR CENTER OUT + CENTER CBL /SAT ZONE 2 OUT VIDEO OUT MAIN IN MONITOR OUT 1 – MONITOR OUT 2 VCR 1 100Ω CTRL OUT +5V 20mA MAIN OUT ■ Connecting a Satellite Tuner or Cable TV Tuner (Set Top Box) DIGITAL Analog Audio Output Optical Output O Satellite/Cable TV Tuner Video Output C RF(AC-3) GND AUDIO PHONO CD VIDEO CD DVD CBL /SAT COAXIAL S-video Output Component Output C AUDIO LD VIDEO S VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y PB/CB A DVD LD B D-TV D-TV C G MONITOR OUT TAPE CD IN OUT 75Ω UNBAL. CBL /SAT CBL /SAT IN (PLAY) PREOUT/MAIN IN (REC) 2 VCR 1 IN (PLAY) IN FRONT OUT (PLAY) MD MD OUT (REC) IN REAR IN OUT VCR 2 DVD MAIN OUT SUB WOOFER 6CH INPUT CBL /SAT VCR 1 RS232C OUT CENTER IN B REAR CTR CENTER OUT + CENTER ZONE 2 OUT VIDEO OUT MAIN IN MONITOR OUT 1 – MONITOR OUT 2 100Ω DIGITAL MONO IN IN SURROUND VCR 3 D-TV SUB WOOFER SPLIT OUT REMOTE 2 LD (SURROUND) REMOTE 1 (REC) Connect the left and right audio signal output jacks on your tuner to the CBL/SAT L and R jacks. If your tuner has coaxial or optical digital signal outputs, you can connect them to this unit. Connect the coaxial digital signal output jack on your tuner to the COAXIAL CBL/SAT jack. Connect the optical digital signal output jack on your tuner to the OPTICAL CBL/SAT jack. S PR/CR DVD OPTICAL 18 1 L R Coaxial Output Connect the composite video signal output jack on your TV to the D-TV VIDEO jack. PREOUT/MAIN IN (REC) IN (PLAY) Connect the left and right analog signal output jacks on your TV to the D-TV L and R jacks. If your TV has an optical digital signal output, you can connect it to this unit. Connect the optical digital signal output jack on your TV to the OPTICAL D-TV jack. S PR/CR DVD CD 1 S-video Output Digital TV/ TV CTRL OUT +5V 20mA MAIN OUT Connect the composite video signal output jack on your tuner to the CBL/SAT VIDEO jack. If your tuner has an S-video or component video output, you can connect it to this unit. Connect the S-video signal output jack on your tuner to the CBL/SAT S VIDEO jack or connect the component signal output jacks on your tuner to the CBL/SAT COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. Hookups R Audio Input VCR English ■ Connecting a VCR Video Input L S-video Input R S-video Output L 1 Connect the left and right audio signal output jacks on your VCR to the VCR 1 IN L and R jacks. 2 Connect the left and right audio signal input jacks on your VCR to the VCR 1 OUT L and R jacks. 3 Connect the composite video signal output jack on your VCR to the VCR 1 VIDEO IN jack. Audio Output Video Output C RF(AC-3) AUDIO PHONO GND AUDIO CD CD DVD COMPONENT VIDEO Y PB/CB PR/CR A DVD LD B D-TV D-TV C CBL /SAT (PLAY) MONITOR OUT TAPE OPTICAL IN OUT CD C S DVD CBL /SAT IN CBL /SAT COAXIAL VIDEO S VIDEO VIDEO LD S If your VCR has an S-video input, you can connect it to this unit. Connect the S-video signal output jack on your VCR to the VCR 1 IN S VIDEO jack. PREOUT/MAIN IN (REC) VCR 1 IN IN (PLAY) FRONT OUT (PLAY) MD MD IN OUT (REC) REAR IN OUT (SURROUND) REMOTE 1 (REC) VCR 2 OUT 4 Connect the composite video signal input jack on your VCR to the VCR 1 VIDEO OUT jack. If your VCR has an S-video input, you can connect it to this unit. Connect the S-video signal input jack on your VCR to the VCR 1 OUT S VIDEO jack. Notes: • You can connect other VCRs to the RX-V1 using the VCR 2 and VCR 3 jacks. • If your VCR has an optical digital signal output jack, connect it to the OPTICAL VCR 1 jack of this unit. L ■ Connecting a DVD Player S-video Output R Analog Audio Output Optical Output 1 Component Output DVD player O C Video Output Coaxial Output RF(AC-3) GND AUDIO PHONO AUDIO VIDEO LD CD CD VIDEO S VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y PB/CB C If your DVD player has coaxial or optical digital outputs, you can connect one or both of them to this unit. Connect the coaxial digital signal output jack on your DVD player to the COAXIAL DVD jack. Connect the optical digital signal output jack on your DVD player to the OPTICAL DVD jack. S PR/CR DVD A DVD LD B D-TV D-TV C CBL /SAT 75Ω UNBAL. FM ANT DVD GND CBL /SAT IN CBL /SAT (PLAY) COAXIAL MONITOR OUT TAPE OPTICAL IN OUT CD AM ANT PREOUT/MAIN IN (REC) 2 VCR 1 IN (PLAY) IN FRONT OUT (PLAY) MD MD IN OUT (REC) REAR IN OUT VCR 2 MAIN DVD OUT REMOTE 2 VCR 3 D-TV SUB WOOFER 6CH INPUT CBL /SAT RS232C OUT If your DVD player has an S-video output or component video output, you can connect it to this unit. Connect the S-video signal output jack on your DVD player to the DVD S-VIDEO jack or connect the component signal output jacks on your DVD player to the DVD COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. MONO CENTER IN IN IN B REAR CTR CENTER OUT + CENTER ZONE 2 OUT VIDEO OUT MAIN IN MONITOR OUT 1 – MONITOR OUT 2 VCR 1 100Ω CTRL OUT +5V 20mA MAIN OUT DIGITAL D-TV DVD (PLAY) MONITOR OUT TAPE OPTICAL IN OUT CD ■ Connecting a Video Monitor CBL /SAT C CBL /SAT IN CBL /SAT COAXIAL PREOUT/MAIN IN (REC) VCR 1 IN IN (PLAY) FRONT OUT (PLAY) MD MD IN OUT (REC) REAR IN OUT VCR 2 MAIN DVD OUT REMOTE 2 VCR 3 SUB WOOFER D-TV 6CH INPUT CBL /SAT MONO CENTER IN IN IN RS232C OUT REAR CTR CENTER OUT CENTER ZONE 2 OUT VIDEO OUT MAIN IN MONITOR OUT 1 MONITOR OUT 2 VCR 1 100Ω CTRL OUT +5V 20mA 1 Connect the composite video signal input jack on your monitor to MONITOR OUT 1 VIDEO jack. SUB WOOFER SPLIT OUT SURROUND LD (SURROUND) REMOTE 1 (REC) Connect the composite video signal output jack on your DVD player to the DVD VIDEO jack. SUB WOOFER SPLIT OUT SURROUND LD (SURROUND) REMOTE 1 (REC) Connect the left and right analog signal output jacks on your DVD player to the DVD L and R jacks. MAIN OUT DIGITAL If your video monitor has an S-video input, you can connect it to this unit. Connect the S-video signal input jack on your video monitor to the MONITOR OUT 1 S-VIDEO jack. If your video monitor has component video signal inputs, you can connect them to the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks. S C Note: Video Input Video Monitor S-video Input • You can connect another monitor to this unit using the MONITOR OUT 2 jacks. Component Input 19 Hookups Connecting Speakers This section explains how to connect speakers to the RX-V1. After you finish connecting your speakers, use the SET MENU to change the signal output settings according to the number and size of the speakers in your configuration. ■ Using Speaker Cords Preparations A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. One of the cables is colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge. To make sure you always connect speakers with the correct polarity, determine the difference between the cables of your speaker cord, make a note of which cable you plan to use for which polarity (+ and –), and always connect the speaker cords consistently. BANANA PLUG 1 Strip off 9 mm (3/8 in.) of an inch of insulation from the ends of the cables. 2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. 3 Loosen the terminal knob by turning it counterclockwise. 4 Insert only the exposed portion of the cable into the slot in the side of the terminal, and tighten the terminal knob. Note: • If your speaker cords have banana plugs, tighten the terminal knob and insert the plug into the end of the terminal. Caution: • Connect the speaker cords with care to avoid creating a short circuit. If you turn on the power and there is a short circuit, this unit may be damaged even though the protection circuit automatically shuts off the power. Right Main Speaker A Left Main Speaker A ■ Connecting the Main Speakers Before connecting any speaker cords, identify which terminals are for the right and left channels and also the + and – polarities. If you connect speakers with the wrong polarity (+ to –), the RX-V1 will not reproduce clear sound. Connect the + and – terminals of your right and left Main speakers to the L and R MAIN + and – terminals on this unit. B MAIN A + + + – – – Right Main Speaker B Left Main Speaker B Center Speaker ■ Connecting the Center Speaker SPEAKERS FRONT + + – – REAR 20 + + – – + + – – CENTER REAR CENTER Connect the + terminal of your Center speaker to the CENTER + terminal and the – terminal of your Center speaker to the CENTER – terminal. Hookups ■ Connecting the Front Effect Speakers English Left Front Effect Speaker Right Front Effect Speaker Connect the + and – terminals of your right and left Front Effect speakers to the L and R FRONT + and – terminals on this unit. SPEAKERS FRONT + + – – REAR + + – – + + – – CENTER REAR CENTER ■ Connecting the Rear and Rear Center Speakers SPEAKERS FRONT + + – – 1 Connect the + and – terminals of your right and left Rear speakers to the L and R REAR + and – terminals on this unit. 2 Connect the + terminal of your Rear Center speaker to the REAR CENTER + terminal and the – terminal of your Rear Center speaker to REAR CENTER – terminal. REAR + + – – + + – – CENTER REAR CENTER Right Rear Speaker Left Rear Speaker Rear Center Speaker Subwoofer system ■ Connecting a Front Subwoofer Connect the signal input jack on your subwoofer to the PRE OUT/ MAIN IN SUBWOOFER MONO jack. By connecting two Subwoofers to the SUBWOOFER SPLIT jacks, this unit can reproduce subtle directional changes in the low frequency sounds. When you use two Subwoofers, connect both of them to the SUBWOOFER SPLIT jacks using pin plugs. PREOUT/MAIN IN FRONT IN REAR (SURROUND) REMOTE 1 OUT REMOTE 2 MONO CENTER IN IN RB2320 Right Subwoofer system RS 232C 100Ω CTRL OUT +5V 20mA Caution: SUB WOOFER SPLIT REAR CTR CENTER OUT MAIN IN MAIN OUT Left Subwoofer system • The SUBWOOFER jacks (output) have a built-in high cut-off filter (90 Hz). When using a powered subwoofer, set the high cut-off frequency to “MAX” on your Subwoofer. 21 Hookups Right Rear Speaker Left Rear Speaker ■ Connecting a Rear Subwoofer By using both Front and Rear Subwoofers, the CINEMA-DSP sound field programs can produce realistic movie effects with powerful, dynamic sound. To take advantage of this dynamic sound, be sure to set the 1C. REAR L/R SP item in the SET MENU to “LARGE” (see page 41), and connect your Rear speakers and Subwoofer as shown below. SPEAKERS 1 Connect the right + input terminal on your Subwoofer to the REAR R + terminal, and the right – input terminal on your Subwoofer to the REAR R – terminal with speaker cords. 2 Connect the left + input terminal on your Subwoofer to the REAR L + terminal, and the left – input terminal on your Subwoofer to the REAR L – terminal with speaker cords. 3 Connect your Rear speakers to the output terminals on the Rear Subwoofer. FRONT + + – – Preparations REAR + + – – + + – – CENTER REAR CENTER Subwoofer system Be sure to connect the Rear speakers to the Subwoofer with the correct polarity. Note: • Adjust the speaker volume for the Subwoofer with the controls on the Subwoofers, not on the RX-V1. ■ Impedance Selector switch Select the position whose requirements your speaker system meets. (Upper position) WARNING Do not change the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch setting while the power to this unit is on, otherwise this unit may be damaged. IF THIS UNIT FAILS TO TURN ON WHEN THE STANDBY/ON SWITCH IS PRESSED: The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may not be set to either end. If so, set the switch to either end when this unit is in the standby mode. IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SET BEFORE POWER ON FRONT REAR REAR CENTER CENTER MAIN A OR B A+B FRONT REAR REAR CENTER CENTER MAIN A OR B A+B VOLTAGE SELECTOR 22 Front Effect: The impedance of each speaker must be 6Ω or higher. Rear: The impedance of each speaker must be 4Ω or higher. Rear Center: The impedance of the speaker must be 4Ω or higher. Center: The impedance of the speaker must be 4Ω or higher. Main: If you use one pair of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 4Ω or higher. If you use two pairs of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 8Ω or higher. (Lower position) Front Effect: The impedance of each speaker must be 8Ω or higher. Rear: The impedance of each speaker must be 8Ω or higher. Rear Center: The impedance of the speaker must be 8Ω or higher. Center: The impedance of the speaker must be 8Ω or higher. Main: <Except Canada model> If you use one pair of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 8Ω or higher. If you use two pairs of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 16Ω or higher. <For Canada model only> The impedance of each speaker must be 8Ω or higher. Hookups English Connecting External Amplifiers If you want to increase the power output to the speakers, or want to use another amplifier, connect an external amplifier to the PRE OUT/ MAIN IN terminals as follows. PREOUT/MAIN IN FRONT REAR (SURROUND) SUB WOOFER SPLIT MONO CENTER IN REAR CTR CENTER OUT MAIN IN MAIN OUT ~ MAIN jacks MAIN OUT jack ....... Main channel line output jacks. The signals output through these jacks are affected by BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE, and BASS EXTENSION settings. MAIN IN jacks .......... Line input to the RX-V1 Main channel amplifiers. Ÿ CENTER jacks CENTER OUT jack . Center channel line output jacks. CENTER IN jack ..... Line input to the RX-V1 Center channel amplifier. ! REAR CT jack ⁄ SUBWOOFER jacks Subwoofers reinforce very low frequencies. MONO .................... Main, Center and Rear channel frequencies below 90 Hz are output through this jack. You can also direct DTS and Dolby Digital LFE signals to this output. SPLIT ..................... The SPLIT jacks output stereo separation for the Main and Rear channels and a split mono signal for the Center and LFE channels. Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on the subwoofer. Subwoofer volume cannot be adjusted from this unit. Depending on the settings in SET MENU items 1. SPEAKER SET, 3A. LFE LEVEL and 4A. LFE LEVEL, some signals may not be output from the SUBWOOFER jacks. Rear Center channel line output jack. @ FRONT Front Effect channel line output jacks. ¤ REAR (SURROUND) Rear channel line output jacks. Note: • When RCA pin plugs are connected to the PRE OUT/MAIN IN output jacks for output to external amplifiers, the corresponding internal amplifiers will be muted. 23 Hookups Connecting an External Decoder The RX-V1 is equipped with six additional input jacks (left and right MAIN, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from an external decoder, sound processor, or pre-amplifier. Connect the output jacks on your external decoder to the 6CH INPUT jacks. DVD LD D-TV MAIN Be sure to match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the main and surround channels. To listen to the sound from your external decoder, press 6CH INPUT on this unit or the remote control. SURROUND SUB WOOFER 6CH INPUT CBL /SAT CENTER ZONE 2 OUT VIDEO OUT Preparations VCR 1 Note: DIGITAL L R C C Subwoofer Output L R • When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot listen to DSP programs. Center Output External Decoder Surround Output Main Output Connecting Power Supply Cords ■ Connecting the AC Power Cord IMPEDANCE SELECTOR AC Power Cord After completing all connections, plug the AC power cord into a convenient AC outlet. ■ AC OUTLETS AC OUTLETS AC OUTLETS 24 Use these to connect the power cords from your other components to this unit. The power to the switched outlets is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER ON or STANDBY on the remote). These outlets will supply power to any connected unit whenever this unit is turned on. The maximum power (total power consumption of components) that can be connected to AC OUTLETS is 100 W (U.S.A. and Canada model) or 120 W (Australia model). Hookups English Connecting the Antennas Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. These antennas should provide sufficient signal strength in most situations. However, a properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception. If you experience poor reception quality using the indoor antennas, an outdoor antenna may improve the reception. Connect each antenna as shown below. Indoor FM antenna (included) ■ Connecting the indoor FM antenna Connect the included indoor antenna to the 75Ω UNBAL. FM ANT terminal. Outdoor FM antenna T VIDEO B/CB SPEAKERS PR/CR FRONT DVD 75Ω coaxial cable 75Ω UNBAL. + + D-TV FM ANT CBL /SAT Antenna adapter to match with F-type connector (included for U.S.A. and Canada Models) GND MONITOR OUT – – REAR + + – – AM ANT PREOUT/MAIN IN AM loop antenna (included) FRONT + REAR + (SURROUND) 75Ω/300Ω antenna adapter or SUB WOOFER SPLIT – CENTER CENTER IN 300Ω ribbon cable – MONO REAR CENTER B MAIN A + + + – – – REAR CTR CENTER OUT MAIN IN ■ Optional outdoor FM antenna MAIN OUT Consult your dealer or authorized service center about the best method of selecting and erecting an outdoor FM antenna. Ground ■ Optional outdoor AM antenna If this unit is in a steel building or at a great distance from the transmitter, it may be necessary to install an outdoor AM antenna. ■ Connecting the AM loop antenna 2 1 1 Press the tab to unlock the terminal hole. 3 2 Insert the AM loop antenna lead wires to the AM ANT and GND terminals. 3 Lift the tab to its original position to lock the lead wires. Lightly pull on the lead wires to confirm a good connection. Loop Antenna 4 Attach the loop antenna to the antenna stand. 5 Orient the AM loop antenna so that the best reception is obtained. Notes: • The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. The antenna may be hung on a wall. • The AM loop antenna should remain connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. Antenna stand • To minimize the influence of automobile ignition noise, locate the antenna as far from heavy traffic as possible. • Keep the ribbon cable or coaxial cable as short as possible. Do not bundle or roll up excess cable. • The antenna should be at least 1.8m (6 feet) from reinforced concrete walls and metallic structures. 25 On-Screen Displays (OSD) You can display the operation information for this unit on a video monitor. If you display the SET MENU and DSP sound field program parameter settings on a screen, it is much easier to see the available options and parameters than it is by reading this information on the front panel display. If a video source is being reproduced, the OSD is superimposed over the image. If a video source is not being reproduced (or the power of the source equipment is off), the OSD is shown on a blue background. OSD Modes You can change the amount of information the OSD shows. Full Display ............... This mode always shows the sound field program parameter settings on the video monitor (see page 77). Preparations Short Display ............. This mode briefly shows the same contents as the front panel display at the bottom of the screen, then disappears. Display Off ................ This mode briefly shows the “DISPLAY OFF” message at the bottom of the screen, then disappears. Afterwards, no changes to operations appear on the screen except those of the ON SCREEN. Full Display Notes: • When you choose the Full Display mode, INPUT SELECTOR, VOLUME and some other types of operation information are displayed at the bottom of the screen in the same format as the front panel display. • The OSD signal is not output through the REC OUT Selector, and will not be recorded with any video signal. • The SET MENU, TEST DOLBY SUR and TEST DSP appear regardless of the OSD mode. Short Display Selecting the OSD Mode 1 When you turn on the power, the video monitor and front panel display shows the level of the main volume for a few seconds and then switches to show the current sound field program. 2 Press ON SCREEN on the remote control repeatedly to change the display mode. PARAMETER ON SCREEN LEVEL ON SCREEN SET MENU SLEEP TEST The OSD mode changes in the following order: Full Display, Short Display, and Display Off. Caution: • If you choose a video input source that has equipment connected to both the S VIDEO IN and composite VIDEO IN jacks, and both the S VIDEO OUT and composite VIDEO OUT jacks are connected to a video monitor, the video signal is output to both the S VIDEO OUT and VIDEO OUT jacks. However, the OSD is carried only on the S-video signal. If no video signal is input, the OSD is carried on both the S-video and composite video signals. • If your video monitor is connected only to the COMPONENT VIDEO terminals of this unit, the OSD is not shown. Make sure to connect your video monitor to the COMPONENT VIDEO terminal and either VIDEO or S VIDEO terminals if you would like to see the OSD. • Playing back video software that has an anti-copy signal or video signals with a lot of noise may produce unstable images. 26 Speaker Settings English The RX-V1 has seven SPEAKER SET items in the SET MENU that you must set according to the number of speakers in your configuration and their size. The following table summarizes these SPEAKER SET items, and shows the initial settings as well as other possible settings. If the initial settings are not appropriate for your speaker configuration, change the settings in the SET MENU (see page 41). Summary of SPEAKER SET items 1A through 1G. Item Description Initial Setting 1A. CENTER SP Selects the Center channel output mode according to the size of the Center speaker. The possible settings are LRG (large), SML (small) and NONE. LRG 1B. MAIN SP Selects the Main channel output mode according to the size of the Main speakers. The possible settings are LARGE and SMALL. LARGE 1C. REAR L/R SP Selects the Rear channel output mode according to the size of the Rear speakers. The possible settings are LRG (large), SML (small) and NONE. LRG 1D. REAR CT SP Selects the Rear center channel output according to the size of the Rear Center speaker. The possible settings are LRG (large), SML (small) and NONE. LRG 1E. LFE/BASS OUT Selects a speaker for the LFE/Bass signal output. The possible settings are SW (subwoofer), MAIN, and BOTH. BOTH 1F. FRNT EFCT SP Selects the Front Effect signal output mode for the Front Effect signals. The possible settings are YES and NONE. YES 1G. MAIN LEVEL Selects the output level for the Main channel signal. The possible settings are Normal and –10 dB. Normal Speaker Output Levels This section explains how to set the speaker output levels using the test tone generator. The Dolby Surround test is for balancing the output levels of the six speakers required for surround sound systems. The DSP test is for balancing the Front Effect speakers with the Main speakers for the DSP sound field programs. Before You Begin BASS 1 0 TREBLE 1 2 1 2 3 3 4 – 5 5 0 BALANCE 1 2 1 2 3 3 4 4 + – 4 5 5 + 2 0 1 4 L 5 1 Set BASS, TREBLE and BALANCE on the front panel to “0” (the center position) and turn off BASS EXTENSION. 2 Sit in the main listening position and set PARAMETER/SET MENU on the remote control to PARAMETER. 3 Set 10KEY/DSP on the remote control to DSP and press SUR. 4 Press TEST on the remote control once or twice to select the test you want. 2 3 3 4 5 R PARAMETER SET MENU / DTS 10KEY DSP • Select “TEST DOLBY SUR.” to match the output levels of the Center, Rear Center and left and right Rear speakers to the left and right Main speakers. • Select “TEST DSP” to match the output levels of the Front Effect speakers to the Main speakers. 27 Speaker Output Levels Dolby Surround Test Use the Dolby Surround Test to balance the output levels of speakers required for surround sound systems. 1 Press TEST on the remote control so “TEST DOLBY SUR.” appears on the video monitor and front panel display. 2 Adjust VOLUME +/– so you can hear the test tone. Preparations TEST L C • The test tone is produced from the left Main speaker, Center speaker, right Main speaker, right Rear speaker, Rear Center speaker and left Rear speaker in order. The tone is produced for 2.5 seconds each time. R • You can stop the sequence temporarily by pressing % or L R RC % FL FR . RR 3 Adjust the output level of the effect speakers using the cursor – or + buttons on the remote control so the output level coming from each speaker is the same. • You can increase the output levels of the effect channels (left Rear, right Rear, Rear Center and Center) to +10 dB. If the output level of the Center, Rear, and Rear Center speakers is lower than that from the Main speakers even after you have increased the sound volume level of the Center, Rear, and Rear Center speakers up to +10 dB, set the 1G. MAIN LEVEL item in the SET MENU to “–10dB.” Setting the 1G. MAIN LEVEL item to this setting decreases the Main speaker volume level to about one-third the normal level. After you set the 1G. MAIN LEVEL item in the SET MENU to “–10dB,” adjust the levels for the Center, Rear, and Rear Center speakers again. 4 When you finish adjusting the output level of the Center, Rear, and Rear Center speakers, press TEST repeatedly until the current DSP program appears. Note: • The tonal quality of the speakers can be adjusted using the 7. CENTER GEQ, 8. REAR CT GEQ, and 9. CINEMA EQ items in the SET MENU (see page 49~50). 28 Speaker Output Levels English DSP Test Adjust the output level of the Front Effect speakers while this unit is reproducing a DSP sound field program. If you do not use Front Effect speakers, set the 1F. FRNT EFCT SP item in the SET MENU to “NONE” (see page 41), and the DSP Front Effect signals will be mixed with the Main channel signals. TEST FR C R L RC 2 Adjust VOLUME so you can hear the test tone. • The test tone is produced alternately from the Front Effect speakers and Main speakers. The tone is produced for 2.5 seconds each time. R RR 3 Adjust the output level of the Front Effect speakers using + and – so the output level coming from the Front Effect speakers is the same as that of the Main speakers. • The test tone is automatically produced from the Front Effect speakers while you are adjusting the level. 4 When you finish adjusting the output level of the Front Effect speakers, press TEST repeatedly until the current DSP program appears. Notes: • If you cannot hear the test tone, set VOLUME, turn off the power, and check the speaker cords and hookups. • The test tone can be reproduced separately from the left and right Front Effect speakers. This is useful when you want to check the hookups to these speakers. to reproduce Press % to reproduce the test tone from the left speaker, and press the tone from the right speaker. (The OSD shows which speaker is reproducing the tone.) • You cannot adjust the output level of the left and right Front Effect speakers separately. • You can stop the test tone’s alternation temporarily by pressing % or % L Press TEST repeatedly until “TEST DSP” appears on the video monitor and front panel display. % FL 1 . • The tonal quality of the speakers can be adjusted using the 7. CENTER GEQ, 8. REAR CT GEQ, and 9. CINEMA EQ items in the SET MENU (see page 49~50). • If the sound volume of the Front Effect speakers is lower than that of the Main speakers, even after you have increased the output level up to +10 dB, set the 1G. MAIN LEVEL item in the SET MENU to “–10dB.” Setting the 1G. MAIN LEVEL item to “–10dB” decreases the Main speaker output level to about one-third of the normal level. After you set the 1G. MAIN LEVEL item in the SET MENU to “–10dB,” repeat the TEST DOLBY SUR. procedure on the previous page. 29 Basic Operation Basic Operation Basic Playback 31 Power Control ................................................................................................... 31 Selecting a Source ............................................................................................. 32 Input Modes and Indications ............................................................................. 33 Selecting a Sound Field Program ...................................................................... 34 AM/FM Tuner 35 Manual Tuning .................................................................................................. 35 Automatic Tuning ............................................................................................. 35 Presetting Stations ............................................................................................. 36 Tuning to Preset Stations .................................................................................. 38 Exchanging Preset Stations ............................................................................... 38 Basic Recording 39 Preparations ....................................................................................................... 39 30 Basic Playback English MACRO TRANSMIT RE-NAME STANDBY CLEAR LEARN MACRO OFF ON SYSTEM POWER STANDBY V-AUX TAPE PHONO D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD SYSTEM POWER Input buttons STANDBY/ON STANDBY/ON EFFECT EFFECT INPUT INPUTSELECTOR SELECTOR VOLUME VOLUME INPUT MODE INPUT MODE DIGITAL CINEMA DSP NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX-V1 DOLBY D I G I T A L SURROUND % ENTER % SOURCE % DISPLAY SELECT % POWER VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR % TITLE % 6CH INPUT MENU STANDBY/ON SOUND INPUT MODE – CHAPTER + SEARCH ! ! $ $ REC STOP PAUSE PLAY * # / SPEAKERS A PROGRAM B 6CH IMPUT EFFECT PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING FM/AM EDIT PHONES BASS 1 10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 0 TREBLE 1 2 1 2 3 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO 1 6 7 5 6.1/ES TV THEATER 5 5 1 2 1 2 3 3 0 4 4 + – 4 5 5 + 2 BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT 1 2 3 4 L 5 3 4 5 R ON OFF REC OUT/ZONE 2 LD D-TV CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 VIDEO AUX DVD MD TAPE TUNER CD PHONO MEMORY TUNING MODE MANL/AUTO FM AUTO/MANL MONO VIDEO AUX SOURCE/REMOTE S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R 8 /DTS SUR. 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX – 0 CONCERT VIDEO 2 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 9 3 4 BALANCE A / B / C / D / E PRESET + TV INPUT TV VOL – + TV MUTE – + MUTE CH VOLUME EFFECT VOLUME – EFFECT DISC Power Control 1 SYSTEM POWER STANDBY STANDBY/ON Press STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER on the remote control) to turn on the power. • The front panel (and the monitor screen) shows the level of the volume for a few seconds and then switches to show the current sound field program. SYSTEM POWER STANDBY/ON STANDBY 2 Press STANDBY/ON (or STANDBY on the remote control) to turn off the power. Note: • This unit stores its current operational status in memory before the power is turned off. By connecting a commercially available timer to this unit, you can easily playback or record a source at any time you wish. 31 Basic Playback Selecting a Source INPUT SELECTOR V-AUX TAPE PHONO D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD 1 Select the source using INPUT SELECTOR, or press one of the input buttons on the remote control. • The current source is indicated on the front panel display with an arrow. • The current source name and input mode appear on the front panel display and the video monitor for a few seconds. The selected source DVD MD TAPE TUNER CD PHONO Basic Operation LD D-TV CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 V-AUX 2 Select this source: To reproduce the signal from this equipment. DVD .................................. LD ...................................... D-TV .................................. CBL/SAT ........................... VCR 1 ................................ VCR 2 ................................ VCR 3 ................................ V-AUX .............................. PHONO ............................. CD ...................................... TUNER .............................. TAPE ................................. MD ..................................... DVD player LD player Digital TV or TV Cable TV or Satellite tuner Video deck 1 Video deck 2 Video deck 3 Other A/V equipment Turntable CD player AM/FM tuner TAPE deck MD recorder Start playback (or select a broadcast station) on the source equipment. • Refer to the operation instructions for the equipment. VOLUME 3 + VOLUME – Adjust VOLUME (or VOLUME +/– on the remote control). Caution: • If the power of the equipment connected to the VCR 1, VCR 2, VCR 3, TAPE, and MD OUT jacks is turned off, reproduced sound may be distorted or the volume may be lowered. In these cases, turn on the equipment. ■ BGV (Back Ground Video) Function The BGV (Back Ground Video) function allows you to combine a video signal from a video source with a sound signal from an audio source. (For example, you can listen to classical music while you are watching a video.) Using the remote control, select a source from the video group, then select a source from the audio group. Use the input buttons on the remote control to make your selections. The BGV function does not work if you select the sources using INPUT SELECTOR on the front panel. 32 Basic Playback English Input Modes and Indications The RX-V1 comes with various input jacks. If your external component is connected to more than one type of input jack, you can set the priority of the input signal. Press INPUT MODE on the front panel or an input button (press it repeatedly) on the remote control to display or change the input mode. AUTO AUTO: ................. This mode is automatically selected when you turn on the power of this unit. In this mode, the input signal is automatically selected in the following order. 1) Dolby Digital or DTS encoded signals 2) Digital (PCM) signals 3) Analog signals DTS: ..................... In this mode, only digital input signals encoded with DTS are selected even if other signals are input at the same time. ANALOG: ........... In this mode, only analog input signals are selected even if digital signals are input at the same time. <When LD is selected as the input source> Dolby Digital RF AUTO: ................. In this mode, this unit automatically selects the signal in the following order. 1) Dolby Digital RF encoded signals 2) DTS encoded signals 3) Digital (PCM) signals 4) Analog signals DTS D.D. RF: ............... This unit only selects Dolby Digital RF encoded signals. DTS: ..................... This unit only selects DTS encoded signals. DGTL: .................. This unit only selects digital (PCM) signals input through the OPTICAL jacks. DIGITAL ANALOG: ........... This unit only selects signals input through the ANALOG jacks. This unit will not select Dolby Digital RF or DTS signals. Notes: • For CD, DVD, and CBL/SAT sources, if digital signals are input from both the OPTICAL and COAXIAL terminals, the digital signal from the COAXIAL terminal is selected. • When the “AUTO” mode is selected, the RX-V1 automatically determines the type of signal. If the RX-V1 detects a DTS or Dolby Digital signal, the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate setting and reproduces 5.1 channel sound. • When you use functions such as pause, search, or disc change while playing a disc encoded with DTS signals, the DTS indicator flashes until the next playback starts. ANALOG • If you play a disc encoded with DTS signals and the input mode is set to “ANALOG”, this unit reproduces the noise of an unprocessed DTS signal. When you want to play a DTS source, be sure to connect the source to a digital input jack and set the input mode to “AUTO” or “DTS. ” • If you switch the input mode to “ANALOG” while playing a disc encoded with DTS signals, this unit reproduces no sound. • For LD software that does not contain a digital soundtrack, connect the LD player to the analog jacks and set the input mode to “AUTO” or “ANALOG.” • The input mode resets to “AUTO” after you turn off the power. When the current input source is D-TV, CBL/SAT, and VCR 1, the input mode resets to the one set using the 15. INPUT MODE item in the SET MENU after you turn off the power (see page 52). • If the LD player is transmitting signals in a non-standard method, the RX-V1 cannot detect the DTS or Dolby Digital signal. In this case, the decoder automatically switches to PCM or analog. • Some audio/video equipment, such as LD players, output different audio signals through their analog and digital jacks. Change the input mode as necessary. 33 Basic Playback Selecting a Sound Field Program You can enhance your listening experience by selecting a DSP sound field program. The 24 DSP sound field programs are divided into 12 DSP program groups. For details about each program, see pages 71~76. 2 Press one of the DSP program group buttons (or PROGRAM or on the main unit) repeatedly until the DSP program you want appears in the front panel display. % Set 10KEY/DSP to DSP. 10KEY/DSP % 1 • For example, to select “Live Concert,” press HALL 2 repeatedly. You can also select sound field programs within the current group by setting PARAMETER/SET MENU to the PARAMETER position and pressing the cursor + or – button. Notes: • If a DTS or Dolby Digital signal is input when the input mode is set to “AUTO”, the sound field program automatically switches to the appropriate decoding program. • Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not on the name of the program. The acoustics of your listening room affect the sound field program. Minimize the sound reflections in your room to maximize the effect created by the program. Basic Operation 6.1/ES If you want to utilize the Rear Center speaker with a 5.1 channel program source, press 6.1/ES. However, note that to achieve the proper effect with the rear center channel, Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS ES software should be used. • When you select an input source, the main unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with that source. • When you turn off the main unit, the current source and sound field program are memorized and are automatically selected when you turn on the power again. • When high rate 96kHz sampling 24 bit digital signals are output from source equipment, the DSP sound field cannot operate on the source sounds. In this case, the sounds are reproduced as normal 2-channel stereo. Hi-Fi DSP Programs 1 Europe Hall A Europe Hall B Europe Hall C 2 U.S.A. Hall D Europe Hall E Live Concert Church Jazz Club Rock Concert Entertainment Tokyo Village Gate Roxy Theatre Disco Freiburg Village Vanguard Warehouse Loft Party Royaumont The Bottom Line Arena Game/Amusement CINEMA-DSP Programs Concert Video 1 Concert Video 2 TV Theater Movie Theater 1 Movie Theater 2 Pop/Rock Classical/Opera Mono Movie Spectacle Adventure DJ Pavilion Variety/Sports Sci-Fi General /DTS SURROUND Normal/Matrix 6.1/ES Enhanced/6.1/ES ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP and HP CINEMA DSP You can experience the virtual CINEMA DSP sound field by setting the 1C. REAR L/R SP item in the SET MENU to “NONE.” The sound field processing is changed to the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode according to the selected sound field program. Virtual CINEMA DSP is performed using the Main speakers. You can also listen to HP (Headphone) CINEMA DSP by connecting your headphones to the PHONES jack while the DSP sound fields are on. ■ Normal Stereo Reproduction For normal stereo reproduction, press EFFECT to turn off the effect. Notes: • When you turn off the effect, no sound is reproduced from the Front Effect, Center, Rear, and Rear Center speakers. • If you turn off the effect while DTS or Dolby Digital signals are being reproduced, the dynamic range of the signal is automatically compressed. • The sound volume may be extremely reduced when you turn off the effect or if you change SET MENU item 3B. D-RANGE to MIN. In this case turn on the effect. 34 AM/FM Tuner English Automatic tuning is effective when the radio signals are strong and have no interference. However, manual tuning is best for weaker signals that have some interference. Manual Tuning 1 Select “TUNER” as the input source. You can use INPUT SELECTOR on the main unit or the input button on the remote control. FM/AM or 2 Press AM/FM to select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” appears in the display. TUNING MODE 3 AUTO/MAN’L MONO Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the “AUTO TUNING” indicator goes off in the display. If the colon (:) appears in the display next to the AM or FM indicator, press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off. Turn this indicator off. LD D-TV CBL/SAT VCR 1 STEREO VCR 2 AUTO VCR 3 TUNING V-AUX DSP SPEAKERS A % Press PRESET/TUNING manually. SLEEP MEMORY or % 4 PRESET/TUNING DVD MD TAPE TUNER CD PHONO to tune to the desired station Hold down the button to continue the tuning search. Note: • Manually selecting an FM station will automatically change the reception to monaural to increase the signal quality. Automatic Tuning 1 Select “TUNER” as the input source. You can use INPUT SELECTOR on the main unit or the input button on the remote control. FM/AM 2 or “FM” or “AM” appears in the display. 3 TUNING MODE AUTO AUTO/MAN’L MONO Press AM/FM to select the reception band. Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the “AUTO TUNING” indicator appears in the display. If the colon (:) appears in the display next to the AM or FM indicator, press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off. Turn this indicator off. LD D-TV CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2 AUTO VCR 3 TUNING V-AUX STEREO DSP SPEAKERS A or SLEEP once to begin auto tuning. % % Press PRESET/TUNING % 4 % PRESET/TUNING MEMORY DVD MD TAPE TUNER CD PHONO Press to tune to a higher frequency, or press to tune to a lower frequency. Press the same button again if the tuning search stops short of the correct station. Use manual tuning if the tuning search does not stop at the correct station because the signals are weak. 35 AM/FM Tuner Presetting Stations ■ Manually presetting stations This unit can store up to 40 stations (8 stations x 5 groups). Using this feature, you can easily tune to any preset station by selecting the preset station number (see page 38). 1 Tune to a station. See the previous page for tuning instructions. 2 MEMORY MEMORY MAN’L/AUTO FM Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM). The MEMORY indicator flashes for about five seconds. 3 A/B/C/D/E Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset station group (A to E). The group letter appears on the display. SPEAKERS A Note: or to select a preset station number Press to select a higher preset station number. Press % Press PRESET/TUNING (1 to 8). % Basic Operation 4 % PRESET/TUNING % • You must select a preset station group before the MEMORY indicator stops flashing (about five seconds). to select a lower preset station number. Note: • You must select a preset station group before the MEMORY indicator goes off (about five seconds). MEMORY 5 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM). MAN’L/AUTO FM The station band and frequency appear in the display with the preset group and number you selected. LD D-TV CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 V-AUX STEREO SPEAKERS A MEMORY DVD MD TAPE TUNER CD PHONO SLEEP Shows the displayed station has been programmed to A-1. 6 Repeat steps 1 through 5 to store other stations. You can store up to 40 stations (A1~A8, B1~B8, C1~C8, D1~D8, and E1~E8). Notes: • The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set to standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or power service is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the memory may be deleted. • Any stored station data existing at a preset number is cleared when you store a new station at that preset number. • The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. 36 AM/FM Tuner English ■ Automatically presetting stations You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store FM stations. With this function, the unit automatically tunes to FM stations with strong signals, then stores up to 40 of those stations in order. Tune to the FM station from which you want automatic presetting to begin. 1 See page 35 for tuning instructions. Press and hold MEMORY for more than 3 seconds. 2 MEMORY The preset number and MEMORY and AUTO TUNING indicators flash. Then, after about five seconds, automatic preset tuning begins. MAN’L/AUTO FM MEMORY DVD MD TAPE TUNER CD PHONO SLEEP Automatic Preset Tuning Options % % Before Automatic Preset Tuning begins (within about five seconds), you can set the preset number from which the unit will store FM stations and the direction in which the unit will scan for stations. • Press A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING / to select the preset number where the first station will be stored. The unit will stop storing stations if it reaches preset number E8. • Turn off PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) (“ : ” is off) and press PRESET/ TUNING to scan for lower frequency stations or PRESET/TUNING to scan for higher frequency stations. If you do not press either button before Automatic Preset Tuning begins, the unit will scan for higher frequency stations. % SPEAKERS A LD D-TV CBL/SAT VCR 1 STEREO VCR 2 AUTO VCR 3 TUNING V-AUX % When Automatic Preset Tuning is complete, the display shows the frequency of the last preset station. Notes: • You can replace a preset station with another FM or AM station manually by simply following the procedure of the section “Manually presetting stations” on page 36. • If the number of received stations does not reach to E8, the search finishes automatically after searching all frequencies. • With this function, only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored automatically. If the station you want to program is weak in signal strength, tune to it in monaural mode manually, then program it by following the procedure in “Manually presetting stations” on page 36. 37 AM/FM Tuner Tuning to Preset Stations Press A/B/C/D/E to select the preset station group. 1 A/B/C/D/E The preset group letter appears in the display and changes each time you press A/B/C/D/E. SPEAKERS A Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) so that the colon (:) appears next to the AM or FM indicator. 2 PRESET/TUNING EDIT SPEAKERS A or % Press PRESET/TUNING (1 to 8). 3 PRESET/TUNING % “:” must appear in the display to recall preset stations. If necessary, press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again. to select a preset station number The preset group and number appear in the display along with the station band, frequency, and signal strength information. LD D-TV CBL/SAT VCR 1 STEREO VCR 2 AUTO VCR 3 TUNING V-AUX Basic Operation SPEAKERS A DVD MD TAPE TUNER CD PHONO SLEEP Exchanging Preset Stations You can exchange the stations stored on two preset numbers. The example below describes the procedure for exchanging the stored stations at preset numbers E1 and A5. Tune to the E1 preset station number. 1 See above for “Tuning to Preset Stations.” Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for more than 3 seconds. 2 PRESET/TUNING “E-1” flashes in the display. EDIT SPEAKERS A Tune to the A5 preset station number. 3 See above for “Tuning to Preset Stations.” SPEAKERS A A-5 flashes in the display. 4 PRESET/TUNING EDIT The stations stored at the two preset locations are exchanged. LD D-TV CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2 AUTO VCR 3 TUNING V-AUX STEREO SPEAKERS A Shows the exchange of stations is completed. 38 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again. DVD MD TAPE TUNER CD PHONO SLEEP Basic Recording REC OUT/ZONE 2 allows you to record one source while viewing and/or listening to another source. English Preparations 1 Turn on the power to the RX-V1 and all connected equipment. 2 Select the source equipment you want to record using REC OUT/ ZONE 2. STANDBY/ON REC OUT/ZONE 2 SOURCE/REMOTE LD D-TV CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 VIDEO AUX DVD MD TAPE TUNER CD PHONO • To record the current source, set REC OUT/ZONE 2 to SOURCE/ REMOTE. • To record a source that you do not want to reproduce, set REC OUT/ ZONE 2 to the source you want to record. 3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station) on the source equipment. 4 Start recording on the recording equipment. • If you want to listen to another source, and REC OUT/ZONE 2 is not set to SOURCE/REMOTE, select the source you want to reproduce with INPUT SELECTOR and adjust the volume. Notes: • Do a test recording before you start an actual recording. • When this unit’s power is off, you cannot record between other equipment connected to this unit. • Operating BASS and TREBLE, BASS EXTENSION, BALANCE, VOLUME, and DSP programs do not affect the recorded signal. Caution: • The RF (AC-3) input signal cannot be output using REC OUT/ZONE 2. ■ Special considerations when recording DTS software The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them, the following considerations need to be made. For DTS encoded LDs, DVDs, and CDs: Only 2-channel analog audio signals may be recorded as follows: Laser Discs: Set your Laser Disc player’s left and right outputs to the analog soundtrack. DVDs: Use the disc menu to set the DVD player’s mixed 2-channel left and right audio outputs to the PCM or Dolby Digital soundtrack. Compact Discs: The DTS signal recorded on CDs can only be output as a digital bitstream, and therefore cannot be recorded. 39 Advanced Operation SET MENU Items 41 Advanced Operation Operating the SET MENU ................................................................................ 42 1. SPEAKER SET (1A. CENTER SP to 1G. MAIN LEVEL) ......................... 43 2. LOW FREQ. TEST ....................................................................................... 46 3. DOLBY D. SET (Dolby Digital Set) ............................................................ 47 4. DTS SET ....................................................................................................... 48 5. SP DELAY TIME ......................................................................................... 48 6. AUDIO DELAY ........................................................................................... 48 7. CENTER GEQ (Center Graphic Equalizer) ................................................. 49 8. REAR CT GEQ (Rear Center Graphic Equalizer) ....................................... 49 9. CINEMA EQ ................................................................................................ 50 10. HP TONE CTRL (Headphone Tone Control) ............................................ 51 11. PARAMETER INI (Parameter Initialization) ............................................ 51 12. 6.1/ES AUTO .............................................................................................. 51 13. MEMORY GUARD ................................................................................... 52 14. CMPNT-V INPT (Component Video Input) .............................................. 52 15. INPUT MODE ............................................................................................ 52 16. INPUT RENAME ....................................................................................... 53 17. DIMMER .................................................................................................... 53 18. ZONE 2 SET ............................................................................................... 53 Remote Control Features 54 Using the Remote Control ................................................................................ 54 Each Component Control Area ......................................................................... 56 Operating a Tuner (TUNER Area) ................................................................... 56 Operating a Tape Deck (TAPE Area) ............................................................... 56 Operating a CD Player (CD Area) .................................................................... 57 Operating an MD Recorder (MD Area) ............................................................ 57 Operating an LD Player (LD Area) .................................................................. 58 Operating a DVD Player (DVD Area) .............................................................. 58 Operating a VCR (VCR1/VCR2/VCR3 Area) ................................................. 59 Operating a TV or Digital TV (D-TV Area) ..................................................... 59 Operating a Cable or Satellite TV Tuner (CBSAT Area) ................................. 60 Free area (OPTN and PHONO Areas) .............................................................. 60 Seting the Manufacturer Code in the Remote Control ...................................... 61 Programming a New Remote Control Function ............................................... 62 Using the Macro Feature ................................................................................... 63 Changing the Source Name in the Display Window ........................................ 65 Clearing a Learned Function or Macro ............................................................. 65 Clearing Learned Functions, Macros, Renamed Displays, and Manufacturer Setups ................................................................................................................ 66 Adjusting the Levels of the Effect Speakers 67 Setting the Sleep Timer 67 ZONE 2 68 Connections ....................................................................................................... 68 Remote Control in ZONE 2 .............................................................................. 69 40 SET MENU Items English The SET MENU consists of eighteen items including the Speaker Set, Center Graphic Equalizer and Parameter Initialization features. Choose the appropriate item and adjust or select the values as necessary. Notes: • You can adjust the items in the SET MENU while reproducing a source. • We recommend that you adjust the items in the SET MENU while using a video monitor. It is easier to see the video monitor screen than it is to see the front panel display on this unit while adjusting SET MENU items. Descriptions Setting (Bold as default) SPEAKER SET 1A. CENTER SP 1B. MAIN SP 1C. REAR L/R SP 1D. REAR CT SP 1E. LFE/BASS OUT 1F. FRNT EFCT SP 1G. MAIN LEVEL Selects the output mode suitable for your Center speaker. Selects the output mode suitable for your Main speakers. Selects the output mode suitable for your Rear speakers. Selects the output mode suitable for your Rear Center speaker. Selects the speakers for your LFE/BASS signal output. Selects the output mode for your Front Effect speakers. Selects the output level for your main channels. LRG / SML / NONE LARGE / SMALL LRG / SML / NONE LRG / SML / NONE SW / MAIN / BOTH YES / NONE Normal / –10 dB 43 43 43 44 44 45 45 2. LOW FREQ. TEST Matches the Subwoofer level with the level of the other speakers. TEST TONE: OFF / ON OUTPUT: MAIN L/R, MAIN L, CENTER, MAIN R, R SUR.(REAR R), REAR CT, L SUR.(REAR L), SUBWOOFER, FRONT FREQ.: 35 Hz-250 Hz 46 3. DOLBY D. SET 3A. LFE LEVEL 3B. D-RANGE SPEAKER: –20 dB to 0 dB HEADPHONE: –20 dB to 0 dB SP(SPEAKER): MAX / STD / MIN HP(HEADPHONE): MAX / STD / MIN 47 Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital signals. Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby Digital signals. DTS SET 4A. LFE LEVEL SPEAKER: –10 dB to +10 dB (0 dB) HEADPHONE: –10 dB to +10 dB (0 dB) 48 Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for DTS signals. 5. SP DELAY TIME Adjusts the delay time for Center and Rear Center speakers. CENTER: 0 ms to 5 ms REAR CNTR: 0 ms to 30 ms (3 ms) 48 6. AUDIO DELAY Adjusts the delay time for all channels. 0 ms to 99 ms 48 7. CENTER GEQ Matches the Center speaker tonal quality with the Main speakers. 5-band: –6 dB to +6 dB (0 dB) 49 8. REAR CT GEQ Controls the tonal quality of the Rear Center speaker. 5-band: –6 dB to +6 dB (0 dB) 49 9. CINEMA EQ 9A. L, C, R EQ LCR, FRNT EFCT, REAR L/R, REAR CT: OFF / ON 50 Items 1. 4. Adjusts the tonal balance of the Main and Center speakers, Front Effect speakers, Rear speakers and Rear Center speaker separately. Page HIGHFRQ: 1 kHz to 12.7 kHz GAIN: –9 dB to +6 dB (–3 dB or 0 dB) 9B. FRNT EFCT EQ 9C. REAR L/R EQ PEQFRQ: 1 kHz to 12.7 kHz (8 kHz or 12.7 kHz) GAIN: –9 dB to +6 dB (–3 dB or –4 dB) 9D. REAR CT EQ 10. HP TONE CTRL Adjusts the tonal balance of the headphones. BASS, TRBL: –6 dB to +3 dB (0 dB) 51 11. PARAMETER INI Initializes the parameters of a group of DSP programs. 1 to 12 51 12. 6.1/ES AUTO Selects the AUTO mode of Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 and DTS ES decoding. ON / OFF 51 13. MEMORY GUARD Locks DSP program parameters and other SET MENU settings. OFF / ON 52 14. CMPNT-V INPT Selects the equipment to be connected to the component video inputs A, B or C. A: DVD B: D-TV C: CBL/SAT 52 15. INPUT MODE Selects the initial input mode of the sources connected to D-TV, CBL/SAT and VCR 1. D-TV: AUTO / LAST CBL/SAT: AUTO / LAST VCR1: AUTO / LAST 52 16. INPUT RENAME Changes the name of the inputs. Up to eight characters. 53 17. DIMMER Adjusts the brightness of the front panel display. –4 to 0 53 18. ZONE 2 SET Selects the mode of Zone 2. CTRL IN : MODE 1 / MODE 2 ZONE 2 OUT: FIX(fixed) / VAR.(variable) 53 41 SET MENU Items Operating the SET MENU This section describes how to adjust items in the SET MENU using the remote control. PARAMETER ON SCREEN LEVEL PARAMETER / SET MENU % SLEEP TEST SET MENU Cursor buttons % ■ General procedure for adjusting items Some items require extra steps to change to the desired setting. 1 Set PARAMETER/SET MENU to SET MENU. PARAMETER SET MENU Press % or % 2 repeatedly to select an item, then press + or – to change the setting of that item. • The last item you adjusted appears on the front panel display (or in the SET MENU OSD if you are using a video monitor). OSD (On Screen Display) @ Front Panel Display + – @ @ + – # # + – Press % or % 3 repeatedly or a DSP program button to exit the SET MENU. 10KEY DSP @ + – HALL 1 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB # 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO 1 CONCERT VIDEO 2 6 7 TV THEATER 9 CHP/INDEX HALL 2 1 ROCK CONCERT 5 or 6.1/ES 42 % Advanced Operation # • If “Press + / – Key!” appears on the display, press + or – to select that item, then press % or or – to change the setting of that item. MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 8 /DTS SUR. 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 to select a sub item, then press + SET MENU Items English 1. SPEAKER SET (1A. CENTER SP to 1G. MAIN LEVEL) Use this feature to select suitable output modes for your speaker configuration. You must set the output mode when you use a subwoofer. ■ 1A. CENTER SP (Center Speaker Mode) By adding a Center speaker to your speaker configuration, the RX-V1 can provide good dialogue localization for many listeners and superior synchronization of sound and images. The OSD shows a large, small or no center speaker depending on how you set this item. The initial setting is “LRG”. Select the “LRG” (Large) setting if you have a large Center speaker. The entire range of Center channel signals is sent to the Center speaker. Select the “SML” (Small) setting if you have a small Center speaker. Center channel low frequency signals of 90 Hz and below are directed to the speakers selected with the 1E. LFE/BASS OUT item (see page 44). Select the “NONE” setting if you do not have a Center speaker. All of the Center channel signals are directed to the left and right Main speakers. The “NONE” position provides good dialogue localization for the person sitting in the main listening position. Large Small None ■ 1B. MAIN SP (Main Speaker Mode) The display shows small or large Main speakers depending on how you set this item. The initial setting is “LARGE”. Select the “LARGE” setting if you have large Main speakers. The entire range of left and right Main channel signals is directed to the left and right Main speakers. Select the “SMALL” setting if you have small Main speakers. The Main channel low frequency signals of 90 Hz and below are directed to the speakers selected with the 1E. LFE/BASS OUT item (see page 44). Large Small Note: • When you select the “MAIN” setting for the 1E. LFE/BASS OUT item, the Main channel low frequency signals of 90 Hz and below are directed to the Main speakers even if you select the “SMALL” setting for the Main speaker mode. In this case, the OSD shows large Main speakers. ■ 1C. REAR L/R SP (Rear Speaker Mode) The OSD shows large, small or no Rear speakers depending on how you set this item. The initial setting is “LRG”. Select the “LRG” setting if you have large left and right Rear speakers or if you use a Rear Subwoofer (see page 22). The entire range of Rear channel signals is sent to the left and right Rear speakers. Select the “SML” setting if you have small left and right Rear speakers. Rear channel low frequency signals of 90 Hz and below are directed to the speakers selected with the 1E. LFE/BASS OUT item (see page 44). Select the “NONE” setting if you do not have Rear speakers. • In this case, Rear Center speaker will automatically be set to “NONE” and the 1D. REAR CT SP item will be skipped. Large Small None 43 SET MENU Items ■ 1D. REAR CT SP (Rear Center Speaker Mode) By adding a Rear Center speaker to your speaker configuration, the RX-V1 can provide more realistic front-to-back and back-to-front transitions. The initial setting is “LRG”. Select the “LRG” setting if you have a large Rear Center speaker. The entire range of Rear Center channel signals is sent to the Rear Center speakers. Select the “SML” (small) setting if you have a small Rear Center speaker. Rear Center channel low frequency signals of 90 Hz and below are distributed to speakers selected with the 1E. LFE/BASS OUT item. Select the “NONE” setting if you do not have a Rear Center speaker. Large Small None ■ 1E. LFE/BASS OUT (Bass Out Mode) LFE signals carry low frequency effects when this unit decodes DTS or Dolby Digital signals. Low frequency signals are defined as 90 Hz and below. The initial setting is “BOTH”. Select the “SW” (Subwoofer) setting if you use a Subwoofer. The LFE signals are directed to the Subwoofer. Select the “MAIN” setting if you do not use a Subwoofer. The LFE signals are directed to the Main speakers. Select the “BOTH” setting if you use a Subwoofer and you want to mix the Main channel low frequency sound signals with the LFE signals. Advanced Operation Subwoofer Main Both Note: • The low frequency signals of 90Hz and below from all Main, Center, Rear and Rear Center channels are directed to the LFE channel when you select the small speaker setting in items 1A, 1B, 1C and 1D. 44 SET MENU Items English ■ 1F. FRNT EFCT SP (Front Effect Speaker Mode) The RX-V1 uses Front Effect speakers to localize the virtual sound sources of the sound field programs. If you do not use Front Effect speakers, you can direct the Front Effect signals to the Main speakers. The OSD shows small or no Front Effect speakers depending on how you set this item. The initial setting is “YES”. Select the “YES” setting if you use Front Effect speakers. Select the “NONE” setting if you do not use Front Effect speakers. The Front Effect signals are mixed with the Main channels. YES NONE ■ 1G. MAIN LEVEL Change this setting if you cannot match the sound volume of the Front, Rear, and Center speakers with the Main speakers because of the unusually high efficiency performance of the Main speakers. The initial setting is “Normal”. Select the “Normal” setting if you can match the volume of your effect speakers with the volume of your Main speakers using the Dolby Surround Test (page 28). Select the “–10dB” setting if you cannot match the volume of your effect speakers with the volume of your Main speakers using the Dolby Surround Test (page 28). Normal –10dB Note: • When this unit decodes 96 kHz sampling/24 bit digital signals or 6CH INPUT is on, level adjustments in items 1A~1F are not possible. 45 SET MENU Items 2. LOW FREQ. TEST Use this feature to adjust the Subwoofer volume so it matches the volume of the other speakers in your configuration. Change the setting using the remote control while sitting in the main listening position. 1 Press + or – to set the TEST TONE to “ON”, and adjust the volume using VOLUME + so you can hear the tone. 2 Press repeatedly to go to OUTPUT and press + or – to select the speaker you want to compare with the Subwoofer. % • If “SUBWOOFER” is selected, test tones above 90 Hz will not be output from the Subwoofer. The test tone will not necessarily be output from the selected speakers. The output mode of the test tone depends on the settings of the 1. SPEAKER SET items in the SET MENU. 4 Press % 3 repeatedly to go to FREQ. and press + or – to select the frequency you want to use. Adjust the Subwoofer volume using the controls on the Subwoofer so it matches the volume of the speaker you are comparing it to. Notes: • Do not turn up the VOLUME too high. • If no test tone is heard, turn off the power and make sure all the necessary hookups are correct. Digital Generator (Wide Band Noise Produced) ■ About the Test Tone The test tone is produced by the tone generator. The tone generator produces a narrow band noise centered at a specified frequency by the band pass filter. You can change the center frequency from 35 Hz through 250 Hz in one-sixth octave steps. Advanced Operation NOISE FREQ. Band Pass Filter Center freq. 46 35 Hz~250 Hz You can use the test tone not only for adjusting the subwoofer level, but also for checking the low frequency characteristics of your listening room. Low frequency sounds are especially affected by the listener’s position, speaker placement, subwoofer polarity and other conditions. SET MENU Items English 3. DOLBY D. SET (Dolby Digital Set) ■ 3A. LFE LEVEL Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low frequency effect) channel when playing back Dolby Digital encoded software. This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital signals. The LFE signal carries the low frequency special effect sound which is only added to certain scenes. You can adjust the levels from 0 dB to –20 dB. • Adjust the LFE levels according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. ■ 3B. D-RANGE (Dynamic Range) Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range. This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital signals. Select the “MAX” setting for feature films. Select the “STD” (Standard) setting for general use. Select the “MIN” setting for listening to sources at extremely low volume levels. Note: • When D-RANGE is set to “MIN”, sound output may be faint because some Dolby Digital software is not compatible with the minimum level dynamic range. STD MIN Dialogue level H-LEVEL CUT 0.0 1.0 1.0 Output Level Dialogue level Output Level Output Level MAX Dialogue level 0.0 L-LEVEL BST Input Level Input Level Input Level 47 SET MENU Items 4. DTS SET ■ 4A. LFE LEVEL Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low frequency effect) channel when playing back DTS encoded software. This setting is effective only when this unit decodes DTS signals. The LFE signal carries the low frequency special effect sound which is only added to certain scenes. You can adjust the levels from –10 dB to +10 dB. • Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. 5. SP DELAY TIME Use this feature to adjust the delay of the Center and the Rear Center channel sounds. This feature works when this unit decodes DTS or Dolby Digital signals. Ideally, the Center speaker and the Rear Center speaker should be the same distance from the main listening position as the left and right Main speakers. However, in most home situations, the Center speaker or the Rear Center speaker is placed in line with the Main speakers or the Rear speakers. By delaying the sound from the Center speaker and the Rear Center speaker, the apparent distance from the Center speaker and the Rear Center speaker to the main listening position can be adjusted to make it seem the same as the distance between the left and right Main speaker, and the left and right Rear speakers to the listening position. Adjusting the delay time for the Center speaker is especially important for giving depth to the dialogue. You can adjust the delay time from 0 ms to 5 ms for the Center speaker and from 0 ms to 30 ms for the Rear Center speaker. • Increasing the delay 1 ms simulates moving the speakers about 30 cm (one foot) farther away from the listening position. Center speaker image C C R RL RC RR Advanced Operation L RC Rear Center speaker image 6. AUDIO DELAY Use this feature to adjust the delay time of all channel sounds, when this unit decodes DTS or Dolby Digital signals. Adjusting AUDIO DELAY is especially important for matching the sounds to screen pictures. Initial settings is “0ms”. You can adjust the delay time from 0ms to 99ms. 48 SET MENU Items English 7. CENTER GEQ (Center Graphic Equalizer) Use this feature to adjust the built-in five band graphic equalizer so the Center speaker tone matches that of the left and right Main speakers. You can select the 100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz, or 10 kHz frequencies. to select a higher frequency and % to select a lower frequency. % 1 Use 2 Press + or – to adjust the level of that frequency. Note: • You can monitor the Center speaker sound while adjusting this item using the Dolby Surround test tone generator. Press TEST before starting the procedure above. “TEST DOLBY SUR.” appears, and the test tone starts alternating among the speakers. Once you begin the procedure above, the test tone remains at the Center speaker and you can hear how the sound changes as you adjust the various frequency levels. To turn off the test tone generator, press TEST repeatedly until the current DSP program appears (see page 28). 8. REAR CT GEQ (Rear Center Graphic Equalizer) Use this feature to adjust the built-in five band graphic equalizer so the Rear Center speaker tone matches that of the left and right Main speakers. to select a higher frequency and % to select a lower frequency. % 1 Use 2 Press + or – to adjust the level of that frequency. 49 SET MENU Items 9. CINEMA EQ Use this feature to match the tonal quality of four groups of speakers: the Main and Center speaker group, the Front Effect speakers group, the Rear speakers group, and the Rear Center speaker group. CINEMA-EQ consists of a high-shelving equalizer (HIGH) and a parametric equalizer (PEQ). The high-shelving equalizer changes high frequency characteristics, and the parametric equalizer boosts or cuts any selected frequency. The equalizer can be used for a variety of purposes, such as adjusting the tonal quality of differing types of speakers, adjusting the tonal quality in different installation environments, or adjusting the source sound to your liking. The CINEMA EQ characteristic charts below show the value of the CINEMA EQ factory settings for each speaker group for general listening conditions. ▲ FRONT and REAR Preset Value ▲ L.C.R. Preset Value HIGH PEQ : FRQ 12.7 kHz : FRQ 12.7 kHz G A I N HIGH PEQ GAIN –3 dB GAIN –4 dB PEQ HIGH HIGH + PEQ : FRQ 12.7 kHz : FRQ 8.0 kHz G A I N GAIN 0dB GAIN –3dB HIGH PEQ FRQ FRQ If you want to change the characteristics, follow the procedure below to adjust the frequency and gain for the high-shelving equalizer (HIGH) and parametric equalizer (PEQ). For the more detailed characteristics in different settings, see “CINEMA-EQ Frequency Characteristics” on page 87. or % repeatedly to select one of the speaker groups and press + to select “ON”. % 1 Press 2 Press or % repeatedly to select one of the following parameters, then press + or – to change the setting of that parameter. Advanced Operation % % • Each time you press reverse order. , the parameter changes on the front panel display as shown above. Press the cursor % to go in the Notes: • When the 1F. FRNT EFCT SP item is set to “NONE”, the Front Effect signals are output from the Main speakers. • CINEMA-EQ does not work when you press EFFECT to turn off the effect. 50 SET MENU Items English 10. HP TONE CTRL (Headphone Tone Control) Use this feature to adjust the level of bass and treble when you use your headphones. The initial Setting is 0 dB for both bass and treble. This does not effect to the 96 kHz sampling digital signal. Select BASS or TRBL and press + or – to change each level. You can adjust the level from –6 dB to +3 dB. 11. PARAMETER INI (Parameter Initialization) Use this feature to initialize the parameters for each DSP program within a DSP program group. When you initialize a DSP program group, all of the parameter values within that group revert to their initial settings. Press the DSP program group button on the remote control for the DSP program you want to initialize. • All of the DSP programs within the selected program group are initialized. Repeat this step to initialize other DSP program groups. Notes: • The asterisk (*) mark next to a DSP program group number indicates that you have changed the parameter values in one or more DSP programs within that group. • The parameter values of the DSP programs do not change if you initialize a program group that does not have the asterisk (*) mark. • When the MEMORY GUARD function is set to “ON” (see page 52), you cannot initialize any program groups. • You cannot initialize the individual DSP programs within a group separately. Caution: • Once you initialize a DSP program group, you cannot have this unit revert the parameter values back to the previous settings automatically. 12. 6.1/ES AUTO Use this feature to switch the DOLBY Digital Matrix 6.1 and DTS ES AUTO mode on or off. Select “ON” to allow the main unit to automatically turn on the Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder when the software with identification signal is detected. Select “OFF” if you want to control the mode manually by pressing 6.1/ES on the remote. 51 SET MENU Items 13. MEMORY GUARD Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP program parameter values and other settings on this unit. Select “ON” to use MEMORY GUARD to protect the following features: • • • • DSP program parameters All SET MENU items Front, Rear Center speaker and Subwoofer levels The On-Screen Display mode Notes: • When MEMORY GUARD is “ON”, you cannot use any of the test modes. • When MEMORY GUARD is “ON”, you cannot select any other SET MENU item. 14. CMPNT-V INPUT (Component Video Input) Use this feature to designate the input for each COMPONENT VIDEO terminal, A, B, and C. The initial settings are as written on the rear panel. (Terminal A is for DVD, terminal B is for D-TV, and terminal C is for CBL/SAT.) Select [A], [B], or [C] according to which terminal your equipment is connected to by pressing % or 2 Select the video input for your equipment by pressing + or –. % 1 . Advanced Operation • You cannot select the same input once you have already selected it. 15. INPUT MODE Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources connected to D-TV, CBL/SAT and VCR 1 input jacks when you turn on this unit. Select “AUTO” to allow this unit to automatically detect the type of input signal and select the appropriate input mode. Select “LAST” to set this unit to automatically select the last input mode used for that source. 52 SET MENU Items English 16. INPUT RENAME Use this feature to change the name of the input which appears on the OSD or the front panel display. 1 Select the input you want to change the name of by pressing an input button (or using INPUT SELECTOR). 2 Press + or – to place the ^ under the space or the character you want to edit. 3 Press % or to select the character you want to use and + or – to move to the next one. % • Press to change the character in the following order, or press % to go in the reverse order. A~Z, a space, 0~9, a space, a~z, a space, #, , +, and so on. % * • Follow the procedure above to rename other inputs. 4 Press + or – repeatedly to exit the INPUT RENAME mode. 17. DIMMER You can adjust the brightness of the front panel display from –4 to 0. 18. ZONE 2 SET Select ZONE2 OUT to change the setting of the ZONE 2 output volume. Selecting “VAR.” allows you to control the volume output to ZONE 2 with the remote control. Select “FIX” when you don’t want to change the volume of output to ZONE 2 with the remote control. Use CTRL IN to change the setting of the REMOTE 1 IN and REMOTE 2 IN jacks. Selecting “MODE 1” allows you to control this unit using the tuner preset buttons on the remote control. Selecting “MODE 2” disables control of this unit using the tuner preset buttons on the remote control. 53 Remote Control Features The remote control can operate the main unit as well as other Yamaha audio and video components. To control the components of other manufacturers (or some Yamaha), you must set up the remote control with the manufacturer’s codes. This remote control also has a sophisticated Learn feature that allows it to acquire functions from the remote controls of other components in your system (or other household appliances) equipped with infrared remote control receivers. The Macro feature allows you to program a series of operations in sequence onto a single button, or use the factory preset macros to operate other Yamaha components. These features make it possible for you to reduce the number of remote control units in your entertainment room. Notes: • For operating distance of the remote contorol and notes about batteries, refer to page 5. • For the name and function of each part and button, refer to pages 8 and 9. • If the memory in the remote control becomes full, no further learning is possible even if there are still some programmable buttons available. Using the Remote Control <Main Unit Control Area> <Component Control Area> The main unit control area is the shaded area shown below. It is for controlling the RX-V1. You can use functions within this area no matter which Component Control Area is selected. The component control area is the shaded area shown below. Each component has different functions for operation buttons in the component control area. The component, which was chosen by pressing an input button, can be controlled and the display window shows the corresponding name of the input. MACRO MACRO TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR LEARN MACRO OFF TRANSMIT RE-NAME ON CLEAR LEARN MACRO OFF ON SYSTEM STANDBY V-AUX TAPE PHONO POWER STANDBY V-AUX TAPE PHONO D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD TITLE % TITLE % % ENTER % SYSTEM POWER ENTER Input selector DISPLAY Advanced Operation POWER MENU 10KEY/DSP (DSP is selected) % ! $ $ REC STOP PAUSE PLAY POWER * # / HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO 1 CONCERT VIDEO 2 6 7 8 5 6.1/ES SELECT ! / 10KEY DSP % SOUND – CHAPTER + SEARCH TV THEATER MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX 10KEY DSP MENU DISPLAY ! DISPLAY $ REC STOP 1 POWER HALL 2 / TV INPUT 10KEY/DSP (10KEY is selected) 5 EX/ES TV THEATER – + MUTE TV MUTE – EFFECT 9 6 10 CHP/INDEX + + VOLUME TV-VOL – – 4 7 1 2 8 0 5 11 6 12 * 9 10 + +– – 4 7 8 + EFFECT TV INPUT 11 12 +10 +100 + – CH TV MUTE – SET MENU % There are 14 component control areas. You can setup the manufacturer code and program other remote control functions in each area (Cannot setup the manufacturer code in the OPTN area). See pages 61 and 62. 54 JAZZ CLUB CONCERT VIDEO 2 PARAMETER TEST # 3 ON SCREEN LEVEL SLEEP PLAY CONCERT VIDEO 1 DISC % $ +10 +100 TV MOVIE MOVIE THEATER THEATER 1 THEATER 2 CHP/INDEX 0 TV INPUT MUTE A / B / C / D / E PRESET CH VOLUME TV MUTE SOUND – CHAPTER + !# $ 3 TVDISC VOL DISC PLAY MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 ROCK THEATER 2ENTERCONCERT TAINMENT A / B / C / D / E PRESET CH $ % ROCK ENTERCONCERT CONCERT CONCERT VIDEO VIDEO 10KEYTAINMENT DSP HALL 1 1 HALL 2 2 CHURCH A / B / C / D / E PRESET + ENTER REC STOP PAUSE CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 2 6.1/ES TV VOL % MENU PAUSE SEARCH !* HALL 1 SOUND – CHAPTER + SEARCH ! TITLE % % % SOURCE % % SELECT % % SOURCE 6CH INPUT % 6CH INPUT Input selector and switching the control area for each component Remote Control Features English ■ SOURCE SELECT You can control another component independently from the input you selected by pressing an input button. % 1 Press SELECT % or 2 The display window will show one of the following: V-AUX, TAPE, PHONO, D-TV (digital and regular TV), CBSAT (Cable TV/Satellite TV), TUNER, MD, CD, VCR 1, VCR 2, VCR 3, LD, DVD, Zone2, OPTN (Option). to choose a component and set the remote control to be used for it. SOURCE % SELECT % ■ About Zone2 When you make up a second audio-video room with this unit’s Zone2 system, you might want to use this remote control. Selecting Zone2 sets the remote control to be in the Zone2 mode. See page 69 for details. ENTER % SOURCE % SELECT % POWER DISPLAY % % % 6CH INPUT TITLE MENU SOUND – CHAPTER + SEARCH ! ! $ $ REC STOP PAUSE PLAY * # / Pressing % selects Zone2 first. ■ About OPTN OPTN is an extra component control area to be programmed with other remote control functions. (You cannot setup the manufacturer code in this area.) See page 60 for the programmable area. ENTER % SOURCE % SELECT % POWER DISPLAY % % % 6CH INPUT TITLE MENU SOUND – CHAPTER + SEARCH ! ! $ $ REC STOP PAUSE PLAY * # / Pressing fi selects OPTN first. ■ Light up function The buttons which are active and the display window light up for 10 seconds after pressing LIGHT. MACRO TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR LEARN MACRO OFF PHONO ON POWER STANDBY V-AUX TAPE D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD TITLE % % SYSTEM ENTER 6CH INPUT DISPLAY SELECT % POWER MENU SOUND – CHAPTER + SEARCH ! ! $ $ REC STOP PAUSE PLAY / 10KEY DSP % % SOURCE % * # HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 55 Remote Control Features Each Component Control Area The general operational buttons are shown for each area. Some of them may not function depending on the equipment you have. ■ Operating a Tuner (TUNER Area) STANDBY V-AUX TAPE PHONO D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD TITLE % % SYSTEM POWER ENTER 6CH INPUT % DISPLAY SELECT % ! ! $ $ REC STOP PAUSE PLAY * # JAZZ CLUB / 10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO 1 CONCERT VIDEO 2 5 6 7 8 TV THEATER 6.1/ES Preset group A 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX TV INPUT TV VOL + MUTE CH TV MUTE – + VOLUME EFFECT – Preset group E Preset group D A / B / C / D / E PRESET + Preset number 1 to 8 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 9 Preset group B SOUND – CHAPTER + SEARCH POWER POWER MENU % % SOURCE Preset group C PRESET + / – – DISC Advanced Operation Preset group A/B/C/D/E ■ Operating a Tape Deck (TAPE Area) STANDBY V-AUX TAPE PHONO D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD TITLE % % SYSTEM POWER ENTER 6CH INPUT Fast forward % DISPLAY SELECT POWER SOUND ! ! $ $ REC STOP PAUSE PLAY * # JAZZ CLUB / REC / PAUSE 10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO 1 CONCERT VIDEO 2 6 7 8 5 TV THEATER 6.1/ES MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE function if you have set up the manufacturer code for the D-TV Area. A / B / C / D / E PRESET + TV INPUT TV VOL – + – DISC 56 MUTE CH TV MUTE Deck A / Deck B – CHAPTER + SEARCH % Rewind MENU % % SOURCE + VOLUME EFFECT – Direction A / B PLAY STOP Remote Control Features English ■ Operating a CD Player (CD Area) STANDBY V-AUX TAPE PHONO D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD TITLE % % SYSTEM POWER ENTER 6CH INPUT DISPLAY % DISPLAY SELECT POWER ! ! $ $ REC STOP PAUSE PLAY * # JAZZ CLUB / 10KEY DSP HALL 2 CHURCH 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO 1 CONCERT VIDEO 2 5 6 7 8 11 12 0 +10 +100 + A / B / C / D / E PRESET TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE function if you have set up the manufacturer code for the D-TV Area. TV INPUT TV VOL + – Numeric button +10 Numeric button 0 MUTE CH TV MUTE CLEAR 10 CHP/INDEX + Numeric buttons 1 to 9 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 9 INDEX Skip Search PLAY PAUSE (YAMAHA : Pause / Stop) HALL 1 TV THEATER 6.1/ES SOUND – CHAPTER + SEARCH % SEARCH POWER STOP MENU % % SOURCE VOLUME EFFECT – DISC +/– (Disc Skip) – DISC ■ Operating an MD Recorder (MD Area) SYSTEM POWER STANDBY V-AUX TAPE PHONO D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD ENTER % SOURCE DISPLAY % DISPLAY SELECT POWER ! ! $ $ REC STOP PAUSE PLAY * # JAZZ CLUB / 10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO 1 CONCERT VIDEO 2 5 6 7 8 TV THEATER 6.1/ES SOUND – CHAPTER + SEARCH % SEARCH POWER REC / PUASE MENU % % % 6CH INPUT TITLE 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX A / B / C / D / E PRESET TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE function if you have set up the manufacturer code for the D-TV Area. TV INPUT TV VOL – + MUTE CH TV MUTE PLAY PAUSE STOP Numeric buttons 1 to 9 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 9 + Skip Search – + Numeric button +10 Numeric button 0 VOLUME EFFECT – DISC 57 Remote Control Features ■ Operating an LD Player (LD Area) SYSTEM POWER STANDBY V-AUX TAPE PHONO D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD ENTER % SOURCE DISPLAY % POWER ! ! $ $ REC STOP PAUSE PLAY * # JAZZ CLUB / 10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO 1 CONCERT VIDEO 2 5 6 7 8 TV THEATER 6.1/ES Chapter / Time SOUND 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX A / B / C / D / E PRESET Advanced Operation TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE function if you have set up the manufacturer code for the D-TV Area. TV INPUT TV VOL + MUTE CH TV MUTE – CHAPTER +/– (Chapter Search) PLAY PAUSE Numeric buttons 1 to 9 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 9 + SOUND – CHAPTER + SEARCH % SEARCH POWER STOP MENU DISPLAY SELECT % % % 6CH INPUT TITLE + CLEAR Numeric button +10 Numeric button 0 VOLUME EFFECT – – DISC ■ Operating a DVD Player (DVD Area) SYSTEM POWER STANDBY V-AUX TAPE PHONO D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD DISPLAY % DISPLAY % MENU POWER ! ! $ $ REC STOP PAUSE PLAY * # CHURCH JAZZ CLUB / 10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO 1 CONCERT VIDEO 2 5 6 7 8 TV THEATER 6.1/ES Title / Index SOUND 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX A / B / C / D / E PRESET TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE function if you have set up the manufacturer code for the D-TV Area. 58 TV INPUT TV VOL – + MUTE CH TV MUTE SOUND Skip Search PLAY PAUSE STOP Numeric buttons 1 to 9 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 9 + Menu cursor / ENTER – CHAPTER + SEARCH % POWER Return ENTER SOURCE SELECT SEARCH % % MENU TITLE % 6CH INPUT TITLE – DISC + VOLUME EFFECT – CLEAR Numeric button +10 Numeric button 0 Disc Skip Remote Control Features English ■ Operating a VCR (VCR 1 / VCR 2 / VCR 3 Area) SYSTEM POWER STANDBY V-AUX TAPE PHONO D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD ENTER % SOURCE % DISPLAY SELECT Rewind / Fast Forward POWER REC (Press twice) MENU POWER ! ! $ $ REC STOP PAUSE PLAY * # JAZZ CLUB / 10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO 1 CONCERT VIDEO 2 5 6 7 8 TV THEATER 6.1/ES SOUND – CHAPTER + SEARCH % % % % 6CH INPUT TITLE TV / VIDEO 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX Numeric button 10 or 0 A / B / C / D / E PRESET TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE function if you have set up the manufacturer code for the D-TV Area. TV INPUT TV VOL – + MUTE CH TV MUTE Numeric buttons 1 to 9 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 9 + PLAY PAUSE STOP + VOLUME EFFECT – CH +/– – DISC ■ Operating a TV or Digital TV (D-TV Area) STANDBY V-AUX TAPE PHONO D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD TITLE % % SYSTEM POWER ENTER 6CH INPUT DISPLAY % DISPLAY SELECT % POWER POWER MENU 6.1/ES Enter ! ! $ $ REC STOP PAUSE PLAY * # JAZZ CLUB HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO 1 CONCERT VIDEO 2 5 6 7 8 TV THEATER 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 TV VOL +/– TV INPUT TV VOL – + MUTE CH TV MUTE Numeric buttons 1 to 9 Numeric button 10 or 0 A / B / C / D / E PRESET + You can control your VCR, if you have set up the code for VCR1. MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 9 CHP/INDEX TV INPUT SOUND – CHAPTER + SEARCH / 10KEY DSP % % SOURCE – + VOLUME EFFECT CH +/– – DISC TV MUTE 59 Remote Control Features ■ Operating a Cable or Satellite TV Tuner (CBSAT Area) STANDBY V-AUX TAPE PHONO D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD TITLE % % SYSTEM POWER ENTER 6CH INPUT DISPLAY MENU % MENU DISPLAY SELECT ! $ $ REC STOP PAUSE PLAY * # CHURCH JAZZ CLUB / POWER 10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO 1 CONCERT VIDEO 2 5 6 7 8 TV THEATER 6.1/ES SOUND ! POWER Enter Menu cursor / ENTER – CHAPTER + SEARCH % % % SOURCE You can control your VCR, if you have set up the code for VCR1. Numeric buttons 1 to 9 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX Recall Numeric button 0 A / B / C / D / E PRESET + TV INPUT TV VOL TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE function if you have set up the manufacturer code for the D-TV Area. TV MUTE – + MUTE CH – + CH +/– VOLUME EFFECT – DISC Advanced Operation ■ Free Area (OPTN and PHONO Areas) STANDBY V-AUX TAPE PHONO D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD TITLE % % SYSTEM POWER ENTER % % DISPLAY SELECT MENU % POWER $ REC STOP PAUSE PLAY POWER * # / $ $ STOP PAUSE PLAY * # JAZZ CLUB CHURCH JAZZ CLUB HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO 1 CONCERT VIDEO 2 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO 1 CONCERT VIDEO 2 6 7 8 6 7 8 5 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 TV INPUT TV VOL + – DISC MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX A / B / C / D / E PRESET MUTE CH TV MUTE TV THEATER 6.1/ES A / B / C / D / E PRESET 60 ! REC HALL 2 9 – ! 1 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 10KEY DSP SOUND – CHAPTER + HALL 1 CHP/INDEX TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE function if you have set up the manufacturer code for the D-TV Area. MENU SEARCH % $ 5 + DISPLAY SELECT ! TV THEATER 6.1/ES % ! / 10KEY DSP SOUND – CHAPTER + SEARCH % SOURCE % ENTER SOURCE 6CH INPUT % % % 6CH INPUT TITLE EFFECT + + VOLUME TV VOL – – TV INPUT + MUTE CH TV MUTE – DISC + VOLUME EFFECT – Remote Control Features English Setting the Manufacturer Code in the Remote Control You can control other components by setting a manufacturer code. A code can be set up in each component controol area except for the OPTN area. The Yamaha code is factory preset for DVD, LD, CD, MD, TUNER, and TAPE (Yamaha for LD, and Yamaha1 for others). There is no factory preset code on VCR1/2/3, D-TV, CBSAT, V-AUX, and PHONO. STANDBY V-AUX TAPE PHONO D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD LEARN 1 Select the source component you want to preset by using the input buttons. 2 Press and hold LEARN for about three seconds using a ballpoint pen or similar object. 3 Use % / to select the name of your component’s manufacturer. flashes alternately % ENTER SOURCE % DISPLAY SELECT % MENU SEARCH % SOUND – CHAPTER + ! ! $ $ REC STOP PAUSE PLAY * # POWER / • You will find the names of most audio-video manufacturers worldwide in alphabetical order on the display window. % TITLE % 6CH INPUT % SYSTEM POWER 4 Press POWER (or any other button) on the remote control while pointing it at the component to check if you have set up the code correctly. If the component cannot be controlled by the remote control, try entering another code for the same manufacturer. 5 Press LEARN to confirm the preset. • If you want to preset another code for another component immediately, press ENTER and repeat steps 1 to 4. Note: • If you have already programmed a remote control function to a button, the function takes priority over the set up manufacturer code’s function. ■ Controlling a different component from the source component (input) you selected % % POWER / DISPLAY MENU SEARCH % 2 Select a Library (component category) by using SOUND – CHAPTER + ! ! $ $ REC STOP PAUSE PLAY * # % SELECT Repeat steps 1 and 2 of the procedure in “Setting the Manufacturer Code in the Remote Control”. % ENTER SOURCE 1 % % % 6CH INPUT TITLE / . • There are 12 Libraries to set up a manufacturer code; L:TV, L:CAB (CABLE), L:DBS, L:SAT, L:VCR, L:DVD, L:LD, L:CD, L:MD, L:TAP (TAPE), L:TUN (TUNER), *L:AMP. *L:AMP has three codes; YPC, DSP, and NO. “YPC” should be selected to operate the RX-V1. “DSP” is for operating Yamaha DSP amplifiers other than the RX-V1. “NO” is to clear the main unit control area functions. 3 Repeat steps 3 and 4 of the procedure in “Setting the Manufacturer Code in the Remote Control ”. Note: • “ERROR” appears in the display window in the following conditions: when pressing a button other than the cursor and ENTER; when pressing more than one button at once; and when one of MACRO ON/OFF, 10KEY/DSP, PARAMETER/SET MENU is switched to another position. 61 Remote Control Features Programming a New Remote Control Function If you desire to program functions not included in the basic operations covered by the manufacturer code, or a manufacturer code is not available, the following procedure needs to be performed. The possible programming area is the same as a component control area, so buttons are programmable independently for each source component area. It is also possible to program in the main unit control area. (Refer to page 54 for details on component control area and main unit control area.) POWER CBL/SAT STANDBY TITLE VCR 3 TUNER V-AUX % LD MD TAPE MACRO DVD CD PHONO OFF Place this remote control and the other remote control about 5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in.) apart on a flat surface so that their infrared transmitters are aimed at each other. 2 Select a source component. 3 Press LEARN using a ball point pen or similar object. 4 Press and release the button where you want the new function to be programmed. 5 Press and hold the button on the other remote control that has the function you want to program into this remote control until “OK” appears in the display window. TRANSMIT RE-NAME SYSTEM D-TV VCR 2 CLEAR LEARN ON MACRO 6CH INPUT VCR 1 % 1 % 5~10 cm (2 to 4 in.) LEARN flashes alternately STANDBY TUNER V-AUX % LD MD TAPE MACRO DVD CD PHONO OFF TRANSMIT RE-NAME POWER CBL/SAT TITLE VCR 3 CLEAR LEARN ON MACRO TRANSMIT RE-NAME LEARN V-AUX MACRO TAPE ON MACRO OFF CD PHONO DVD 6CH INPUT • “NG” appears in display window when programming is not done correctly. % % Advanced Operation A/B CLEAR STANDBY LD SYSTEM TUNER % POWER CBL/SAT TITLE VCR 3 MD D-TV VCR 2 TAPE VCR 1 % SYSTEM D-TV VCR 2 6CH INPUT VCR 1 % LEARN 6 Repeat Steps 4 and 5 to program additional functions. 7 Press LEARN again to exit the Learn mode. Notes: • If you do not press any button within 30 seconds, the learning process is canceled. • This remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn most of the other remote control’s functions. However, you may not be able to program some special signals or extremely long transmissions. (Refer to the operation instructions for the other remote control.) When the memory is full, “FULL” appears in the display window, and this remote control cannot acquire any more functions. Clear unnecessary programmed functions to allow the unit to acquire new functions. • Even if the batteries in the other remote control have enough power to transmit signals for operation, they may not have enough power to transmit signals to this remote control. • When the remote controls are either too close together or too far apart, you may not be able to program this remote control. • Direct sunlight interferes with infrared rays. • “ERROR” appears in the display window in the following conditions: when pressing more than one button at once; and when MACRO ON/OFF is switched to another position. 62 Remote Control Features English Using the Macro Feature The Macro feature makes it possible to perform a series of operations by pressing just one button. For example, when you want to play a CD, normally you would turn on the components, select the CD input, and press the play button to start playback. Using the Macro feature, you can perform all those operations by simply pressing the CD macro button. The macro buttons (the input buttons and SYSTEM POWER ON/STANDBY) are factory preset with macro programs. You can also program your own macros (see page 64). Press a Macro button CD Automatically transmits signals of each button sequentially SYSTEM POWER CD PLAY # (CD Area) Macro button First Second TAPE TAPE Third PLAY # (TAPE Area) MD MD PLAY # (MD Area) LD LD PLAY # (LD Area) DVD DVD PLAY # (DVD Area) VCR 1 VCR 1 PLAY # (VCR1 Area) VCR 2 VCR 2 PLAY # (VCR2 Area) VCR 3 VCR 3 PLAY # (VCR3 Area) SYSTEM POWER TUNER TUNER (*1) V-AUX V-AUX PHONO PHONO D-TV D-TV CBL/SAT CBL/SAT POWER SYSTEM POWER STANDBY (D-TV Area) / (*2) STANDBY *1 In order to turn on some Yamaha components connected to this unit, connect those components to AC OUTLETS on the rear panel. *2 If the macro you select includes power on/off functions, the equipment may turn off if it is already on when you press the macro button. For example, if your TV is on and you press the SYSTEM POWER macro button, the TV turns off. Note: • Make sure you set up the manufacturer code (See page 61) or program a function using the Learn feature (See page 62) to the remote control for your component, or the factory preset macros do not work. 63 Remote Control Features ■ Operating the Macro Feature MACRO ON/OFF 1 Set MACRO ON/OFF to ON. 2 Press a Macro button. Notes: MACRO TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR LEARN MACRO OFF ON • When you are finished using the Macro feature, set MACRO ON/ OFF to OFF. SYSTEM POWER STANDBY V-AUX TAPE PHONO D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD Macro buttons • While the main unit is carrying out a macro program, the main unit does not receive any other button’s function until the macro is complete (the TRANSMIT indicator stops flashing). • Continue to aim the remote control at the equipment the macro is operating until the macro program is complete. % ENTER % TITLE % 6CH INPUT ■ Programming a Macro You can use the Macro feature to transmit many remote control commands by pressing a single button. 1 MACRO Press MACRO using a ball point pen or similar object. • If you do not initiate the procedure within 30 seconds, the macro programming process is canceled. SYSTEM V-AUX TAPE PHONO D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD 2 flashes alternately Press the macro button on which you want to program the Macro. • If you want to change the source component, use SOURCE SELECT % / or input buttons. When you use input buttons, input is selected as a Macro step, whereas SOURCE 6CH INPUT SELECT %/ % STANDBY % POWER only changes the component. Advanced Operation • The display window shows the button you chose for programming the macro and the component name in alternation. SYSTEM POWER STANDBY V-AUX TAPE PHONO D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD 3 DVD 1 % ENTER SOURCE % SELECT % POWER / DISPLAY MENU SEARCH % SOUND – CHAPTER + ! ! $ $ REC STOP PAUSE PLAY * # Press the buttons of the functions that you want to include in the macro sequence in order. • You can set up to 10 Macro steps (10 functions). (ex) (ex) % TITLE % 6CH INPUT indicates the number of macrosteps you entered 2 1 MCR1 : DVD input 2 MCR2 : DVD › 3 MCR3 : DVD # flashes alternately 3 MACRO MCR 1 : DVD input MCR 2 : DVD › MCR 3 : DVD # 4 Press MACRO again when the sequence you want to program is complete. • After you set 10 steps, “FULL” is displayed. Notes: • “NG” appears in the display window when programming is not done correctly. • “ERROR” appears in the display window in the following conditions: when pressing more than one button at once; and when MACRO ON/OFF is switched to another position. 64 Remote Control Features SYSTEM STANDBY V-AUX TAPE PHONO D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD RE-NAME MENU % POWER % SOUND ! ! $ $ REC STOP PAUSE PLAY * # / Use the cursor buttons % / to select a character. • Pressing changes the character in the following order: A~Z, a~z, 0~9, space, -(hyphen). – CHAPTER + SEARCH 3 RE-NAME % DISPLAY Press RE-NAME using a ballpoint pen or similar object. % % SELECT 2 % ENTER SOURCE Select the source component you want to rename by using the input buttons. % % % 6CH INPUT TITLE 1 % POWER English Changing the Source Name in the Display Window 4 Use the cursor buttons / to the next cursor postion. 5 Press RE-NAME to confirm renaming. to enter a character or move • If you want to rename another source component immediately, press ENTER and repeat steps 1, 3 and 4. Clearing a Learned Function or Macro SYSTEM POWER STANDBY V-AUX TAPE PHONO D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD MACRO 1 Select the source component that you want to clear on the window by using input buttons. 2 Press LEARN if you want to clear a learned function, or press MACRO to clear a programmed macro, using a ball point pen or similar object. 3 Press and hold CLEAR using a ball point pen or similar object, and at the same time press the button from which you want to clear the learned function or macro for about 3 seconds. or or LEARN flashes alternately While pressing CLEAR SYSTEM POWER STANDBY V-AUX TAPE PHONO D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 MACRO or LD DVD • “C:NG” appears in the display window if the operation is unsuccessful. Should this occur, try doing step 3 again. flashes alternately You can clear other learned functions and macros at this time by continuing to hold down CLEAR and pressing the other buttons on which those learned functions or macros are programmed. 4 Press LEARN again to confirm clearing a learned function, or press MACRO again to confirm clearing a programmed macro. LEARN • Once you clear a learned function or macro from a button, the button reverts to its factory preset function or macro. 65 Remote Control Features Clearing Learned Functions, Macros, Renamed Displays, and Manufacturer Setups ENTER SOURCE % SELECT % POWER DISPLAY MENU SEARCH % 2 Press % / to select the clear mode. The mode is shown in the window in the following order: SOUND – CHAPTER + ! ! $ $ REC STOP PAUSE PLAY * # / Press CLEAR using a ballpoint pen or similar object. % % % 6CH INPUT TITLE 1 % CLEAR (L: name of a component) Clears all learning functions of the component. Clears all learning functions of the main unit control area (see page 54). For example, when DVD is selected as the source component. Clears all learning functions. Clears all macros. Clears all renamed displays in the display window. Advanced Operation Clears all programmed functions including manufacturer code presets. This returns to the factory presets. CLEAR 3 Press and hold CLEAR again for about 3 seconds. • “C:NG” appears in the display window if the operation is unsuccessful. CLEAR 4 Press CLEAR to confirm clearing. • Once you clear a learned function or macro from a button, the button reverts to its factory preset function or macro. Notes: • If the remote control is without batteries for more than twenty minutes, or if worn out batteries remain in the unit, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries and program any acquired functions that may have been cleared. • “ERROR” appears in the display window for the following conditions: when pressing a button other than the cursor and ENTER; when pressing more than one button at once; and when one of MACRO ON/OFF, 10KEY/DSP, PARAMETER/SET MENU is switched to another position. 66 Adjusting the Levels of the Effect Speakers 1 Set PARAMETER/SET MENU to PARAMETER. 2 Press LEVEL to select the speaker(s) you want to adjust. English You can adjust the volume level of each effect speaker (Center, Right Rear, Rear Center, Left Rear, Front Effect, and Subwoofer) while listening to a music source. Center PARAMETER ON SCREEN LEVEL % SLEEP TEST SET MENU % Right Rear Rear Center Each time you press this button the selected speaker changes and appears in the front panel display only as follows: Center, Right Rear, Rear Center, Left Rear, Front Effect Speakers, and Subwoofer 3 Adjust the speaker volume level using the + or – on the remote control. You can adjust the Center, Right Rear, Rear Center, Left Rear, Front Effect Speakers from +10 dB to –10 dB. You can adjust the Subwoofer from 0 dB down to –20 dB. Left Rear Notes: Front • You cannot adjust the left and right speakers independently. • When you adjust the speaker level using LEVEL, the settings you made using the Dolby Surround Test and DSP Test change. • When PARAMETER/SET MENU is set to SET MENU, you cannot adjust the speaker level using LEVEL. However, each time you press LEVEL the current level setting of each speaker appears. Select the speaker level you want to check using % or . Subwoofer % Setting the Sleep Timer Use this feature to automatically turn off the main unit after the amount of time you set. The Sleep Timer is useful when you plan to fall asleep while the main unit is reproducing or recording a source. The Sleep Timer also automatically turns off external components connected to AC OUTLETS. The Sleep Timer can only be set using the remote control. ■ To set the Sleep Timer PARAMETER ON SCREEN LEVEL % SLEEP TEST SET MENU 1 Select a source using INPUT SELECTOR and start playback (or select a broadcast station) on the source component. 2 Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of time before the main unit automatically turns off. % Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. After a few seconds the display returns to the previous indication. = SLEEP 120 min = SLEEP 90 min SLEEP OFF + SLEEP 30 min + SLEEP 60 min + ■ To cancel the Sleep Timer 1 Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears in the front panel display. After a few seconds, the display returns to the previous indication. Note: • The Sleep Timer setting can also be canceled by turning off the main unit using STANDBY on the remote control (or STANDBY/ON on the front panel) or disconnecting the AC Power Cord from the AC outlet. 67 ZONE 2 You can make up a multi-room audio-video system with this unit. With this feature, you can set this unit to reproduce separate input sources in the main room and second (Zone 2) room using the supplied remote control in the second room. ONLY ANALOG SIGNALS ARE SENT TO THE SECOND ROOM. FOR ANY SOURCE YOU WISH TO LISTEN TO IN THE SECOND ROOM, YOU MUST CONNECT THE ANALOG OUTPUT FROM THE SOURCE TO THE CORRESPONDING ANALOG INPUT ON THIS UNIT. Connections To use the multi-room functions of this unit, you need the following additional equipment: • An infrared signal receiver in the second room • An infrared emitter in the main room This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control in the second room to the main room (for example, to a CD player or LD player). • An amplifier and speakers for the second room • A video monitor for the second room Notes: • Since there are so many ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-room installation, we recommend that you consult with a custom installation specialist for the Zone 2 connections which will best meet your requirements. OUT IN OUT IN Remote 1 OUT • Some Yamaha models are able to connect directly to the REMOTE 1 OUT jacks of this unit. If you own these products, you may not need to use an infrared emitter. Up to six Yamaha components can be connected as shown. This Unit ■ A sample of system configuration and connections VIDEO SIGNAL ZONE 2 OUT AUDIO SIGNAL ZONE 2 OUT Main Room Second Room Amplifier Advanced Operation DVD Player (or other component) Video monitor This Unit Remote control (in the Zone 2 mode) Infrared emitter Infrared signal receiver REMOTE 1 OUT REMOTE 1 IN ■ Special considerations when using DTS software The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Therefore, if you attempt to send the DTS signal to Zone 2, you will only be able to hear the digital noise sound that could damage your loudspeakers. Due to this characteristic of DTS encoded discs, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made. For DTS encoded LDs or DVDs Only 2-channel audio signals may be sent to Zone 2, as follows: • Laser disc – Set your Laser Disc player’s left and right outputs to the analog sound track. • DVD disc – Use the disc menu to set the DVD player’s mixed 2-channel left and right audio outputs to PCM or Dolby Digital. For DTS encoded compact discs DO NOT USE the Zone 2 feature with DTS encoded compact discs. 68 ZONE 2 English Remote Control in ZONE 2 In the second (Zone 2) room, the supplied remote control can be used as the Zone 2 remote control. You can select the input source and control the component which is located in the main room directly from the second room regardless of the listening condition in the main room. 1 Press SOURCE SELECT % to display ZONE2 in the display window. SOURCE % DISPLAY SELECT SEAR % ! 2 Use the input buttons to select the input source you want to listen to. SYSTEM POWER STANDBY V-AUX TAPE PHONO D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD • The display window shows “2: name of selected input” if the remote control is in the Zone 2 mode. 3 You can control the component using the Component Control Area buttons. % ENTER % SOURCE % DISPLAY SELECT % POWER MENU SOUND ! ! $ $ REC STOP PAUSE PLAY * # JAZZ CLUB HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO 1 CONCERT VIDEO 2 6 7 8 5 6.1/ES TV THEATER • VOLUME + / – can be used to adjust the volume if you set the SET MENU item 18. ZONE2 SET, ZONE2 OUT to “VAR.” (see page 53). – CHAPTER + SEARCH / 10KEY DSP Note: % TITLE % 6CH INPUT MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX A / B / C / D / E PRESET + TV INPUT TV VOL – + MUTE CH TV MUTE – + VOLUME EFFECT VOLUME – DISC 69 Additional Information Digital Sound Field Processing (DSP) 71 Understanding Sound Fields ............................................................................. 71 Recreating a Sound Field .................................................................................. 71 E/R (Early Reflection) ...................................................................................... 71 4ch REV. (Four Channel Reverberation) .......................................................... 71 Illustration of the Virtual Sound Sources and Echo Patterns ............................ 71 Hi-Fi DSP-Sound Field Program Program Group 1 Program Group 2 Program Group 3 Program Group 4 Program Group 5 Program Group 6 : : : : : : 72 Concert Hall 1 .................................................................. 72 Concert Hall 2 .................................................................. 72 Church .............................................................................. 72 Jazz Club .......................................................................... 72 Rock Concert ................................................................... 72 Entertainment ................................................................... 72 CINEMA-DSP 73 The Sound Design of CINEMA-DSP Sound Field Programs .......................... 73 Sound Field Images of the CINEMA-DSP Programs ....................................... 73 Movie Theater Programs ................................................................................... 74 CINEMA-DSP Sound Field Program 75 Program Group 7 : Concert Video 1 ............................................................... 76 Program Group 8 : Concert Video 2 ............................................................... 76 Program Group 9 : TV Theater ....................................................................... 76 Program Group 10 : Movie Theater 1 .............................................................. 76 Program Group 11 : Movie Theater 2 .............................................................. 76 Program Group 12 : Dolby/DTS Surround ...................................................... 76 Additional Information Sound Field Program Parameter Editing 77 Changing Parameter Settings ............................................................................ 77 Resetting a Parameter to the Factory Preset Value ........................................... 77 Digital Sound Field Parameter Descriptions 78 EFCT TRIM (Effect Trim) ............................................................................... 78 INIT. DLY (Initial Delay) ................................................................................. 78 P. INIT. DLY (Presence Initial Delay) ............................................................. 78 RC. INIT. DLY (Rear Center Initial Delay) ..................................................... 78 S. INIT. DLY (Surround Initial Delay) ............................................................ 78 S. DLY (Surround Delay) ................................................................................. 79 ROOM SIZE ..................................................................................................... 79 RC. ROOM SIZE (Rear Center Room Size) .................................................... 80 S. ROOM SIZE (Surround Room Size) ............................................................ 80 LIVENESS ........................................................................................................ 80 S. LIVENESS (Surround Liveness) .................................................................. 80 RC LIVENESS (Rear Center Liveness) ........................................................... 80 REV. TIME (Reverberation Time) ................................................................... 81 REV. DELAY (Reverberation Delay) .............................................................. 81 REV. LEVEL (Reverberation Level) ............................................................... 81 70 Digital Sound Field Processing (DSP) English Understanding Sound Fields A sound field is defined as the “characteristic sound reflections of a particular space.” In concert halls and other music venues, we hear early reflections and reverberations as well as the direct sound produced by the artist(s). The variations in the early reflections and other reverberations among the different music venues is what gives each venue its special and recognizable sound quality. Yamaha sent teams of sound engineers all around the world to measure the sound reflections of famous concert halls and music venues, and collect detailed sound field information such as the direction, strength, range, and delay time of those reflections. Then we stored this enormous amount of data in the ROM chips of the RX-V1. Recreating the sound field of a concert hall or an opera house requires localizing the virtual sound sources in your listening room. The traditional stereo system that uses only two speakers is not capable of recreating a realistic sound field. Yamaha’s DSP requires four effect speakers to recreate sound fields based on the measured sound field data. The processor controls the strength and delay time of the signals output from the four effect speakers to localize the virtual sound sources in a full circle around the listener. FR L R R The DSP sound field programs can be classified in two types based on the sound field processing method: programs that use early reflections only and programs that use both early reflections and reverberation. R FL Recreating a Sound Field E/R (Early Reflection) Each sound field is distinguished by the structure of the reflected sound. The increased processing capability of DSP technology enables Yamaha engineers to incorporate even minute reflections with long delay times into the sound field data. 4ch REV. (Four Channel Reverberation) This type of program consists of early reflections and high quality digital reverberation processing. Reverberation is the most important element for recreating the sound field of a church. To recreate a realistic spatial sound image from reverberation data, Yamaha has adapted the four-channel-output reverberation technology. Illustration of the Virtual Sound Sources and Echo Patterns The virtual sound sources and echo patterns for the DSP sound field programs are shown below. The illustration of the virtual sound sources shows early reflection sound only and the illustration of the echo patterns shows both reflected sound and reverberation. Echo Patterns Virtual Sound Sources The center of these circles represent the virtual sound source. The size of the circle indicates the strength of the virtual sound source. Direct sound source Early reflections Reverbration 50~80 mSec The direct sound source The listening position 71 Hi-Fi DSP-Sound Field Program Program Group 1 : Concert Hall 1 ■ Europe Hall A This is a large fan-shaped concert hall in Munich which has approximately 2500 seats. Almost the whole interior is made of wood. There is relatively little reflection from the walls, and sound spreads finely and beautifully. ■ Europe Hall B This is a large shoe-box type concert hall with less than 2400 seats located in Frankfurt. This hall has a very solid, powerful sound. The listener’s virtual seat is in the center-right section on the first floor. ■ Europe Hall C A classic shoe-box type concert hall with approximately 1700 seats. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections which produce a very full, rich sound. Program Group 2 : Concert Hall 2 ■ U.S.A. Hall D This is a large 2600 seat concert hall in the United States which features a fairly traditional European design. The interior is relatively simple, in the American style. The middle and high frequencies are richly and beautifully reinforced. ■ Europe Hall E This is a large 2200 seat shoe-box type concert hall in Amsterdam. It has a circular stage with seats located behind the stage. ■ Live Concert A large round concert hall with a rich surround effect. Pronounced reflections from all directions emphasize the extension of sounds. The sound field has a great deal of presence, and your virtual seat is near the center, close to the stage. Program Group 3 : Church ■ Tokyo The acoustic environment of an ordinary church with moderate reverberations. The reverberation lasts 2.5 seconds. This is ideal for reproducing church organ and choral music. ■ Freiburg This program recreates the acoustic environment of a big church located in south Germany. The reverberation delay is very long while the early reflections are smaller than with other sound field programs. ■ Royaumont This program features the sound field created by the refectory (dining hall) of a beautiful medieval Gothic monastery located in Royaumont on the outskirts of Paris. Program Group 4 : Jazz Club ■ Village Gate This is the sound field at a jazz club in New York. It is in a basement and has a relatively spacious floor area. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall. ■ Village Vanguard A traditional jazz club in New York, located on 7th Avenue. This room has a low ceiling, and the “stage” is located in a corner. This program creates an intimate “close-to-the music” feel. ■ The Bottom Line This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering a real and vibrant sound. Program Group 5 : Rock Concert Additional Information ■ Roxy Theatre The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left of the hall. ■ Warehouse Loft This program simulates a space enclosed by concrete. An energetic sound field is created with relatively clear reflections from the walls. ■ Arena A classic shoe-box type concert hall. This program gives you long delays between direct sounds and effect sounds, with the extraordinarily spacious feel of a large arena. Program Group 6 : Entertainment ■ Disco This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by a high-energy, “immediate” sound. 72 ■ Party This is a sound field suitable for background music at parties where you can hear the sound directly from the rear as well, thus realizing music enjoyment over a wide area. ■ Game/Amusement This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds and is also suitable for karaoke. CINEMA-DSP English The Sound Design of CINEMA-DSP Sound Field Programs Filmmakers intend the dialog to be located right on the screen, the effect sound a little farther back, the music spread even farther back, and the surround sound around the listener. Of course, all of these sounds must be synchronized with the images on the screen. CINEMA-DSP is an upgraded version of YAMAHA DSP specially designed for movie soundtracks. CINEMA-DSP integrates the DTS, Dolby Digital, and Dolby Pro Logic surround sound technologies with YAMAHA DSP sound field programs to provide the surround sound field. It recreates the most complete movie sound design in your audio room. In CINEMA-DSP sound field programs, Yamaha’s exclusive DSP processing is added to the front left, center, and right channels, so the listener can enjoy realistic dialogue, depth of sound, smooth transition between sound sources, and a surround sound field that goes beyond the screen. When a DTS or Dolby Digital signal is detected, the CINEMA-DSP sound field processor automatically chooses the most suitable sound field program for that signal. L SURROUND SOUND FIELD PRESENCE SOUND FIELD DIALOG EFFECT MUSIC R SURROUND SOUND FIELD AV ROOM Sound Field Images of the CINEMA-DSP Programs Each CINEMA-DSP program has its own type of sound field processing block. The sound field data, including the presence and surround sound fields, are based on actual measured data. The presence and surround sound fields can be expressed in the distribution of virtual sound sources and echo patterns. However, as these two types of sound fields are processed with complex elements such as energy balance and mixing signal ratios, they are expressed as a sound field based on auditory perception. Dolby Digital or DTS input Stereo input Presence sound field Presence sound field Sound source Front sound source Screen Listening position Screen Listening position Listening room Listening room Left surround sound source Left surround sound field Surround sound field Right surround sound source Right surround sound field Reverberation Reverberation 73 CINEMA-DSP Movie Theater Programs Most movie software has four-channel (left, center, right and surround) sound information encoded using Dolby Surround matrix processing and stored on the left and right tracks. These signals are processed by the Dolby Pro Logic decoder. The Movie Theater Programs are designed to recreate the spaciousness and delicate nuances of sound that tend to be lost in the encoding and decoding processes. The six-channel soundtracks found on 70 mm film produce precise sound field localization and rich, deep sound without using matrix processing. The RX-V1’s Movie Theater 70 mm Programs provide the same quality of sound and sound localization that six-channel soundtracks do. The built-in Dolby Digital decoder brings the professional quality sound designed for movie theaters, into your home. With the RX-V1’s Movie Theater program, you can recreate a dynamic sound that gives you the feeling of being at a public theater in your living room using the Dolby Digital technology. ■ Dolby Pro Logic + DSP Sound Field Effect These programs express an immense sound field and a large surround effect. They also give depth to the sound from the Main Speakers to recreate the realistic sound of a Dolby Stereo theater. Presence DSP Sound Field Surround DSP Sound Field ■ Dolby Digital/DTS + DSP Sound Field Effect These programs use Yamaha’s tri-field DSP process on each of the Dolby Digital signals for the front, left surround, and right surround channels. This processing enables the RX-V1 to reproduce the immense sound field and surround expression of a Dolby Digital equipped movie theater without sacrificing the clear separation of all channels. Additional Information Presence DSP Sound Field Left Surround DSP Sound Field Right Surround DSP Sound Field ■ Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1/DTS ES + DSP Sound Field Effect These programs provide you the maximum experience of the spacious surround effects since an extra Rear Center DSP sound field created from the Rear Center channel is added. 74 CINEMA-DSP Sound Field Program According to the input signal format, the RX-V1 automatically chooses the appropriate decoder and DSP sound field pattern. English Table of Program Names for Each Input Format Input Stereo (2ch) DOLBY DIGITAL (5.1ch) DTS (5.1ch) DOLBY DIGITAL (6.1ch)* DTS ES (6.1ch)* Pop/Rock –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– DJ –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– Classical/Opera –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– Pavilion –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– Mono Movie –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– Variety/Sports –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– Program Group 7 CONCERT VIDEO 1 8 CONCERT VIDEO 2 9 TV THEATER 10 MOVIE THEATER 1 11 MOVIE THEATER 2 PRO LOGIC 12 70 mm Spectacle DGTL Spectacle DTS Spectacle Spectacle 6.1 Spectacle ES 70 mm Sci-Fi DGTL Sci-Fi DTS Sci-Fi Sci-Fi 6.1 Sci-Fi ES 70 mm Adventure DGTL Adventure DTS Adventure Adventure 6.1 Adventure ES 70 mm General DGTL General DTS General General 6.1 General ES Normal –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– Enhanced –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– DOLBY DIGITAL DTS DIGITAL SUR –––––––– Normal –––––––– Matrix 6.1 –––––––– –––––––– Enhanced –––––––– Enhanced 6.1 –––––––– –––––––– –––––––– Normal –––––––– ES –––––––– –––––––– Enhanced –––––––– Enhanced ES * The Matrix decoder is ON. ■ Program Groups 7~9 These are sound field programs for the audio-video sources. ■ Program Groups 10~12 Ideal for reproducing a movie program which is encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital, or DTS. When the newest movie program encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS ES is input, you can enjoy the full 6.1 channel reproduction using the internal Matrix decoder. PRO LOGIC functions when the input signal is analog or PCM audio, or encoded with Dolby Digital in two channels. DOLBY DIGITAL functions when the input signal is encoded with Dolby Digital in more than two channels. DTS DIGITAL SUR functions when the input signal is encoded with DTS. Note: • No sound wil be output from the Main speakers when a monaural source is played with sound field Program Groups 7~12. 75 CINEMA-DSP Sound Field Program Program Group 7 : Concert Video 1 ■ Pop/Rock This program produces an enthusiastic atmosphere and lets you feel as if you are at an actual jazz or rock concert. ■ DJ The sound field makes the voice of a disc jockey sound clearer. Program Group 8 : Concert Video 2 ■ Classical/Opera This program provides excellent vocal depth and overall clarity by restraining excessive reverberation. The surround sound field is relatively moderate but it reproduces beautiful sound using data collected from a concert hall. ■ Pavilion This program reproduces vocals clearly, letting you feel the spaciousness of a pavilion. Reverberation, which is somewhat delayed, reproduces the live acoustics unique to a pavilion, and helps to make concert scenes more exciting. Program Group 9 : TV Theater ■ Mono Movie This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth using only the presence sound field. ■ Variety/Sports Though the presence sound field is relatively narrow, the surround sound field employs the sound environment of a large concert hall. With this program, you can enjoy watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs. Program Group 10 : Movie Theater 1 ■ Spectacle This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70 mm movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the sound fields incredibly real. This program is ideal for any kind of Dolby Surround video source (especially large-scale movie productions). ■ Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces the broad and expansive cinematic space from the soundtracks of the latest science fiction films. Program Group 11 : Movie Theater 2 ■ Adventure Additional Information This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest 70 mm and multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible. ■ General This program is for reproducing sounds from 70 mm and multichannel soundtrack films, and is characterized by a soft and extensive sound field. The presence sound field is relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all around and toward the screen, restraining the effect of conversations without losing clarity. Program Group 12 : Dolby/DTS Surround ■ Normal/Matrix 6.1/ES The built-in decoder precisely reproduces sounds and sound effects from sources. The highly efficient decoding process improves crosstalk and channel separation and makes sound positioning smoother and more precise. In this program, no DSP effect is applied. 76 ■ Enhanced/6.1/ES This program ideally simulates the multiple surround speaker systems of 35 mm film theaters. The Dolby Surround decoding and the digital sound field processing create precise effects without altering the original sound orientation. The surround effects produced by this sound field wrap around the viewer naturally from the back to the left and right and toward the screen. Sound Field Program Parameter Editing English You can enjoy good quality sound with the pre-set parameters. Although you do not have to change the initial settings, you can change some of the parameters to better suit the input source or your listening room. Changing Parameter Settings Set PARAMETER/SET MENU to PARAMETER on the remote control. 2 Turn on your video monitor and press ON SCREEN to select the full display. 3 Select the sound field program you want to adjust. 4 Press 5 Press + or – to change the parameter value. SET MENU Program Type (subprogram) Program No. Program Name % PARAMETER 1 or % to select the parameter. When you set the parameter to a value other than the factory preset value, an asterisk mark appears by the parameter name on the monitor screen. 6 Cursor Repeat steps 3 through 5 above as necessary to change other program parameters. Parameters Example of the CONCERT HALL 1 Resetting a Parameter to the Factory Preset Value ■ To reset some of the parameters to the factory preset values Select the parameter you want to reset. Then, press and hold + or – until the value stops at the factory preset value temporarily. (The asterisk mark by the parameter name disappears on the video monitor.) ■ To reset all of the parameters back to the factory preset values Use the SET MENU to reset all of the parameter values of all DSP programs within the selected group to the factory preset values (see page 51). This operation resets all of the parameter values of all DSP programs within that group to the factory preset values. Notes: % • The available parameters may be displayed on more than one OSD page for some of the programs. To scroll through pages, press or % . • When “MEMORY GUARD!” appears on the screen, the Memory Guard function is on, and you cannot change parameter values. Turn off the Memory Guard function using the SET MENU (see page 52). 77 Digital Sound Field Parameter Descriptions You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program. EFCT TRIM (Effect Trim) Function .................... This parameter adjusts the level of all the effect sounds within a narrow range. Control Range ........... –3 dB - +3 dB Description ................ Depending on the acoustics of your listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the effect level relative to the direct sound. INIT. DLY (Initial Delay) Function .................... This parameter changes the apparent distance from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener. Control Range ........... 1 - 99 milliseconds Description ................ The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. The larger the value, the farther the apparent distance seems. For a small room, this parameter would be set to a small value, for a large room, set it to a large value. Level Level Sound Source Time INIT. DLY Primary Reflected Sound Time Time INIT. DLY INIT. DLY Sound Source Reflection Face Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms P. INIT. DLY (Presence Initial Delay) Function .................... This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the presence sound field. Control Range ........... 1 - 99 milliseconds Description ................ The larger the value, the later the first reflection begins. RC. INIT. DLY (Rear Center Initial Delay) Function .................... This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the rear center sound field. Additional Information Control Range ........... 1 - 49 milliseconds Description ................ The larger the value, the later the first reflection begins. S. INIT. DLY (Surround Initial Delay) Function .................... This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the surround side of the sound field. You can only adjust this parameter when at least two front channels and two rear channels are used. Control Range ........... 1 - 49 milliseconds Description ................ The larger the value, the later the first reflection begins. You can only adjust this parameter for the Dolby Digital and DTS signals. 78 Digital Sound Field Parameter Descriptions English S. DLY (Surround Delay) Function .................... This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the surround sound field. Control Range ........... 0 - 49 milliseconds (The range depends on the signal format.) Description ................ When Dolby Digital signals are decoded: the larger the parameter, the later the surround sound source begins. When a non-Dolby Digital program is decoded: the larger the parameter, the later the surround sound field begins. No surround sound source is produced. Others Dolby Digital or DTS Input The surround sound field is not reproduced. Direct Sound Direct Sound SURROUND (LS/RS) S Sound Field Level Level S Sound Field S. DELAY S. INIT. DELAY Time S. DELAY Time ROOM SIZE Function .................... This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. Control Range ........... 0.1 - 2.0 Description ................ As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from one to two, doubles the apparent length of the room. Level Level Primary Reflected Sound Time Small value Time Level Sound Source Time Large value Sound Source Small value = 0.1 Large value = 2.0 79 Digital Sound Field Parameter Descriptions RC. ROOM SIZE (Rear Center Room Size) Function .................... This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the rear center sound field. Control Range ........... 0.1 - 2.0 Description ................ The larger the value, the more reflective the presence sound field walls become. S. ROOM SIZE (Surround Room Size) Function .................... This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. Control Range ........... 0.1 - 2.0 Description ................ The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. LIVENESS Function .................... This parameter adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. Control Range ........... 0 - 10 Description ................ The early reflections of a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as “dead,” while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live.” The LIVENESS parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the “liveness” of the room. Level Level Level Source Sound Live Dead Time Time Time Source Sound Small Reflected Sound Small value = 0 Large Reflected Sound Large value = 10 S. LIVENESS (Surround Liveness) Function .................... This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual walls in the surround sound field. Control Range ........... 0 - 10 Additional Information Description ................ The larger the value, the more reflective the surround sound field walls become. RC. LIVENESS (Rear Center Liveness) Function .................... This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual wall in the rear center sound field. Control Range ........... 0 - 10 Description ................ The larger the value, the more reflective the surround sound field walls become. 80 Digital Sound Field Parameter Descriptions English REV. TIME (Reverberation Time) Function .................... This parameter adjusts the amount of time it takes for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB (at 1 kHz). This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range. Control Range ........... 1.0 - 5.0 seconds Description ................ Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening room environments and a shorter time for “live” sources and listening room environments. Reverberation Source Sound Primary Reflected Sound 60 dB 60 dB 60 dB Reverberation REV. TIME Source Sound Reverberation REV. TIME REV. TIME Short Reverberation Long Reverberation Small value = 1.0 s Large value = 5.0 s REV. DELAY (Reverberation Delay) Function .................... This parameter adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the reverberation sound. Control Range ........... 0 - 250 milliseconds Level Description ................ The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel like you are in a larger acoustic environment. Source Sound (dB) 60 dB Reverberation Time REV. DELAY REV TIME REV. LEVEL (Reverberation Level) Function .................... This parameter adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. Control Range ........... 0 - 100% Level Description ................ The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes. Source Sound REV LEVEL Time 81 Appendix Appendix 82 Troubleshooting 83 Reference Chart for the INPUT and OUTPUT Jacks 87 CINEMA - EQ Frequency Characteristics 87 Specifications 88 Troubleshooting English Refer to the chart below when the RX-V1 does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, turn the power off, disconnect the power cord, and contact your dealer or the nearest Yamaha Audio Products Service Department. After this unit is exposed to strong external electric shock (such as lightning and large static electricity) or you mishandle the operation of this unit, it may not function properly. In these cases, turn the power off, unplug the power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, and start operating. General Possible Cause What to Do The power cord is not plugged in or is not completely inserted. Plug in the power cord securely (see page 24). IMPEDANCE SELECTOR on the rear panel is not set correctly. Set the switch completely to either position (depending on your speakers) while this unit is in standby mode (see page 22). The protection circuitry has been activated. Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection does not touch anything other than its respective connection. There is a faulty cable connection. Connect the audio plugs securely. If the problem persists, the cords may be defective. No connection from the turntable to the GND terminal. Connect the grounding cord of your turntable to the GND terminal of this unit (see page 16). The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. Faulty or incorrect input or output connection. Connect the equipment correctly. If the problem persists, the cords may be defective. Incorrect input source. Select the appropriate input source with INPUT SELECTOR. This unit is set to DTS input mode. Press INPUT MODE to select another input mode Digital signals other than PCM audio, Dolby Digital, or DTS encoded signals are input to this unit by playing a CD-ROM, etc. Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce. No picture The source equipment is connected to this unit using an S-video cable, but there is no S-video connection between this unit and your video monitor. Connect this unit’s S VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminal to the TV’s S-video input terminal or disconnect the S-video cable from the source equipment. No sound is coming from one side. There is a faulty cable connection. Connect all cables securely. If the problem persists, the cords may be defective. BALANCE is turned all the way to one side. Adjust BALANCE. MUTE is on. Turn VOLUME to minimum, press MUTE to restore audio, and adjust the volume again. The equipment connected to the TAPE/ MD OUT jacks of this unit is turned off. Turn on the power to the equipment. The protection circuitry has been activated because of short circuit etc. Reset the protection circuitry by turning the unit off and on. The SLEEP timer came on. Cancel the SLEEP timer function. Problem The unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON is pressed, or returns to standby mode suddenly soon after the power is turned on. Hum No Sound or no picture The volume level cannot be increased very much when adjusting VOLUME. The sound suddenly goes off. 83 Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause The effect is off. What to Do A Dolby Surround or DTS decoding sound field program is being used with material not encoded with Dolby Surround or DTS. Select another sound field program. PRO LOGIC/Normal, DOLBY DIGITAL/ Normal or DTS DIGITAL SUR./Normal of DSP program 12 is selected. Select another sound field program. The front level is turned to minimum. Adjust the Front Effect speaker level (see page 67). The 1F. FRNT EFCT item in the SET MENU is set to “NONE”. Select “YES” (see page 45). The 1A. CENTER SP item in the SET MENU is set to “NONE”. Select the appropriate mode for your Center speaker (see page 43). One of the Hi-Fi DSP sound field programs (1 to 6) is selected. Select another sound field program. The input signals of a source encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS do not include center channel signals. Refer to the instructions for the source currently playing. The right and left Rear speaker levels are set to minimum. Increase the right and left Rear speaker levels (see page 67). A monaural source is played with sound field program 12. Select another sound field program. The 1E. LFE/BASS OUT item in the SET MENU is set to “MAIN” when a Dolby Digital or DTS encoded software is played. Select “SW” or “BOTH” (see page 44). The 1E. LFE/BASS OUT item in the SET MENU is set to “SW” or “MAIN” when a 2channel encoded software is played. Select “BOTH” (see page 44). The 1E. LFE/BASS OUT item in the SET MENU is set to “SW” or “BOTH” and your system does not include a subwoofer. Select “MAIN” (see page 44). The output mode selection for each channel (MAIN, CENTER or REAR) in the SET MENU does not match your speaker configuration. Select the appropriate output mode for each channel based on the size of the speakers in your configuration (see pages 43 through 44). The volume level cannot be increased, or sound is distorted. The power to the equipment connected to the REC OUT jacks of this unit is off. Turn on the power to the equipment. DSP parameters and some other settings on this unit cannot be changed. The 13. MEMORY GUARD item in the SET MENU is set to “ON”. Select “OFF” (see page 52). This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet, then plug it in again after about one minute. No sound is coming from the Effect speakers. No sound is coming from the Front Effect speakers. No sound is coming from the Center speaker. No sound is coming from the Rear Effect speakers. No sound is coming from the Subwoofer. Appendix Poor bass reproduction. 84 Press EFFECT to turn on the effect sound. Troubleshooting Possible Cause What to Do A source cannot be recorded by a tape deck or VCR connected to this unit. The source unit is connected to this unit using digital jacks only. Make additional connections to the analog jacks (see pages 16 through 19). CHECK SP WIRES!" appears on the display. Speaker cables are short circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. There is noise from a nearby TV or tuner. This unit is too close to the affected equipment. Move this unit farther away from the affected equipment. The sound is degraded when listening with the headphones connected to the CD player or cassette deck that are connected to this unit. The power to this unit is off. Turn on the power to this unit. “INPUT DATA ERROR” appears on the display and no sound is heard. A non-standard source is played back, or the equipment playing back the source is not operating correctly. Check the source, or turn off the source equipment, then turn it on again. Possible Cause What to Do FM stereo reception is noisy. Because of the characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts, this is limited to cases where the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. Check the antenna connections. Try using a high quality directional FM antenna. Set TUNING MODE to the manual tuning mode. There is distortion and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multipath interference. Adjust the antenna orientation to eliminate multipath interference. A desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The station is too weak. Use the manual tuning method. Use a high quality directional FM antenna. Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned in using preset tuning. This unit has been unplugged for a long period. Repeat the presetting procedure (see page 36). A desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. Weak signal or loose antenna connections. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and adjust the antenna’s orientation for best reception. English Problem Tuner FM Problem AM Use the manual tuning method. There are continuous crackling and hissing noises. Noises result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat but it is difficult to eliminate all the noises. There are buzzing and whining noises (especially in the evening). A television set is being used nearby. Relocate this unit away from the TV. 85 Troubleshooting Remote Control Problem The remote control does not work. The remote control does not function properly. The remote control does not “learn” new functions. (The TRANSMIT indicator does not light up or flash.) Appendix Continuous functions such as volume are learned, but operate only for a moment before stopping. 86 Possible Cause What to Do The batteries are dead. Replace the batteries with new ones and press RESET (see page 5). The internal microcomputer has “frozen”. Press RESET on the remote control (see page 5). Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6 m (20 feet), no more than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel (see page 5). Direct sunlight or lighting (such as an inverter type of fluorescent lamp) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Change the position of this unit. The internal microcomputer has “frozen”. Press RESET on the remote control (see page 5). The batteries of this remote control and/or the other remote control are too weak. Replace the batteries (and press RESET on the remote control) (see page 5). The distance between the two remote controls is too far or near. Place the remote controls at the proper distance (see page 62). The signal coding or modulation of the other remote control is not compatible with this remote control. Learning is not possible. Memory capacity is full. Further learning is not possible without deleting unnecessary new functions (see page 66). The internal microcomputer has “frozen”. Press RESET on the remote control (see page 5). The learning process is incomplete. Be sure to press and hold the function button on the other remote control until TRANSMIT begins flashing slowly. Reference Chart for the INPUT and OUTPUT Jacks DIGITAL ANALOG IN OUT Ο Ο PHONO CD TUNER TAPE MD DVD LD D-TV CBL/SAT VCR 1, 2, 3 V-AUX 6 CH INPUT SUBWOOFER ZONE 2 OUT MONITOR OUT SPEAKER OUT HEADPHONES COAXIAL OPTICAL IN IN OUT Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο IN OUT S-VIDEO OUT IN COMPONENT OUT IN OUT Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο ∗2 Ο RF Ο Ο COMPOSITE English VIDEO AUDIO SIGNAL Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο ∗3 Ο Ο ∗1 Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο ΟΟ Ο ∗4 Ο Ο ∗1 Ο ∗1 ΟΟ Ο *1 This input can be changed to another video input by using the SET MENU. *2 Only for VCR 1 *3 SPLIT L,R, and MONO outputs *4 MAIN L,R, CENTER, FRONT L,R, REAR L,R, and REAR CENTER total 8 channels CINEMA - EQ Frequency Characteristics Cinema EQ is a digital equalizer that lets you independently adjust the sound quality of each speaker. ■HIGH (High Shelving Filter): Adjusts high ■PEQ (Parametric Equalizer): Allows frequency response smoothly. There are 16 responses affecting frequencies in the 1 to 12.7 kHz range, while gain is adjusted between +6 and –9 dB. smooth boost and cut at an arbitrary frequency range. The center frequency can be in the 1 to 12.7 kHz range, with gain between +6 and –9 dB. ▲ HIGH Frequency Range ▲ PEQ Frequency GAIN +6 ~ –9 dB Range +6 GAIN +6 ~ –9 dB +3 +3 G 0 A –3 I N –6 G 0 A –3 I N –6 –9 –9 20 50 100 200 500 1k 2k 5k 10k 20k 20 50 100 200 FRQ Range FRQ Range 2k 5k 10k 20k FRQ 1.0 ~ 12.7 kHz Q 1.85 (fixed) +6 +3 1.0k 1.2k 1.6k 2.0k 2.5k 3.2k 4.0k 5.0k 5.7k 6.3k 7.1k 8.0k 9.0k 10.1k 11.3k 12.7kHz G A I N –9 20 1k ▲ PEQ Frequency 1.0 ~ 12.7 kHz +6 G 0 A I –3 N –6 500 FRQ ▲ HIGH Frequency +3 Q 1.85 (fixed) +6 0 –3 –6 1.0k 1.2k 1.6k 2.0k 2.5k 3.2k 4.0k 5.0k 5.7k 6.3k 7.1k 8.0k 9.0k 10.1k 11.3k 12.7kHz –9 50 100 200 500 FRQ 1k 2k 5k 10k 20k 20 50 100 200 500 1k 2k 5k 10k 20k FRQ 87 Specifications Audio Section FM Section Minimum RMS Output Power per Channel Tuning Range ---------------------------------------- 87.5 to 107.9 MHz MAIN L/R, CENTER, REAR L/R/C (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.015% THD, 8 ohms) ------------ 110 W FRONT L/R (1 kHz, 0.05% THD, 8 ohms) ------------ 35 W [Australia model] -------------------------- 87.5 to 108.0 MHz 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF, 75 ohms, 100% mod., 1 kHz) Mono ------------------------------------------ 1.6 µV (15.3 dBf) Stereo ------------------------------------------ 23 µV (38.5 dBf) Dynamic Power (IHF) MAIN L/R (8/6/4/2 ohms) -------------- 150/180/240/340 W Usable Sensitinity (75 ohms) [Australia model only] DIN, Mono (S/N 26 dB) -------------------------------- 0.9 µV Dynamic Headroom MAIN L/R (8 ohms) -------------------------------------- 1.3 dB Power Band Width DIN, Stereo (S/N 46 dB) --------------------------------- 28 µV Signal-to-Noise Ratio MAIN L/R (55 W, 0.04% THD, 8 ohms) (IHF) Mono/Stereo ------------------------------- 81 dB/75 dB --------------------------------------------------- 10 Hz to 50 kHz [Australia model] Damping Factor (DIN Weighted, 40 kHz Dev.) Mono/Stereo MAIN L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 ohms) --------- 200 or more Input Sensitivity/Impedance (110 W/8 ohms) ------------------------------------------------------- 75 dB/69 dB Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) CD, etc. -------------------------------------- 150 mV/47k-ohms Mono/Stereo -------------------------------------------- 0.1/0.2% PHONO MM -------------------------------- 2.5 mV/47k-ohms Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ----------------------------------------- 48 dB MAIN IN ----------------------------------------- 1 V/47k-ohms Frequency Response Output Level/Impedance 20 Hz to 15 kHz ------------------------------------------ 0±1 dB REC OUT ----------------------------------- 150 mV/600 ohms MAIN OUT ------------------------------------- 1 V/1.2 k-ohms SUBWOOFER [SPLIT L/R] ----------------- 2 V/1.2 k-ohms [MONO] ----------------- 4 V/1.2 k-ohms PHONES Output ------------------------------------ 150 mV/100 ohms Frequency Response (10 Hz to 100 kHz) CD, etc. to MAIN L/R SP. OUT ------------------------ –3 dB AM Section Tuning Range ------------------------------------------ 530 to 1,710 kHz [Australia model] ---------------------------- 531 to 1,611 kHz Usable Sensitivity --------------------------------------------- 300 µV/m Signal-to-Noise Ratio ---------------------------------------------- 52 dB Total Harmonic Distortion (20 Hz to 20 kHz) CD, etc. to MAIN OUT (1 V) ----------------- 0.005% or less MAIN IN to SP OUT (55 W/8 ohms) -------- 0.005% or less Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A network) (Input shorted, EFFECT off) ------------------ 96 dB or more Residual Noise (IHF-A network) MAIN L/R SP. OUT --------------------------- 150 µV or less Channel Separation (Vol –30 dB, 5.1 k-ohms terminated) 1 kHz/10 kHz ---------------------------- 70 dB/60 dB or more Tone Control (MAIN L/R) General Power Supply -------------------------------------- AC 120 V, 50/60 Hz [Australia model] --------------------------- AC 240 V, 50 Hz Power Consumption ----------------------------------------------- 550 W AC Outlets (Total 120 W maximum) ------------------- 3 (Switched) [Australia model] (100 W maximum) --------- 1 (Switched) Dimensions (W x H x D) ------------------------- 471 x 211 x 473 mm (18-1/2” x 8-1/4” x 18-5/8”) Bass Boost/Cut --------------------------------- ±10 dB (50 Hz) Weight ----------------------------------------------- 28 kg (61 lbs 11oz) Treble Boost/Cut ----------------------------- ±10 dB (20 kHz) Accessories ----------------------------------------------- Remote control Bass Extension ---------------------------------- +6 dB (60 Hz) Alkaline batteries Quick reference guide Video Section Video Signal Type ------------------------------------------------- NTSC AM loop antenna Indoor FM antenna Antenna adapter (Except for Australia model) [Australia model] ------------------------------------------- PAL Composite Video Signal Level ----------------------- 1 Vp-p/75 ohms S-Video Signal Level Y ------------------------------------------------- 1 Vp-p/75 ohms Appendix C -------------------------------------------- 0.286 Vp-p/75 ohms Component Video Signal Level Y ------------------------------------------------- 1 Vp-p/75 ohms PB/CB, PR/CR --------------------------------- 0.7 Vp-p/75 ohms Maximum Input Level ------------------------------------------ 1.5 Vp-p Signal to Noise Ratio ------------------------------------ 50 dB or more 88 Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT) ------------------- 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB *Specifications are subject to change without notice. YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA Printed in Japan V482920-1 Quick Reference Card ■ Remote Control ■ TUNER ■ CD SYSTEM CLEAR LEARN MACRO OFF ON TAPE PHONO POWER STANDBY V-AUX TAPE D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD DVD VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD TITLE % ENTER VCR 1 POWER STANDBY V-AUX TAPE PHONO D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD VCR 2 LD TITLE % ENTER DVD % SOURCE % 6CH INPUT Display Window % Source Select ENTER % SOURCE % DISPLAY SELECT % POWER MENU REC ! $ STOP / $ PAUSE PLAY * # HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO 1 CONCERT VIDEO 2 6 7 5 Program/10Key Section 6.1/ES TV THEATER MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 9 Operation Section $ PAUSE PLAY * # CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 10KEY DSP 11 12 +10 +100 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO 1 CONCERT VIDEO 2 6 7 8 TV THEATER 9 (Preset Group) B – +100 + TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE CH TV MUTE – + VOLUME EFFECT – $ REC STOP PAUSE PLAY * # CHURCH JAZZ CLUB / 10KEY DSP HALL 1 (Preset Group) E MUTE 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO 1 CONCERT VIDEO 2 6 7 8 5 TV THEATER INDEX (Preset Group) D (Preset Group) C 9 PRESET + / – TV INPUT TV VOL – 12 +10 +100 + + MUTE VOLUME EFFECT – +10 0 DISC SKIP – DISC (Preset Group) A/B/C/D/E ■ TAPE Volume Section 11 0 CH TV MUTE – 1~9 CLEAR 10 A / B / C / D / E PRESET + SKIP SEARCH PLAY PAUSE (YAMAHA : PAUSE / STOP) MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 CHP/INDEX – + VOLUME EFFECT HALL 2 1 ROCK CONCERT DISC CH TV MUTE 12 +10 $ ■ MD SYSTEM SYSTEM POWER STANDBY V-AUX TAPE PHONO POWER STANDBY V-AUX TAPE PHONO D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD TITLE % TITLE % ENTER % Others – 11 0 ! POWER PRESET NUMBER 1~8 SOUND – CHAPTER + ! % TV INPUT TV VOL + SEARCH POWER STOP MENU SEARCH 6.1/ES 10 A / B / C / D / E PRESET + DISPLAY % MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 CHP/INDEX A / B / C / D / E PRESET + HALL 2 1 ROCK CONCERT (Preset Group) A 8 0 HALL 1 5 /DTS SUR. 10 CHP/INDEX $ STOP / 6.1/ES 10KEY DSP ! REC % SELECT SOUND – CHAPTER + SEARCH ! ! POWER % SOURCE DISPLAY SOUND – CHAPTER + SEARCH % POWER MENU DISPLAY SELECT % % TITLE 6CH INPUT % VCR 3 LD % VCR 2 VCR 3 6CH INPUT Input Section VCR 1 PHONO Programming Section SYSTEM Power Buttons V-AUX % MACRO TRANSMIT RE-NAME STANDBY % SYSTEM POWER ENTER DISC 6CH INPUT PARAMETER REWIND ON SCREEN LEVEL Setup Section % SLEEP TEST % % DISPLAY SELECT MENU POWER ! ! $ $ REC STOP PAUSE PLAY * # CHURCH JAZZ CLUB / SET MENU SOUND REC / PAUSE 10KEY DSP HALL 1 DISPLAY HALL 2 % DIRECTION A/B PLAY STOP SEARCH POWER REC PAUSE POWER ! $ $ REC STOP PAUSE PLAY * # CHURCH JAZZ CLUB / 10KEY DSP SOUND – CHAPTER + ! HALL 1 HALL 2 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO 1 CONCERT VIDEO 2 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO 1 CONCERT VIDEO 2 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 9 TV INPUT 11 12 0 +10 +100 TV VOL + MUTE – DISC EFFECT + + VOLUME TV VOL – – TV INPUT 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 + MUTE CH TV MUTE SKIP SEARCH PLAY PAUSE STOP 1~9 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 9 CHP/INDEX A / B / C / D / E PRESET CH TV MUTE TV THEATER 6.1/ES 10 A / B / C / D / E PRESET – % MENU SEARCH % 1 CHP/INDEX + DISPLAY SELECT ROCK CONCERT TV THEATER 6.1/ES DECK A / DECK B – CHAPTER + SEARCH % SOURCE % FAST FORWARD % % SOURCE 6CH INPUT – + +10 0 VOLUME EFFECT – DISC V483210 Quick Reference Card ■ LD ■ VCR 1/VCR 2/VCR 3 V-AUX TAPE PHONO POWER STANDBY V-AUX TAPE PHONO POWER STANDBY V-AUX TAPE D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD TITLE % TITLE % TITLE % % ENTER % ENTER % SYSTEM STANDBY ENTER 6CH INPUT 6CH INPUT SELECT ! ! $ $ REC STOP PAUSE PLAY * # CHURCH JAZZ CLUB POWER / 10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO 1 CONCERT VIDEO 2 6 7 8 5 TV THEATER 6.1/ES CHAPTER / TIME 9 (*1) TV INPUT 11 12 0 +10 +100 TV VOL + MUTE CH TV MUTE – SELECT CHAPTER SEARCH PLAY PAUSE REWIND / FAST FORWARD POWER REC (Press twice) + MENU ! ! $ $ REC STOP PAUSE PLAY * # CHURCH JAZZ CLUB / 10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO 1 CONCERT VIDEO 2 6 7 8 5 TV THEATER CLEAR TV / VIDEO 9 +10 0 (*1) TV VOL – – TV INPUT 11 12 0 +10 +100 MUTE CH TV MUTE ■ DVD V-AUX TAPE PHONO POWER STANDBY V-AUX TAPE PHONO D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD D-TV CBL/SAT TUNER MD CD VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 LD DVD TITLE % TITLE % % ENTER % ENTER POWER ! ! $ $ REC STOP PAUSE PLAY * # CHURCH JAZZ CLUB / 10KEY DSP HALL 1 6.1/ES TITLE / INDEX HALL 2 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO 1 CONCERT VIDEO 2 5 6 7 8 TV THEATER 9 + TV INPUT 11 12 0 +10 +100 – + MUTE CH TV MUTE DISPLAY – + VOLUME EFFECT % DISPLAY SELECT % SKIP SEARCH PLAY PAUSE STOP POWER POWER % 10KEY DSP 1~9 CLEAR ENTER +10 0 TV INPUT DISC SKIP TV VOLUME MENU ! $ $ REC STOP PAUSE PLAY HALL 2 – # CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO 1 CONCERT VIDEO 2 5 6 7 8 TV THEATER MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 A / B / C / D / E PRESET + TV INPUT TV VOL – + MUTE CH TV MUTE – DISC TV MUTE * ROCK CONCERT CHP/INDEX DISC SOUND ! HALL 1 HALL 2 # CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO 1 CONCERT VIDEO 2 6 7 8 TV INPUT TV VOL 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 + MUTE CH TV MUTE (*2) 1~9 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 9 – – CHAPTER + SEARCH / 6.1/ES 10 A / B / C / D / E PRESET TV VOL SOUND MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 CHP/INDEX (*1) MENU CURSOR / ENTER – CHAPTER + SEARCH % CHANNEL + / – (*1) 6CH INPUT SOURCE SOUND HALL 1 * A / B / C / D / E PRESET + % SELECT SEARCH POWER RETURN % MENU % DISPLAY DISPLAY PLAY CHP/INDEX SYSTEM STANDBY SOURCE $ PAUSE TV THEATER ENTER – POWER % $ STOP – + VOLUME EFFECT RECALL 0 CHANNEL + / – – DISC 6CH INPUT MENU – CHAPTER + ! REC / 10KEY DSP MENU CURSOR / ENTER SOUND ! 5 ■ D-TV SYSTEM POWER MENU SEARCH % 1~9 DISC DISC TITLE PLAY PAUSE STOP + VOLUME EFFECT – SELECT 10 or 0 + DISPLAY 6.1/ES 10 A / B / C / D / E PRESET + % POWER MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 CHP/INDEX % SOURCE DISPLAY MENU SOUND – CHAPTER + SEARCH % POWER 1~9 VOLUME EFFECT – DISPLAY 6.1/ES 10 A / B / C / D / E PRESET + % SOUND MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 CHP/INDEX % SOURCE SOUND – CHAPTER + SEARCH % SEARCH POWER STOP MENU % DISPLAY PHONO 6CH INPUT % % % % SOURCE DISPLAY ■ CBSAT SYSTEM SYSTEM POWER + VOLUME EFFECT – (*2) (*1) TV VOL, TV INPUT, TV MUTE function if you have setup the manufacturer code for the D-TV Area. (*1) TV VOL, TV INPUT, TV MUTE fonctionnent si vous avez réglé le code du fabricant pour la zone D-TV. (*1) TV VOL, TV INPUT und TV MUTE-Funktion, wenn Sie den Herstellercode für den D-TV-Bereich eingestellt haben. (*1) TV VOL, TV INPUT och TV MUTE om du har programmerat tillverkarkoden för D-TV-området. (*1) Funzioni TV VOL, TV INPUT, TV MUTE se avete impostato il codice del fabbricante per l’area D-TV. (*1) Funciones TV VOL, TV INPUT y TV MUTE si ha preparado el código del fabricante para el área D-TV. (*1) TV VOL, TV INPUT, TV MUTE functie als u de fabrikantencode voor de D-TV set heeft ingevoerd. (*1)ƒp“G–z⁄w‚g‹D-TV ˇ ‡]'w Dfia‰s‰X¡A«h TV VOL¡BTV INPUT¡BTV MUTE ¥¥\fl ¥i¥H¤ˇ¥˛¡C 1~9 (*2) You can control your VCR if you have setup the code for VCR 1. (*2) Vous pouvez commander votre magnétoscope si vous avez réglé le code pour VCR 1. (*2) Sie können Ihren Videorecorder steuern, wenn Sie den Code für VCR 1 eingestellt 10 or 0 haben. (*2) Du kan styra videon om du har programmerat tillverkarkoden för VCR 1. CHANNEL + / – (*2) Se si è impostato il codice per VCR 1, si può controllare il proprio VCR. (*2) Podrá controlar su videograbadora si ha preparado el código para VCR 1. (*2) U kunt uw eigen videorecorder bedienen als u de code voor VCR 1 heeft ingevoerd. (*2)ƒp“G–z⁄w‚g‹VCR 1‡]'w‰s‰X¡A«h–z¥i¥H––¤ VCR¡C V483210